SpaceLogic™

Hardware
Reference Guide
04-40001-01-en
December 2021
SpaceLogic™
Hardware
Reference Guide
04-40001-01-en
December 2021
Copyright © 2021 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
The Schneider Electric brand and any registered trademarks of Schneider Electric Industries SAS referred to in this guide are the sole property of
Schneider Electric SA and its subsidiaries. They may not be used for any purpose without the owner's permission, given in writing. This guide and its
content are protected, within the meaning of the French intellectual property code (Code de la propriété intellectuelle français, referred to hereafter as
"the Code"), under the laws of copyright covering texts, drawings and models, as well as by trademark law. You agree not to reproduce, other than for
your own personal, non-commercial use as defined in the Code, all or part of this guide on any medium whatsoever without Schneider Electric's
permission, given in writing. You also agree not to establish any hypertext links to this guide or its content. Schneider Electric does not grant any right or
license for the personal and non-commercial use of the guide or its content, except for a non-exclusive license to consult it on an "as is" basis, at your
own risk. All other rights are reserved.
Trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
 Contents

Introduction
1 About This Guide ........................................................ 43
1.1 Purpose of This Guide ............................................................... 45
1.2 How This Guide is Organized ..................................................... 46
1.3 Safety Information ...................................................................... 47
1.3.1 Important Information ............................................................... 47
1.3.2 Cybersecurity Safety Notice ..................................................... 48
1.4 Consignes de sécurité ............................................................... 49

2 Additional Information ................................................. 51

2.1 Where to Find Additional Information ......................................... 53

Reference
3 Hardware .................................................................... 57
3.1 Hardware Overview ................................................................... 59
3.1.1 Terminal Bases ........................................................................ 59
3.1.2 PS-24V Power Supplies ........................................................... 59
3.1.3 AS-P Servers ........................................................................... 59
3.1.4 Central IO Modules .................................................................. 59
3.1.5 AS-B Servers ........................................................................... 60
3.1.6 MP-C Controllers ..................................................................... 60
3.1.7 MP-V Controllers ...................................................................... 60
3.1.8 IP-IO Modules .......................................................................... 60
3.1.9 RP-C Controllers ...................................................................... 61
3.1.10 RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-sensors .............. 61
3.1.11 RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Modules ............................... 61
3.1.12 Remote Control ........................................................................ 61
3.1.13 KNX Modbus Gateway ............................................................. 61
3.1.14 SpaceLogic Sensors ................................................................ 62
3.1.15 SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter ................................................ 62
3.1.16 SpaceLogic Zigbee Adapter ..................................................... 62
3.1.17 AD v1 ....................................................................................... 62
3.1.18 AD v2 ....................................................................................... 62
3.1.19 AD v3 ....................................................................................... 62

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

5
 3.1.20 Operator Display ...................................................................... 63
3.1.21 Wiring ...................................................................................... 63

4 Terminal Bases ........................................................... 65

4.1 Terminal Bases .......................................................................... 67
4.1.1 Backplane Board ...................................................................... 68
4.1.2 Device Addressing ................................................................... 68
4.1.3 Device Installation .................................................................... 68
4.1.4 I/O Bus ..................................................................................... 68
4.2 Backplane Board ....................................................................... 69
4.2.1 2x5 Connector .......................................................................... 69
4.2.2 2x6 Connector .......................................................................... 70
4.2.3 Address Logic Circuitry ........................................................... 71
4.2.4 Central IO Module Address Calculation ................................... 71
4.2.5 Device Label ............................................................................ 72
4.3 Device Addressing ..................................................................... 73
4.4 Device Installation ...................................................................... 75
4.4.1 DIN Rail Installation ................................................................. 76
4.4.2 Device Order ............................................................................ 79
4.5 Installing a Terminal Base on a DIN-rail ..................................... 81
4.6 Connecting Terminal Bases ....................................................... 82
4.7 Printing a Wiring List for the I/O Bus .......................................... 83
4.8 Wiring a Terminal Base .............................................................. 84
4.9 Installing an Electronics Module on a Terminal Base ................. 85
4.10 Printing a Label to Identify I/O Channels .................................... 87
4.11 Powering Up a Device ................................................................ 88
4.12 I/O Bus ....................................................................................... 89
4.12.1 I/O Bus Parts ............................................................................ 89
4.12.2 I/O Bus Restrictions ................................................................. 89
4.13 I/O Bus Parts .............................................................................. 90
4.14 I/O Bus Restrictions ................................................................... 92

5 Power Supplies ........................................................... 93

5.1 PS-24V Power Supplies ............................................................. 95
5.1.1 Electronics Modules ................................................................. 95
5.1.2 Terminal Bases ........................................................................ 96
5.1.3 Power Supply PS-24V LEDs .................................................... 96
5.1.4 Power Budget .......................................................................... 96
5.1.5 ................................................................................................. 96
5.1.6 Internal Configuration ............................................................... 98
5.2 Electronics Modules ................................................................... 99
5.3 Terminal Bases ........................................................................ 101
5.3.1 Backplane Board .................................................................... 102
5.3.2 Device Addressing ................................................................. 102
5.3.3 Device Installation .................................................................. 102
5.3.4 I/O Bus ................................................................................... 102
5.4 Power Supply PS-24V LEDs .................................................... 103

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

6
 5.4.1 Main Power LED .................................................................... 103
5.4.2 Status LED ............................................................................. 104
5.5 Power Budget .......................................................................... 105

6 AS-P Servers ............................................................ 107

6.1 AS-P Servers ........................................................................... 109
6.1.1 Electronics Modules ............................................................... 109
6.1.2 Terminal Bases ...................................................................... 109
6.1.3 AS-P Server Models .............................................................. 110
6.1.4 Memory .................................................................................. 110
6.1.5 Supported Building Standards ............................................... 110
6.1.6 AS-P Server Communication Ports ........................................ 111
6.1.7 AS-P Server Screw Terminals ............................................... 111
6.1.8 AS-P Server LEDs ................................................................. 111
6.1.9 Reset Functions ..................................................................... 111
6.1.10 Communication Port Wiring ................................................... 112
6.1.11 AS-P Server Software ............................................................ 112
6.1.12 Automation Server Replacement Using Restore ................... 112
6.1.13 ............................................................................................... 112
6.1.14 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 114
6.2 Electronics Modules ................................................................. 116
6.3 Terminal Bases ........................................................................ 118
6.3.1 Backplane Board .................................................................... 119
6.3.2 Device Addressing ................................................................. 119
6.3.3 Device Installation .................................................................. 119
6.3.4 I/O Bus ................................................................................... 119
6.4 AS-P Server Communication Ports .......................................... 120
6.5 AS-P Server Screw Terminals ................................................. 121
6.6 AS-P Server LEDs ................................................................... 124
6.6.1 Status LED ............................................................................. 125
6.6.2 RS-485 LEDs ......................................................................... 125
6.6.3 Ethernet LEDs ........................................................................ 126
6.6.4 LON LEDs .............................................................................. 126

7 Central IO Modules ................................................... 127

7.1 Central IO Modules .................................................................. 129
7.1.1 Electronics Modules ............................................................... 129
7.1.2 Terminal Bases ...................................................................... 130
7.1.3 Central IO Module LEDs ........................................................ 130
7.1.4 Override Switches and Potentiometers .................................. 130
7.1.5 External Device Connections ................................................. 130
7.1.6 Grounding and Power ............................................................ 130
7.1.7 Input Modules ........................................................................ 131
7.1.8 Output Modules ...................................................................... 131
7.1.9 Mixed Modules ....................................................................... 131
7.2 Electronics Modules ................................................................. 132
7.3 Terminal Bases ........................................................................ 134

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

7
 7.3.1 Backplane Board .................................................................... 135
7.3.2 Device Addressing ................................................................. 135
7.3.3 Device Installation .................................................................. 135
7.3.4 I/O Bus ................................................................................... 135
7.4 Central IO Module LEDs .......................................................... 136
7.4.1 Central IO Module Status LED ............................................... 136
7.4.2 I/O Channel Status LEDs ....................................................... 137
7.5 Override Switches and Potentiometers .................................... 138
7.5.1 Override Switches .................................................................. 138
7.5.2 Potentiometers ...................................................................... 140
7.6 Input Modules .......................................................................... 141
7.6.1 DI-16 Central IO Module ........................................................ 141
7.6.2 UI-16 Central IO Module ........................................................ 141
7.6.3 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module ................................................ 142
7.7 DI-16 Central IO Module .......................................................... 143
7.7.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 143
7.7.2 ............................................................................................... 145
7.8 UI-16 Central IO Module .......................................................... 147
7.8.1 Universal inputs ..................................................................... 147
7.8.2 ............................................................................................... 153
7.9 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module ................................................. 157
7.9.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 157
7.9.2 ............................................................................................... 162
7.10 Output Modules ....................................................................... 166
7.10.1 DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO Modules ................... 166
7.10.2 DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO Modules ...................... 166
7.10.3 AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO Modules ................................... 166
7.10.4 AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO Modules ............................ 167
7.11 DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO Modules ..................... 168
7.11.1 Digital outputs ........................................................................ 168
7.11.2 ............................................................................................... 169
7.12 DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO Modules ........................ 172
7.12.1 Digital outputs ........................................................................ 172
7.12.2 ............................................................................................... 173
7.13 AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO Modules ..................................... 176
7.13.1 Analog outputs ....................................................................... 176
7.13.2 ............................................................................................... 178
7.14 AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO Modules ............................. 181
7.14.1 Analog outputs ....................................................................... 181
7.14.2 ............................................................................................... 182
7.15 Mixed Modules ......................................................................... 185
7.15.1 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules ....... 185
7.15.2 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules ................... 185
7.15.3 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules ............ 186
7.16 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules ......... 187
7.16.1 Universal inputs ..................................................................... 187
7.16.2 Digital outputs ........................................................................ 193

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

8
 7.16.3 ............................................................................................... 193
7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules ..................... 198
7.17.1 Universal inputs ..................................................................... 198
7.17.2 Analog outputs ....................................................................... 204
7.17.3 ............................................................................................... 205
7.18 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules .............. 210
7.18.1 Universal inputs ..................................................................... 210
7.18.2 Analog outputs ....................................................................... 216
7.18.3 ............................................................................................... 216

8 AS-B Servers ............................................................ 221

8.1 AS-B Servers ........................................................................... 223
8.1.1 AS-B Server Models .............................................................. 223
8.1.2 AS-B Server Onboard I/O ...................................................... 224
8.1.3 Output Override Function ....................................................... 224
8.1.4 Built-in Power Supply ............................................................. 224
8.1.5 Memory .................................................................................. 224
8.1.6 Supported Building Standards ............................................... 224
8.1.7 AS-B Server Communication Ports ........................................ 225
8.1.8 AS-B Server Screw Terminals ............................................... 225
8.1.9 AS-B Server LEDs ................................................................. 225
8.1.10 Reset Functions ..................................................................... 225
8.1.11 Device Installation .................................................................. 226
8.1.12 Wiring .................................................................................... 226
8.1.13 AS-B Server Software ............................................................ 226
8.1.14 Server Replacement Using Restore ....................................... 226
8.1.15 ............................................................................................... 226
8.1.16 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 228
8.2 AS-B Server Communication Ports .......................................... 230
8.3 AS-B Server Screw Terminals ................................................. 231
8.3.1 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 24 I/O Points ............ 231
8.3.2 Screw Terminals for AS-B servers with 36 I/O Points ............ 231
8.4 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 24 I/O Points .............. 232
8.5 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 36 I/O Points .............. 236
8.6 AS-B Server LEDs ................................................................... 241
8.6.1 Status LED ............................................................................. 241
8.6.2 RS-485 LEDs ......................................................................... 242
8.6.3 Ethernet LEDs ........................................................................ 242
8.7 AS-B Server Onboard I/O ........................................................ 243
8.7.1 Universal Inputs/Outputs ........................................................ 243
8.7.2 Digital Inputs .......................................................................... 243
8.7.3 Relay Outputs ........................................................................ 243
8.7.4 Triac Outputs ......................................................................... 243
8.8 Universal Inputs/Outputs ......................................................... 244
8.8.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 244
8.8.2 Outputs .................................................................................. 250
8.8.3 ............................................................................................... 250

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

9
 8.9 Digital Inputs ............................................................................ 254
8.9.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 254
8.9.2 ............................................................................................... 255
8.10 Relay Outputs .......................................................................... 256
8.10.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 256
8.10.2 ............................................................................................... 256
8.11 Triac Outputs ........................................................................... 258
8.11.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 258
8.11.2 ............................................................................................... 258
8.12 AS-B Server Device Installation ............................................... 260
8.13 Installing an AS-B Server on a DIN Rail ................................... 263
8.14 Installing a Terminal Block on an AS-B Server ......................... 264
8.15 Removing a Terminal Block from an AS-B Server ................... 266
8.16 Wiring a Terminal Block on an AS-B Server ............................. 267
8.17 Printing a Wiring List for the I/O Bus ........................................ 268
8.18 Printing a Label to Identify I/O Channels .................................. 269
8.19 Powering Up an AS-B Server ................................................... 270

9 SpaceLogic Device General Information .................. 271

9.1 Status LEDs ............................................................................. 273
9.1.1 Automation Server Status LED .............................................. 273
9.1.2 Central IO Module Status LED ............................................... 274
9.1.3 PS-24V Power Supply Status LED ........................................ 274
9.1.4 MP Controller Status LED ...................................................... 274
9.1.5 IP-IO Module Status LED ....................................................... 275
9.1.6 RP Controller Status LED ...................................................... 275
9.2 Automation Server Reset Functions ........................................ 277
9.2.1 Retain Levels for Variables .................................................... 278
9.2.2 Configuration and Historic Database ..................................... 279
9.2.3 DFU Mode .............................................................................. 279
9.3 Resetting a Automation Server to DFU Mode .......................... 280

10 MP-C Controllers ...................................................... 281

10.1 MP-C Controllers ..................................................................... 283
10.1.1 MP-C Models ......................................................................... 283
10.1.2 MP-C Onboard I/O ................................................................. 284
10.1.3 Output Override Function (Optional) ...................................... 284
10.1.4 MP-C Built-in Power Supply ................................................... 284
10.1.5 BACnet/IP Device Memory .................................................... 284
10.1.6 BACnet/IP Controller Supported Building Standards ............. 284
10.1.7 MP Controller Communication Ports ...................................... 284
10.1.8 BACnet/IP Controller Sensor Bus .......................................... 285
10.1.9 MP-C Screw Terminals .......................................................... 285
10.1.10 MP Controller LEDs ............................................................... 285
10.1.11 MP Controller Reset Modes ................................................... 285
10.1.12 MP-C Device Installation ........................................................ 285
10.1.13 Wiring .................................................................................... 285

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

10
 10.1.14 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 286
10.1.15 ............................................................................................... 286
10.1.16 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 289
10.2 MP-C Models ........................................................................... 290
10.3 MP-C Onboard I/O ................................................................... 291
10.3.1 Universal Inputs/Outputs ........................................................ 291
10.3.2 Relay Outputs ........................................................................ 291
10.3.3 High Power Relay Outputs ..................................................... 291
10.3.4 Triac Outputs ......................................................................... 292
10.4 MP-C Built-in Power Supply ..................................................... 293
10.5 MP-C Screw Terminals ............................................................ 294
10.5.1 MP-C-15A Screw Terminals .................................................. 294
10.5.2 MP-C-18A Screw Terminals .................................................. 294
10.5.3 MP-C-18B Screw Terminals .................................................. 294
10.5.4 MP-C-24A Screw Terminals .................................................. 294
10.5.5 MP-C-36A Screw Terminals .................................................. 295
10.6 MP-C-15A Screw Terminals ..................................................... 296
10.7 MP-C-18A Screw Terminals ..................................................... 299
10.8 MP-C-18B Screw Terminals ..................................................... 302
10.9 MP-C-24A Screw Terminals ..................................................... 306
10.10 MP-C-36A Screw Terminals ..................................................... 310
10.11 MP-C Device Installation .......................................................... 315
10.12 Installing MP-C on a DIN Rail ................................................... 319
10.13 Installing MP-C on a Flat Surface ............................................. 320
10.14 Installing MP-C Display ............................................................ 324
10.15 Installing a Terminal Block on MP-C ........................................ 327
10.16 Removing a Terminal Block from MP-C ................................... 329
10.17 Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-C ............................................ 330
10.18 Powering Up MP-C .................................................................. 331
10.19 Universal Inputs/Outputs ......................................................... 333
10.19.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 333
10.19.2 Outputs .................................................................................. 338
10.19.3 ............................................................................................... 339
10.20 Relay Outputs .......................................................................... 343
10.20.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 343
10.20.2 ............................................................................................... 343
10.21 High Power Relay Outputs ....................................................... 345
10.21.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 345
10.21.2 ............................................................................................... 345
10.22 Triac Outputs ........................................................................... 347
10.22.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 347
10.22.2 ............................................................................................... 348

11 MP-V Controllers ...................................................... 349

11.1 MP-V Controllers ..................................................................... 351
11.1.1 MP-V Models ......................................................................... 351
11.1.2 MP-V Onboard I/O ................................................................. 351

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

11
 11.1.3 MP-V Damper Actuator .......................................................... 352
11.1.4 MP-V Air Flow Sensor ............................................................ 352
11.1.5 MP-V Built-in Power Supply ................................................... 352
11.1.6 BACnet/IP Device Memory .................................................... 352
11.1.7 BACnet/IP Controller Supported Building Standards ............. 352
11.1.8 MP Controller Communication Ports ...................................... 353
11.1.9 BACnet/IP Controller Sensor Bus ......................................... 353
11.1.10 MP-V Screw Terminals .......................................................... 353
11.1.11 MP Controller LEDs ............................................................... 353
11.1.12 MP Controller Reset Modes ................................................... 353
11.1.13 MP-V Device Installation ........................................................ 353
11.1.14 Wiring .................................................................................... 354
11.1.15 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 354
11.1.16 ............................................................................................... 354
11.1.17 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 356
11.2 MP-V Models ........................................................................... 358
11.3 MP-V Onboard I/O ................................................................... 359
11.3.1 Universal Inputs ..................................................................... 359
11.3.2 Triac Outputs ......................................................................... 359
11.3.3 Analog Outputs ...................................................................... 359
11.4 MP-V Damper Actuator ............................................................ 360
11.5 MP-V Air Flow Sensor .............................................................. 361
11.6 MP-V Built-in Power Supply ..................................................... 362
11.7 MP-V Screw Terminals ............................................................ 363
11.7.1 MP-V-7A Screw Terminals ..................................................... 363
11.7.2 MP-V-9A Screw Terminals ..................................................... 363
11.8 MP-V-7A Screw Terminals ....................................................... 364
11.9 MP-V-9A Screw Terminals ....................................................... 366
11.10 MP-V Device Installation .......................................................... 368
11.11 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Clockwise (CW) to
Open ........................................................................................ 372
11.12 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Counter-Clockwise
(CCW) to Open ........................................................................ 378
11.13 Moving the Damper Shaft Mounting Screws to the Alternative
Positions .................................................................................. 384
11.14 Installing an AM-135 Shaft Adapter on a 9.5 mm (0.375 inch)
Diameter Damper Shaft ........................................................... 386
11.15 Connecting an Air Velocity Probe to the MP-V Air Flow
Sensor ..................................................................................... 387
11.16 Installing a Terminal Block on MP-V ........................................ 389
11.17 Removing a Terminal Block from MP-V ................................... 391
11.18 Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-V ............................................ 392
11.19 Powering Up MP-V .................................................................. 393
11.20 Universal Inputs ....................................................................... 395
11.20.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 395
11.20.2 ............................................................................................... 400
11.21 Triac Outputs ........................................................................... 403
11.21.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 403

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

12
 11.21.2 ............................................................................................... 404
11.22 Analog Outputs ........................................................................ 405
11.22.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 405
11.22.2 ............................................................................................... 406

12 MP Controller General Information ........................... 407

12.1 BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory ...................................... 409
12.2 BACnet/IP controller Supported Building Standards ................ 410
12.3 MP Controller Communication Ports ........................................ 411
12.4 MP Controller Sensor Bus ........................................................ 412
12.5 Connecting SpaceLogic Sensors to an MP Controller ............ 417
12.6 MP Controller LEDs ................................................................. 419
12.6.1 Status LED ............................................................................. 419
12.6.2 Sensor Bus LEDs ................................................................... 420
12.6.3 Ethernet LEDs ........................................................................ 420
12.7 MP Controller Reset Modes ..................................................... 421
12.7.1 Factory Reset ......................................................................... 422
12.7.2 Retain Levels for Variables .................................................... 422
12.7.3 Value Retention on Restarts Using Command Priority
Levels .................................................................................... 423

13 Output Override ........................................................ 425

13.1 Output Override Function ......................................................... 427
13.1.1 User Experience .................................................................... 427
13.1.2 Keys ....................................................................................... 427
13.1.3 Basic Operation ..................................................................... 427
13.1.4 Override Outputs .................................................................... 428
13.1.5 View Inputs and Outputs ........................................................ 428
13.1.6 Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use ................. 428
13.1.7 ............................................................................................... 428
13.2 User Experience ...................................................................... 429
13.3 Keys ......................................................................................... 431
13.4 Basic Operation ....................................................................... 432
13.4.1 Highlight an Option ................................................................ 432
13.4.2 Select an Option .................................................................... 432
13.4.3 Change a Value ..................................................................... 433
13.5 Override Outputs ..................................................................... 435
13.5.1 Override Analog Outputs ....................................................... 435
13.5.2 Override Digital Outputs ......................................................... 435
13.5.3 Override Digital Pulsed Outputs ............................................. 435
13.5.4 Override Tristate Outputs ....................................................... 436
13.5.5 Override Tristate Pulsed Outputs ........................................... 436
13.6 Overriding an Analog Output .................................................... 437
13.7 Overriding a Digital Output ....................................................... 440
13.8 Overriding a Digital Pulsed Output ........................................... 442
13.9 Overriding Tristate Outputs ...................................................... 445
13.10 Overriding Tristate Pulsed Outputs .......................................... 447
13.11 Removing an Override for an Output ....................................... 450

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

13
 13.12 View Inputs and Outputs .......................................................... 452
13.13 Viewing Inputs and Outputs ..................................................... 453
13.14 Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use ................... 454
13.14.1 Configure a Universal Input/Output ........................................ 454
13.14.2 Configure a Digital Output ...................................................... 456
13.14.3 Configure a Digital Input ......................................................... 457
13.15 Configuring a Universal Input/Output of Ua or Ub Type as an
Analog Output .......................................................................... 458
13.16 Configuring a Universal Input/Output of Uc Type as an Analog
Output ...................................................................................... 460
13.17 Configuring a Universal Input/Output as an Input ..................... 462
13.18 Configuring a Digital Output ..................................................... 465
13.19 Configuring a Digital Input ........................................................ 467
13.20 Removing a Configuration for an Input or Output ..................... 469
13.21 Exiting Configuration Mode ...................................................... 471

14 Output Override User Interface ................................. 473

14.1 Icons ........................................................................................ 475
14.2 Home Screen on AS-B Servers ................................................ 477
14.3 Home Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module .................................. 478
14.4 I/O Filter Screen ....................................................................... 479
14.5 I/O List Screen ......................................................................... 480
14.6 Output Override Screen ........................................................... 481
14.7 I/O Configuration Screen ......................................................... 482
14.8 I/O Selection Screen ................................................................ 483
14.9 Digital Output Configuration Screen ......................................... 484
14.10 Pulse Period Configuration Screen .......................................... 485
14.11 Digital Input Configuration Screen ........................................... 486
14.12 Analog Output Configuration Screen ....................................... 487
14.13 Universal Input/Output Configuration Screen ........................... 488
14.14 Temperature Input Configuration Screen ................................. 489
14.15 Supervised Input Configuration Screen ................................... 490
14.16 Supervised Resistor Configuration Screen .............................. 491
14.17 Status Screen on AS-B Servers ............................................... 492
14.18 About Screen on AS-B Servers_Display .................................. 493
14.19 About Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module .................................. 494

15 IP-IO Modules ........................................................... 495

15.1 IP-IO Modules .......................................................................... 497
15.1.1 IP-IO Module Models and I/O Point Types ............................. 497
15.1.2 Output Override Function (Optional) ...................................... 497
15.1.3 IP-IO Module Built-in Power Supply ....................................... 498
15.1.4 BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory .................................... 498
15.1.5 IP-IO Module Supported Building Standards ......................... 498
15.1.6 IP-IO Module Communication Ports ....................................... 498
15.1.7 IP-IO Module Screw Terminals .............................................. 498
15.1.8 IP-IO Module LEDs ................................................................ 499
15.1.9 IP-IO Module Reset Modes .................................................... 499

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

14
 15.1.10 IP-IO Module Device Installation ............................................ 499
15.1.11 Wiring .................................................................................... 499
15.1.12 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 499
15.1.13 ............................................................................................... 500
15.1.14 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 502
15.2 IP-IO Module Models and I/O Point Types ............................... 503
15.2.1 Digital Inputs .......................................................................... 503
15.2.2 Universal Inputs/Outputs ........................................................ 503
15.2.3 Relay Outputs ........................................................................ 504
15.2.4 High Power Relay Outputs ..................................................... 504
15.3 IP-IO Module Built-in Power Supply ......................................... 505
15.4 BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory ...................................... 506
15.5 IP-IO Module Supported Building Standards ........................... 507
15.6 IP-IO Module Communication Ports ......................................... 508
15.7 IP-IO Module Screw Terminals ................................................ 509
15.7.1 IP-IO-DI10 Screw Terminals .................................................. 509
15.7.2 IP-IO-UIO10 Screw Terminals ............................................... 509
15.7.3 IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 Screw Terminals ..................................... 509
15.8 IP-IO-DI10 Screw Terminals .................................................... 510
15.9 IP-IO-UIO10 Screw Terminals ................................................. 512
15.10 IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 Screw Terminals ....................................... 515
15.11 IP-IO Module LEDs .................................................................. 518
15.11.1 Status LED ............................................................................. 518
15.11.2 Ethernet LEDs ........................................................................ 519
15.12 IP-IO Module Reset Modes ...................................................... 520
15.12.1 Factory Reset ......................................................................... 521
15.12.2 Retain Levels for Variables .................................................... 521
15.12.3 Value Retention on Restarts Using Command Priority
Levels .................................................................................... 522
15.13 IP-IO Module Device Installation .............................................. 523
15.14 Installing an IP-IO Module on a DIN Rail .................................. 527
15.15 Installing an IP-IO Module on a Flat Surface ............................ 528
15.16 Installing MP-C Display ............................................................ 532
15.17 Installing a Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module ....................... 535
15.18 Removing a Terminal Block from an IP-IO Module .................. 537
15.19 Wiring a Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module ........................... 539
15.20 Powering Up an IP-IO Module .................................................. 541
15.21 Digital Inputs ............................................................................ 543
15.21.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 543
15.21.2 ............................................................................................... 543
15.22 Universal Inputs/Outputs ......................................................... 545
15.22.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 545
15.22.2 Outputs .................................................................................. 550
15.22.3 ............................................................................................... 551
15.23 Relay Outputs .......................................................................... 554
15.23.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 554
15.23.2 ............................................................................................... 554

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

15
 15.24 High Power Relay Outputs ....................................................... 556
15.24.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 556
15.24.2 ............................................................................................... 556

16 RP-C Controllers ....................................................... 559

16.1 RP-C Controllers ...................................................................... 561
16.1.1 RP-C Models .......................................................................... 561
16.1.2 RP-C Onboard I/O ................................................................. 561
16.1.3 RP-C Built-in Power Supply ................................................... 562
16.1.4 BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory .................................... 562
16.1.5 BACnet/IP Controller Supported Building Standards ............. 562
16.1.6 RP-C Wireless Connectivity ................................................... 562
16.1.7 RP-C Communication Ports ................................................... 562
16.1.8 RP-C Sensor Bus ................................................................... 563
16.1.9 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 563
16.1.10 RP-C Modbus ........................................................................ 563
16.1.11 RP-C Screw Terminals .......................................................... 563
16.1.12 RP-C LEDs ............................................................................ 563
16.1.13 RP Controller Reset Modes ................................................... 563
16.1.14 RP-C Device Installation ........................................................ 564
16.1.15 24 VAC Output on RP-C-16A Model ...................................... 564
16.1.16 Wiring .................................................................................... 564
16.1.17 BACnet/IP Controller Device Firmware Management ............ 564
16.1.18 RP-C Regulatory Compliance and Approvals ........................ 564
16.1.19 ............................................................................................... 565
16.1.20 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 568
16.2 RP-C Models ............................................................................ 570
16.3 RP-C Onboard I/O ................................................................... 571
16.3.1 Universal Inputs/Outputs ........................................................ 571
16.3.2 Solid-state Relay (SSR) Outputs ............................................ 571
16.3.3 Relay Outputs ........................................................................ 571
16.3.4 High Power Relay Outputs ..................................................... 572
16.4 RP-C Built-in Power Supply ..................................................... 573
16.4.1 RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C Models (24 VAC/DC) .................. 573
16.4.2 RP-C-16A Model (230 VAC) .................................................. 573
16.5 BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory ...................................... 574
16.6 BACnet/IP controller Supported Building Standards ................ 575
16.7 RP-C Wireless Connectivity ..................................................... 576
16.8 RP-C Communication Ports ..................................................... 578
16.8.1 Ethernet Ports ........................................................................ 578
16.8.2 USB Ports .............................................................................. 578
16.8.3 RS-485 Ports ......................................................................... 578
16.9 RP-C Sensor Bus ..................................................................... 580
16.10 Connecting SpaceLogic Sensor Devices to an RP-C Controller
................................................................................................. 584
16.11 RP-C Room Bus ....................................................................... 586
16.12 RP-C Modbus .......................................................................... 589

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

16
 16.13 RP-C Screw Terminals ............................................................ 592
16.13.1 RP-C-12A Screw Terminals ................................................... 592
16.13.2 RP-C-12B Screw Terminals ................................................... 592
16.13.3 RP-C-12C Screw Terminals ................................................... 592
16.13.4 RP-C-16A Screw Terminals ................................................... 592
16.14 RP-C-12A Screw Terminals ..................................................... 593
16.15 RP-C-12B Screw Terminals ..................................................... 596
16.16 RP-C-12C Screw Terminals ..................................................... 599
16.17 RP-C-16A Screw Terminals ..................................................... 602
16.18 RP-C LEDs .............................................................................. 605
16.18.1 Status LED ............................................................................. 605
16.19 RP Controller Reset Modes ..................................................... 607
16.19.1 Factory Reset ......................................................................... 608
16.19.2 Retain Levels for Variables .................................................... 608
16.19.3 Value Retention on Restarts Using Command Priority
Levels .................................................................................... 609
16.20 RP-C Device Installation .......................................................... 610
16.21 Installing RP-C on a DIN Rail ................................................... 615
16.22 Installing RP-C on a Flat Surface ............................................. 616
16.23 Wiring a Screw Terminal on RP-C ........................................... 620
16.24 Powering Up an RP-C-12A, -12B, or -12C Controller .............. 621
16.25 Powering Up an RP-C-16A Controller ...................................... 622
16.26 Installing the Optional Covers on the RP-C .............................. 623
16.27 Removing an Optional Cover from the RP-C ........................... 625
16.28 24 VAC Output on the RP-C-16A Controller ............................ 626
16.29 Universal Inputs/Outputs ......................................................... 628
16.29.1 Inputs ..................................................................................... 628
16.29.2 Outputs .................................................................................. 634
16.29.3 ............................................................................................... 634
16.30 Solid-state Relay (SSR) Outputs ............................................. 638
16.30.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 638
16.30.2 ............................................................................................... 638
16.31 Relay Outputs .......................................................................... 640
16.31.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 640
16.31.2 ............................................................................................... 640
16.32 High Power Relay Outputs ....................................................... 642
16.32.1 Outputs .................................................................................. 642
16.32.2 ............................................................................................... 642
16.33 RP-C Regulatory Compliance and Approvals .......................... 644
16.33.1 CE - European Union (EU) ..................................................... 644
16.33.2 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) ........................ 644
16.33.3 Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
(ISED) .................................................................................... 645
16.33.4 eu.bac .................................................................................... 646

17 RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-

sensors ..................................................................... 647

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

17
 17.1 RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-sensors .............. 651
17.1.1 Light Modules ......................................................................... 652
17.1.2 Blind Modules ........................................................................ 652
17.1.3 Relay Modules ....................................................................... 652
17.1.4 Multi-sensor ........................................................................... 652
17.1.5 Remote Control ...................................................................... 652
17.2 Light Modules .......................................................................... 653
17.2.1 RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD .......................................................... 653
17.2.2 RP-C-EXT-DALI .................................................................... 653
17.2.3 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD ......................................................... 653
17.2.4 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4 ................................................................ 653
17.3 Blind Modules .......................................................................... 654
17.3.1 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD ................................................. 654
17.3.2 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD ................................................. 654
17.3.3 RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD ........................................................ 654
17.3.4 RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD ......................................................... 654
17.4 Relay Modules ......................................................................... 655
17.4.1 RP-C-EXT-REL-4 .................................................................. 655
17.4.2 CRS-HH-REL-10 ................................................................... 655
17.5 RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD ............................................................ 656
17.5.1 DALI Inputs/Outputs with Power Distribution ......................... 656
17.5.2 RP Controller Expansion Module Digital Inputs ..................... 657
17.5.3 RP Controller Expansion Module Built-in Power Supply ........ 657
17.5.4 RP Controller Expansion Module Energy Metering ................ 657
17.5.5 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Memory .. 657
17.5.6 DALI Light Module Supported Building Standards ................. 658
17.5.7 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor
Communication Ports ............................................................. 658
17.5.8 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Address
Switch .................................................................................... 658
17.5.9 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 658
17.5.10 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors ...... 658
17.5.11 RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs ................................. 659
17.5.12 RP Controller Expansion Module Set Button ......................... 659
17.5.13 RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation ............. 659
17.5.14 Wiring .................................................................................... 659
17.5.15 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Maintenance
Modes .................................................................................... 659
17.5.16 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 660
17.5.17 RP Controller Expansion Module Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ............................................................................... 660
17.5.18 ............................................................................................... 660
17.5.19 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 663
17.6 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD ............................................................ 664
17.6.1 0-10V Light Outputs with Power Distribution ......................... 664
17.6.2 RP Controller Expansion Module Digital Inputs ..................... 664
17.6.3 RP Controller Expansion Module Built-in Power Supply ........ 665

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

18
 17.6.4 RP Controller Expansion Module Energy Metering ................ 665
17.6.5 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Memory .. 665
17.6.6 0-10V Light Module Supported Building Standards ............... 665
17.6.7 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor
Communication Ports ............................................................. 666
17.6.8 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Address
Switch .................................................................................... 666
17.6.9 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 666
17.6.10 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors ....... 666
17.6.11 RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs ................................. 666
17.6.12 RP Controller Expansion Module Set Button ......................... 667
17.6.13 RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation ............. 667
17.6.14 Wiring .................................................................................... 667
17.6.15 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Maintenance
Modes .................................................................................... 667
17.6.16 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 667
17.6.17 RP Controller Expansion Module Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ............................................................................... 668
17.6.18 ............................................................................................... 668
17.6.19 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 670
17.7 RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD ........................................................... 672
17.7.1 High-Voltage Blind Outputs .................................................... 672
17.7.2 RP Controller Expansion Module Digital Inputs ..................... 672
17.7.3 RP Controller Expansion Module Energy Metering ................ 673
17.7.4 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Memory .. 673
17.7.5 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor
Communication Ports ............................................................. 673
17.7.6 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Address
Switch .................................................................................... 673
17.7.7 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 673
17.7.8 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors ....... 674
17.7.9 RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs ................................. 674
17.7.10 RP Controller Expansion Module Set Button ......................... 674
17.7.11 RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation ............. 674
17.7.12 Wiring .................................................................................... 674
17.7.13 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Maintenance
Modes .................................................................................... 675
17.7.14 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 675
17.7.15 RP Controller Expansion Module Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ............................................................................... 675
17.7.16 ............................................................................................... 675
17.7.17 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 677
17.8 RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD ........................................................... 679
17.8.1 Low-Voltage Blind Outputs .................................................... 679
17.8.2 RP Controller Expansion Module Digital Inputs ..................... 679
17.8.3 RP Controller Expansion Module Built-in Power Supply ........ 680
17.8.4 RP Controller Expansion Module Energy Metering ................ 680
17.8.5 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Memory .. 680

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

19
 17.8.6 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor
Communication Ports ............................................................. 680
17.8.7 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Address
Switch .................................................................................... 680
17.8.8 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 681
17.8.9 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors ....... 681
17.8.10 RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs ................................. 681
17.8.11 RP Controller Expansion Module Set Button ......................... 681
17.8.12 RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation ............. 681
17.8.13 Wiring .................................................................................... 682
17.8.14 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Maintenance
Modes .................................................................................... 682
17.8.15 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 682
17.8.16 RP Controller Expansion Module Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ............................................................................... 682
17.8.17 ............................................................................................... 683
17.8.18 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 685
17.9 RP-C-EXT-MS-BLE ................................................................. 687
17.9.1 Motion Detection .................................................................... 687
17.9.2 Luminosity Measurement ....................................................... 688
17.9.3 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Memory .. 688
17.9.4 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Wireless Connectivity 688
17.9.5 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor
Communication Ports ............................................................. 688
17.9.6 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Address
Switch .................................................................................... 688
17.9.7 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 688
17.9.8 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor LED ........................... 689
17.9.9 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Set Button ................. 689
17.9.10 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Device Installation ..... 689
17.9.11 Wiring .................................................................................... 689
17.9.12 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Maintenance
Modes .................................................................................... 689
17.9.13 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 690
17.9.14 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Regulatory Compliance
and Approvals ........................................................................ 690
17.9.15 ............................................................................................... 690
17.9.16 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 693
17.10 RP-C-EXT-DALI ....................................................................... 694
17.10.1 DALI Inputs/Outputs without Power Distribution .................... 694
17.10.2 RP Controller Expansion Module Digital Inputs ..................... 695
17.10.3 RP Controller Expansion Module Built-in Power Supply ........ 695
17.10.4 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Memory .. 695
17.10.5 DALI Light Module Supported Building Standards ................. 695
17.10.6 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor
Communication Ports ............................................................. 696
17.10.7 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Address
Switch .................................................................................... 696
17.10.8 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 696

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

20
 17.10.9 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors ...... 696
17.10.10 RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs ................................. 696
17.10.11 RP Controller Expansion Module Set Button ......................... 697
17.10.12 RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation ............. 697
17.10.13 Wiring .................................................................................... 697
17.10.14 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Maintenance
Modes .................................................................................... 697
17.10.15 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 697
17.10.16 RP Controller Expansion Module Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ............................................................................... 698
17.10.17 ............................................................................................... 698
17.10.18 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 700
17.11 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4 .................................................................. 702
17.11.1 0-10V Light Outputs without Power Distribution .................... 702
17.11.2 RP Controller Expansion Module Digital Inputs ..................... 702
17.11.3 RP Controller Expansion Module Built-in Power Supply ........ 703
17.11.4 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Memory .. 703
17.11.5 0-10V Light Module Supported Building Standards ............... 703
17.11.6 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor
Communication Ports ............................................................. 703
17.11.7 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Address
Switch .................................................................................... 703
17.11.8 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 704
17.11.9 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors ....... 704
17.11.10 RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs ................................. 704
17.11.11 RP Controller Expansion Module Set Button ......................... 704
17.11.12 RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation ............. 704
17.11.13 Wiring .................................................................................... 705
17.11.14 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Maintenance
Modes .................................................................................... 705
17.11.15 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 705
17.11.16 RP Controller Expansion Module Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ............................................................................... 705
17.11.17 ............................................................................................... 706
17.11.18 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 707
17.12 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD ................................................... 709
17.12.1 SMI Blind Outputs .................................................................. 709
17.12.2 RP Controller Expansion Module Digital Inputs ..................... 709
17.12.3 RP Controller Expansion Module Built-in Power Supply ........ 710
17.12.4 RP Controller Expansion Module Energy Metering ................ 710
17.12.5 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Memory .. 710
17.12.6 SMI Blind Modules Supported Building Standards ................. 710
17.12.7 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor
Communication Ports ............................................................. 711
17.12.8 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Address
Switch .................................................................................... 711
17.12.9 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 711
17.12.10 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors ....... 711

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

21
 17.12.11 RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs ................................. 711
17.12.12 RP Controller Expansion Module Set Button ......................... 712
17.12.13 RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation ............. 712
17.12.14 Wiring .................................................................................... 712
17.12.15 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Maintenance
Modes .................................................................................... 712
17.12.16 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 712
17.12.17 RP Controller Expansion Module Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ............................................................................... 713
17.12.18 ............................................................................................... 713
17.12.19 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 715
17.13 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD .................................................... 717
17.13.1 SMI LoVo Blind Outputs ......................................................... 717
17.13.2 RP Controller Expansion Module Digital Inputs ..................... 717
17.13.3 RP Controller Expansion Module Built-in Power Supply ........ 718
17.13.4 RP Controller Expansion Module Energy Metering ................ 718
17.13.5 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Memory .. 718
17.13.6 SMI Blind Modules Supported Building Standards ................. 718
17.13.7 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor
Communication Ports ............................................................. 719
17.13.8 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Address
Switch .................................................................................... 719
17.13.9 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 719
17.13.10 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors ....... 719
17.13.11 RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs ................................. 719
17.13.12 RP Controller Expansion Module Set Button ......................... 720
17.13.13 RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation ............. 720
17.13.14 Wiring .................................................................................... 720
17.13.15 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Maintenance
Modes .................................................................................... 720
17.13.16 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 720
17.13.17 RP Controller Expansion Module Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ............................................................................... 721
17.13.18 ............................................................................................... 721
17.13.19 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 723
17.14 RP-C-EXT-REL-4 .................................................................... 725
17.14.1 Relay Outputs ........................................................................ 725
17.14.2 RP Controller Expansion Module Digital Inputs ..................... 725
17.14.3 RP Controller Expansion Module Energy Metering ................ 726
17.14.4 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Memory .. 726
17.14.5 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor
Communication Ports ............................................................. 726
17.14.6 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Address
Switch .................................................................................... 726
17.14.7 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 726
17.14.8 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors ....... 727
17.14.9 RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs ................................. 727
17.14.10 RP Controller Expansion Module Set Button ......................... 727

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

22
 17.14.11 RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation ............. 727
17.14.12 Wiring .................................................................................... 727
17.14.13 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Maintenance
Modes .................................................................................... 728
17.14.14 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 728
17.14.15 RP Controller Expansion Module Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ............................................................................... 728
17.14.16 ............................................................................................... 728
17.14.17 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 730
17.15 CRS-HH-REL-10 ..................................................................... 732
17.15.1 Relay Outputs ........................................................................ 732
17.15.2 Digital Inputs .......................................................................... 732
17.15.3 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Memory .. 733
17.15.4 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor
Communication Ports ............................................................. 733
17.15.5 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Address
Switch .................................................................................... 733
17.15.6 RP-C Room Bus .................................................................... 733
17.15.7 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors ....... 733
17.15.8 RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs ................................. 734
17.15.9 RP Controller Expansion Module Set Button ......................... 734
17.15.10 RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation ............. 734
17.15.11 Wiring .................................................................................... 734
17.15.12 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Maintenance
Modes .................................................................................... 734
17.15.13 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 735
17.15.14 RP Controller Expansion Module Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ............................................................................... 735
17.15.15 Supported Types of Blind Motors ........................................... 735
17.15.16 ............................................................................................... 735
17.15.17 Internal Configuration ............................................................. 737
17.16 DALI Inputs/Outputs with Power Distribution ........................... 739
17.16.1 ............................................................................................... 740
17.17 0-10V Light Outputs with Power Distribution ............................ 742
17.17.1 ............................................................................................... 743
17.18 High-Voltage Blind Outputs ...................................................... 744
17.18.1 ............................................................................................... 746
17.19 Low-Voltage Blind Outputs ...................................................... 747
17.19.1 ............................................................................................... 748
17.20 DALI Inputs/Outputs without Power Distribution ...................... 749
17.20.1 ............................................................................................... 750
17.21 0-10V Light Outputs without Power Distribution ....................... 751
17.21.1 ............................................................................................... 752
17.22 SMI Blind Outputs .................................................................... 753
17.22.1 ............................................................................................... 755
17.23 SMI LoVo Blind Outputs ........................................................... 756
17.23.1 ............................................................................................... 758
17.24 Relay Outputs on RP-C-EXT-REL-4 ........................................ 759

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

23
 17.24.1 ............................................................................................... 761
17.25 Relay Outputs on CRS-HH-REL-10 ......................................... 762
17.25.1 ............................................................................................... 766
17.26 RP Controller Expansion Module Digital Inputs ....................... 767
17.26.1 ............................................................................................... 768
17.27 RP Controller Expansion Module Built-in Power Supply .......... 769
17.27.1 DALI Light Modules ............................................................... 769
17.27.2 0-10V Light Modules ............................................................. 769
17.27.3 Low-voltage Blind Modules ................................................... 769
17.27.4 SMI Low-voltage Blind Modules ............................................. 769
17.27.5 SMI High-voltage Blind Modules ............................................ 769
17.28 RP Controller Expansion Module Energy Metering .................. 770
17.29 Luminosity Measurement ......................................................... 772
17.30 Motion Detection ...................................................................... 773
17.31 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Memory .... 775
17.32 DALI Light Module Supported Building Standards .................. 776
17.33 SMI Blind Modules Supported Building Standards .................. 777
17.34 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Wireless Connectivity .. 778
17.35 RP-C Room Bus ....................................................................... 779
17.36 Connecting RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-sensors
to RP-C .................................................................................... 782
17.37 Configuring the Room Bus Address for an RP Controller
Expansion Module ................................................................... 785
17.38 Configuring the Room Bus Address for an RP Controller
Expansion Multi-sensor ........................................................... 786
17.39 RP Controller Expansion Module Pluggable Connectors ........ 787
17.39.1 Light Modules, Blind Modules, and RP-C-EXT-REL-4 Relay
Module ................................................................................... 787
17.39.2 CRS-HH-REL-10 Relay Module ............................................. 788
17.40 Plugging an External Connector into an RP Controller Expansion
Module ..................................................................................... 790
17.41 Removing an External Connector from an RP Controller
Expansion Module ................................................................... 791
17.42 RP Controller Expansion Module LEDs ................................... 793
17.42.1 Status LED ............................................................................. 793
17.42.2 Light Status LEDs .................................................................. 795
17.42.3 Blind Status LEDs .................................................................. 795
17.42.4 Relay Status LEDs ................................................................. 796
17.43 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor LED ............................. 797
17.43.1 Status LED ............................................................................. 797
17.44 RP Controller Expansion Module Set Button ........................... 799
17.45 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Set Button .................... 800
17.46 RP Controller Expansion Module Device Installation ............... 801
17.47 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Module on a DIN Rail ... 806
17.48 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Module on a Flat
Surface .................................................................................... 807
17.49 Powering Up an RP Controller Expansion Light Module .......... 811
17.50 Powering Up an RP Controller Expansion Blind Module .......... 813

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

24
 17.51 Powering Up an RP Controller Expansion Relay Module ......... 815
17.52 Wiring a Screw Terminal on CRS-HH-REL-10 ......................... 817
17.53 Powering Up an CRS-HH-REL-10 Relay Module .................... 818
17.54 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Device Installation ....... 819
17.55 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor into a Dropped
Ceiling Using the Mounting Springs ......................................... 822
17.56 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor on an Octagon
Junction Box Using the Mounting Ring .................................... 824
17.57 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor on a Ceiling
Using the Mounting Ring .......................................................... 827
17.58 RP Controller Expansion Module and Multi-sensor Maintenance
Modes ...................................................................................... 832
17.59 Configuring an RP Controller Expansion Module or Multi-sensor
into Online Maintenance Mode ................................................ 833
17.60 RP Controller Expansion Modules Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ................................................................................. 834
17.60.1 CE - European Union (EU) ..................................................... 834
17.60.2 UKCA - United Kingdom (UK) ................................................ 834
17.60.3 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) ........................ 835
17.60.4 Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
(ISED) .................................................................................... 835
17.61 RP Controller Expansion Multi-sensor Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ................................................................................. 836
17.61.1 CE - European Union (EU) ..................................................... 836
17.61.2 UKCA - United Kingdom (UK) ................................................ 836
17.61.3 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) ........................ 836
17.61.4 Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
(ISED) .................................................................................... 837
17.62 Types of Blind Motors Supported by CRS-HH-REL-10 ............ 839

18 RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Modules ................ 843

18.1 RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Modules ............................... 845
18.1.1 RP-C-EXT-ZB-DALI ............................................................... 845
18.1.2 RP-C-EXT-ZB-0-10V ............................................................. 846
18.2 RP-C-EXT-ZB-DALI ................................................................. 847
18.2.1 Zigbee DALI Light Output and Power Output ......................... 847
18.2.2 Zigbee Modules Power Distribution ....................................... 847
18.2.3 Zigbee Modules Memory ....................................................... 848
18.2.4 Zigbee Modules Wireless Connectivity .................................. 848
18.2.5 Zigbee Modules Screw Terminals .......................................... 848
18.2.6 Zigbee Modules LED ............................................................. 848
18.2.7 Zigbee Modules Reset Button ................................................ 848
18.2.8 Zigbee Modules Device Installation ....................................... 848
18.2.9 Wiring .................................................................................... 849
18.2.10 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 849
18.2.11 Zigbee Modules Regulatory Compliance and Approvals ....... 849
18.2.12 ............................................................................................... 849
18.3 RP-C-EXT-ZB-0-10V ............................................................... 852
18.3.1 Zigbee 0-10V Light Output ..................................................... 852

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

25
 18.3.2 Zigbee Modules Power Distribution ....................................... 852
18.3.3 Zigbee Modules Memory ....................................................... 852
18.3.4 Zigbee 0-10V Module Supported Building Standards ............ 853
18.3.5 Zigbee Modules Wireless Connectivity .................................. 853
18.3.6 Zigbee Modules Screw Terminals .......................................... 853
18.3.7 Zigbee Modules LED ............................................................. 853
18.3.8 Zigbee Modules Reset Button ................................................ 853
18.3.9 Zigbee Modules Device Installation ....................................... 853
18.3.10 Wiring .................................................................................... 854
18.3.11 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management ............................ 854
18.3.12 Zigbee Modules Regulatory Compliance and Approvals ....... 854
18.3.13 ............................................................................................... 854
18.4 Zigbee DALI Light Output and Power Output ........................... 857
18.4.1 ............................................................................................... 858
18.5 Zigbee 0-10V Light Output and Power Output ......................... 860
18.5.1 ............................................................................................... 861
18.6 Zigbee Modules Power Distribution ......................................... 862
18.6.1 ............................................................................................... 862
18.7 Zigbee Modules Memory .......................................................... 864
18.8 Zigbee Modules Wireless Connectivity .................................... 865
18.9 Zigbee Modules Screw Terminals ............................................ 866
18.9.1 Zigbee DALI Module Screw Terminals ................................... 866
18.9.2 Zigbee 0-10V Module Screw Terminals ................................. 866
18.10 Zigbee DALI Module Screw Terminals ..................................... 867
18.11 Zigbee 0-10V Module Screw Terminals ................................... 869
18.12 Zigbee Modules LED ............................................................... 871
18.12.1 Status LED ............................................................................. 871
18.13 Zigbee Modules Reset Button .................................................. 872
18.14 Zigbee Modules Device Installation ......................................... 873
18.15 Installing an RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Module on a
Ceiling ...................................................................................... 876
18.16 Wiring a Screw Terminal on an RP Controller Expansion Zigbee
Module ..................................................................................... 879
18.17 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management .............................. 882
18.17.1 Hosting Different Firmware Versions ..................................... 882
18.17.2 Firmware Upgrade Guidelines ............................................... 883
18.17.3 Active and Inactive Memory for Firmware .............................. 884
18.17.4 Firmware Recovery ................................................................ 884
18.17.5 Impact of a Factory Reset on BACnet/IP Controller
Firmware ................................................................................ 885
18.17.6 Firmware Compression for Transmission ............................. 886
18.18 Zigbee Modules Regulatory Compliance and Approvals ......... 887
18.18.1 CE - European Union (EU) ..................................................... 887
18.18.2 UKCA - United Kingdom (UK) ................................................ 887

19 Remote Control ......................................................... 889

19.1 RP-C-RC-BLE .......................................................................... 891
19.1.1 Remote Control Safety Information ........................................ 891

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

26
 19.1.2 Remote Control Wireless Connectivity ................................... 892
19.1.3 Remote Control Device Installation ........................................ 892
19.1.4 Remote Control User Interface .............................................. 892
19.1.5 Remote Control Commissioning ............................................ 892
19.1.6 Remote Control Firmware Upgrade ....................................... 892
19.1.7 Remote Control Regulatory Compliance and Approvals ........ 892
19.1.8 ............................................................................................... 893
19.2 Remote Control Safety Information .......................................... 895
19.3 RP Controller Expansion Remote Control Wireless
Connectivity ............................................................................. 897
19.4 RP Controller Expansion Remote Control Device Installation .. 898
19.5 Installing a Remote Control on a Wall ...................................... 899
19.6 Remote Control User Interface ................................................ 902
19.6.1 ............................................................................................... 903
19.7 Remote Control Regulatory Compliance and Approvals .......... 904
19.7.1 CE - European Union (EU) ..................................................... 904
19.7.2 UKCA - United Kingdom (UK) ................................................ 904
19.7.3 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) ........................ 904
19.7.4 Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
(ISED) .................................................................................... 905

20 KNX Modbus Gateway .............................................. 907

20.1 KNX Modbus Gateway RP-C-EXT-KNX .................................. 909
20.1.1 RP-C Modbus ........................................................................ 910
20.1.2 KNX Modbus Gateway Screw Terminals and Connector ....... 910
20.1.3 KNX Modbus Gateway LEDs ................................................. 910
20.1.4 KNX Modbus Gateway Buttons .............................................. 911
20.1.5 KNX Modbus Gateway Programming Mode .......................... 911
20.1.6 KNX Modbus Gateway Manual Operation Mode ................... 911
20.1.7 KNX Modbus Gateway Device Installation ............................. 911
20.1.8 Wiring .................................................................................... 911
20.1.9 KNX Modbus Gateway Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ............................................................................... 912
20.1.10 ............................................................................................... 912
20.2 RP-C Modbus .......................................................................... 914
20.3 KNX Modbus Gateway Screw Terminals and Connector ......... 917
20.4 KNX Modbus Gateway LEDs ................................................... 919
20.4.1 Programming LED ................................................................. 920
20.4.2 KNX LED ................................................................................ 920
20.4.3 Mode LED .............................................................................. 920
20.4.4 RTU LED ................................................................................ 921
20.5 KNX Modbus Gateway Buttons ................................................ 922
20.6 KNX Modbus Gateway Programming Mode ............................ 925
20.7 KNX Modbus Gateway Manual Operation Mode ..................... 926
20.8 KNX Modbus Gateway Device Installation ............................... 927
20.9 Installing a KNX Modbus Gateway on a DIN Rail ..................... 929
20.10 Performing a Factory Reset of the KNX Modbus Gateway ..... 930

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

27
 20.11 KNX Modbus Gateway Regulatory Compliance and
Approvals ................................................................................. 931
20.11.1 CE - European Union (EU) ..................................................... 931
20.11.2 UKCA - United Kingdom (UK) ................................................ 931

21 SpaceLogic Sensors ................................................. 933

21.1 SpaceLogic Sensors ................................................................ 935
21.1.1 SpaceLogic Sensor Modular Bases and Covers .................... 935
21.1.2 SpaceLogic Sensor Models ................................................... 935
21.1.3 SpaceLogic Sensor Display Properties .................................. 936
21.1.4 Firmware Upgrade ................................................................. 936
21.1.5 Replacement ......................................................................... 937
21.1.6 Addressing ............................................................................. 937
21.1.7 SpaceLogic Sensor Operation and Calibration Modes .......... 938
21.1.8 SpaceLogic Sensor Display Scene Configuration .................. 938
21.1.9 Application and Scene Association ........................................ 938
21.1.10 SpaceLogic Sensor HMI References ..................................... 938
21.2 SpaceLogic Sensor Modular Bases and Covers ...................... 939
21.2.1 Sensor Bus Configuration ...................................................... 943
21.2.2 Key Sensor Base and Cover Combinations ........................... 943
21.3 SpaceLogic Sensor Models ..................................................... 944
21.3.1 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-button Cover Model ............................ 944
21.3.2 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model ........... 944
21.3.3 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model ................... 945

22 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model ............... 947

22.1 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model .............................. 949
22.1.1 Discover Setpoint and Occupancy Override Settings ............ 950
22.1.2 Backlighting in the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover
Model ..................................................................................... 950
22.1.3 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model Interface ............. 950
22.2 Changing the Temperature Setpoint ....................................... 951
22.3 Overriding the Occupancy Setting ........................................... 952
22.4 Backlighting in the SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model 953
22.5 SpaceLogic Sensor 3-Button Cover Model Interface .............. 954

23 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor

Model ........................................................................ 955
23.1 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model ............. 957
23.1.1 Display Object Setting Control ............................................... 957
23.1.2 Watch Window Property Monitoring ....................................... 958
23.2 Changing the Temperature Setpoint ....................................... 959
23.3 Changing the Fan Speed ......................................................... 960
23.4 Changing Heating and Cooling Mode Settings ........................ 962
23.5 Changing the Degree Type ..................................................... 964
23.6 Changing the Occupancy Mode ............................................... 965
23.7 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Home
Screen ..................................................................................... 966

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

28
 23.8 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Default
Screen ..................................................................................... 967
23.9 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Fan Speed
Screen ..................................................................................... 968
23.10 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Heating
and Cooling Mode Screen ........................................................ 969
23.11 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Degree
Type Screen ............................................................................. 970
23.12 SpaceLogic Sensor LCD Temperature Sensor Model- Occupancy
Mode Screen ............................................................................ 971

24 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model ...... 973

24.1 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model ..................... 975
24.1.1 Display Object ........................................................................ 975
24.1.2 Script Program Property Configuration .................................. 976
24.1.3 Integrator Menu Pages .......................................................... 977
24.2 Changing the Temperature Setpoint ....................................... 978
24.3 Changing the Temperature Setpoint in a Restricted Display .... 980
24.4 Selecting the Fan Speed ......................................................... 982
24.5 Selecting the Degree Type ...................................................... 984
24.6 Changing the Occupancy Mode .............................................. 986
24.7 Changing the Heating and Cooling Mode ................................ 988
24.8 Accessing the Integrator Menu ................................................ 990
24.9 Turning the Lights On and Off .................................................. 992
24.10 Dimming the Lights ................................................................. 994
24.11 Fully Opening and Closing the Blinds ...................................... 996
24.12 Incrementally Adjusting the Blinds .......................................... 998
24.13 Selecting the Scenes Menu ..................................................... 999
24.14 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Front Menu
Screen ................................................................................... 1001
24.15 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Functions Menu
Screen ................................................................................... 1003
24.16 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Setpoint
Adjustment Submenu ............................................................. 1005
24.17 SpaceLogic Sensor Touchscreen Display Model- Integrator Menu
Pages ..................................................................................... 1007

25 SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter ............................... 1011

25.1 SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter .............................................. 1013
25.1.1 ............................................................................................. 1015
25.2 Installing SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter on a SpaceLogic
Sensor ................................................................................... 1017
25.3 Attaching a Lanyard to SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter .......... 1019
25.4 Connecting to a Controller with the SpaceLogic Bluetooth
Adapter .................................................................................. 1020

26 Zigbee Adapter ....................................................... 1023

26.1 SpaceLogic Zigbee Adapter ................................................... 1025
26.1.1 ............................................................................................. 1026
26.2 Supported Wireless Devices .................................................. 1030

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

29
 26.3 Installing Zigbee Adapter on an Enclosure Exterior ............... 1036
26.4 Installing Zigbee Adapter in a Dropped Ceiling ...................... 1040
26.5 Installing Zigbee Adapter on a Wall ........................................ 1043
26.6 Zigbee Adapter Regulatory Compliance and Approvals ........ 1047
26.6.1 CE - European Union (EU) ................................................... 1047
26.6.2 UKCA - United Kingdom (UK) .............................................. 1047
26.6.3 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) ...................... 1047
26.6.4 Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
(ISED) .................................................................................. 1048

27 AD v1 ...................................................................... 1049
27.1 AD v1 ..................................................................................... 1051
27.1.1 Stationary HMI Terminal ...................................................... 1051
27.1.2 Kiosk Mode .......................................................................... 1051
27.1.3 AD v1 Bundle ....................................................................... 1051
27.1.4 Installation Options .............................................................. 1052
27.1.5 AD v1 Communication and Power ....................................... 1052
27.1.6 Preinstalled Apps ................................................................. 1052
27.1.7 ............................................................................................. 1052
27.2 AD v1 Communication and Power ......................................... 1054
27.2.1 Communication over a USB Connection .............................. 1054
27.2.2 Communication over a Wireless Connection ....................... 1054
27.3 Installing the AD v1 Base on a Cabinet .................................. 1056
27.4 Installing the AD v1 Base on a Wall ....................................... 1058
27.5 Installing the AD v1 Tablet and Frame ................................... 1059
27.6 Connecting Advanced Display to a Power Adapter ................ 1061
27.7 Connecting an Advanced Display to an AS-P server or AS-B
server ..................................................................................... 1062

28 AD v2 ...................................................................... 1063
28.1 AD v2 ..................................................................................... 1065
28.1.1 AD v2 ................................................................................... 1065
28.1.2 Kiosk Mode .......................................................................... 1065
28.1.3 AD v2 Bundle ....................................................................... 1065
28.1.4 Installation Options .............................................................. 1066
28.1.5 AD v2 Communication and Power ....................................... 1066
28.1.6 Preinstalled Software ........................................................... 1066
28.1.7 ............................................................................................. 1066
28.2 AD v2 Communication and Power ......................................... 1068
28.2.1 Communication over a USB Connection .............................. 1068
28.3 Installing the AD v2 Base on a Cabinet .................................. 1069
28.4 Installing the AD v2 Base on a Wall ....................................... 1071
28.5 Installing the AD v2 Tablet and Frame ................................... 1072
28.6 Connecting Advanced Display to a Power Adapter ................ 1075
28.7 Connecting an Advanced Display to an AS-P server or AS-B
server ..................................................................................... 1076

29 AD v3 ...................................................................... 1077

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

30
 29.1 AD v3 ..................................................................................... 1079
29.1.1 Kiosk Mode .......................................................................... 1079
29.1.2 AD v3 Bundle ....................................................................... 1079
29.1.3 AD v3 Safety Information ..................................................... 1080
29.1.4 AD v3 Installation ................................................................. 1080
29.1.5 AD v3 Communication and Power ....................................... 1080
29.1.6 Preinstalled Software ........................................................... 1080
29.1.7 AD v3 Power Button ............................................................. 1080
29.1.8 AD v3 Regulatory Compliance and Approvals ..................... 1080
29.1.9 ............................................................................................. 1081
29.2 AD v3 Safety Information ....................................................... 1083
29.3 AD v3 Installation ................................................................... 1085
29.4 Installing AD v3 on a Cabinet ................................................. 1087
29.5 AD v3 Communication and Power ......................................... 1090
29.5.1 Communication over a Wired (USB) Connection ................. 1090
29.6 Connecting AD v3 to an Automation Server and a 24 VDC Power
Supply .................................................................................... 1091
29.7 AD v3 Power Button ............................................................... 1092
29.8 Performing a Recovery (Factory Reset) of AD v3 .................. 1094
29.9 AD v3 Regulatory and Agency Compliance and Approvals ... 1095
29.9.1 CE - European Union (EU) ................................................... 1095
29.9.2 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) ...................... 1095
29.9.3 Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
(ISED) .................................................................................. 1096
29.9.4 UL ........................................................................................ 1096

30 Operator Display ..................................................... 1097

30.1 Operator Display .................................................................... 1099
30.1.1 Operator Display Bundle ...................................................... 1099
30.1.2 Operator Display Safety Information .................................... 1100
30.1.3 Operator Display LED .......................................................... 1100
30.1.4 Operator Display Communication Ports ............................... 1100
30.1.5 Operator Display Hardening ................................................ 1100
30.1.6 Operator Display Installation ................................................ 1100
30.1.7 Wiring .................................................................................. 1100
30.1.8 Operator Display Regulatory Compliance and Approvals .... 1101
30.1.9 ............................................................................................. 1101
30.2 Operator Display Safety Information ...................................... 1104
30.3 Operator Display LED ............................................................ 1106
30.4 Operator Display Communication Ports ................................. 1107
30.4.1 Ethernet Ports ...................................................................... 1108
30.4.2 USB Ports ............................................................................ 1108
30.4.3 RS-232C Port ....................................................................... 1109
30.4.4 RS-485 Port ......................................................................... 1109
30.5 Operator Display Hardening .................................................. 1110
30.5.1 Hardening Specifics ............................................................. 1110
30.5.2 Product Defense in Depth .................................................... 1110

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

31
 30.5.3 System Defense in Depth .................................................... 1110
30.6 Operator Display Installation .................................................. 1112
30.6.1 Installation Requirements .................................................... 1112
30.7 Installing Operator Display on a Panel ................................... 1115
30.8 Connecting Operator Display to a 24 VDC Power Supply ...... 1118
30.9 Removing Operator Display ................................................... 1119
30.10 Replacing the Installation Gasket on Operator Display ......... 1121
30.11 Replacing the Battery on Operator Display ............................ 1123
30.12 Operator Display Regulatory and Agency Compliance and
Approvals ............................................................................... 1125
30.12.1 CE - European Union (EU) ................................................... 1125
30.12.2 WEEE - European Union (EU) ............................................. 1125
30.12.3 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) ...................... 1125
30.12.4 Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada
(ISED) .................................................................................. 1126
30.12.5 UL ........................................................................................ 1126
30.12.6 UK Conformity Assessed ..................................................... 1126

31 Wiring ...................................................................... 1127

31.1 Wiring ..................................................................................... 1129
31.1.1 I/O Wiring ............................................................................. 1129
31.1.2 Communication Port Wiring ................................................. 1129
31.2 I/O Wiring ............................................................................... 1130
31.2.1 Shielded Wires ..................................................................... 1130
31.2.2 Grounding and Power .......................................................... 1130
31.2.3 External Device Connections ............................................... 1131
31.2.4 Wire Sizes and Lengths ....................................................... 1131
31.2.5 Required External Connectors for the RP Controller Expansion
Modules ............................................................................... 1131
31.3 Grounding and Power ............................................................ 1132
31.3.1 Grounding and Power for Systems with Central IO Modules and
PS-24V Units ....................................................................... 1132
31.3.2 Grounding and Power for Systems with AS-B Servers ........ 1132
31.3.3 Grounding and Power for Systems with MP Controllers ...... 1132
31.3.4 Grounding and Power for Systems with IP-IO Modules ....... 1132
31.3.5 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-12A, -12B, or -12C
Controllers ........................................................................... 1133
31.3.6 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-16A
Controller ............................................................................. 1133
31.3.7 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-16A and
Expansion Modules .............................................................. 1133
31.3.8 Grounding and Power for Systems with Operator Display ... 1133
31.4 Grounding and Power for Systems with Central IO Modules and
PS-24V Units ......................................................................... 1134
31.5 Grounding and Power for Systems with AS-B Servers .......... 1136
31.6 Grounding and Power for Systems with MP Controllers ........ 1138
31.7 Grounding and Power for Systems with IP-IO Modules ......... 1141
31.8 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-12A, -12B, or -12C
Controllers ............................................................................. 1143

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

32
 31.9 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-16A
Controller ............................................................................... 1146
31.10 Grounding and Power for Systems with RP-C-16A and Expansion
Modules ................................................................................. 1148
31.11 Grounding and Power for Systems with Operator Display ..... 1151
31.11.1 DC Power Cord Connection ................................................. 1151
31.11.2 DC Power Cord Preparation ................................................ 1151
31.11.3 DC Power Supply Connector Specifications ........................ 1152
31.11.4 DC Power Supply Connection .............................................. 1152
31.11.5 Grounding ............................................................................ 1154
31.12 External Device Connections ................................................. 1155
31.12.1 Thermistors .......................................................................... 1155
31.12.2 Contacts .............................................................................. 1155
31.12.3 Actuators ............................................................................. 1156
31.12.4 Transmitters ......................................................................... 1157
31.12.5 Loads Such as Relays ......................................................... 1159
31.13 Wire Sizes and Lengths ......................................................... 1160
31.13.1 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C
Controllers ........................................................................... 1160
31.13.2 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-16A Controller ......... 1160
31.13.3 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the Digital Inputs of the RP Controller
Expansion Modules .............................................................. 1160
31.13.4 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI Bus of the RP Controller
Expansion DALI Light Modules ............................................ 1160
31.13.5 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the SMI Interface of the RP
Controller Expansion SMI Blind Modules ............................. 1161
31.13.6 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP Controller Expansion Zigbee
Modules ............................................................................... 1161
31.13.7 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI Bus of the Zigbee DALI
Module ................................................................................. 1161
31.14 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-12A, -12B, and -12C
Controllers ............................................................................. 1162
31.15 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP-C-16A Controller ............ 1164
31.16 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the Digital Inputs of the RP Controller
Expansion Modules ................................................................ 1166
31.17 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI Bus of the RP Controller
Expansion DALI Light Modules .............................................. 1167
31.18 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the SMI Interface of the RP Controller
Expansion SMI Blind Modules ............................................... 1168
31.19 Required External Connectors for the RP Controller Expansion
Modules ................................................................................. 1169
31.19.1 RP-C-EXT-DALI-M-PD ........................................................ 1169
31.19.2 RP-C-EXT-BL-4-HV-PD ...................................................... 1170
31.19.3 RP-C-EXT-BL-2-LV-PD ....................................................... 1170
31.19.4 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4-PD ....................................................... 1171
31.19.5 RP-C-EXT-DALI .................................................................. 1171
31.19.6 RP-C-EXT-0-10V-4 .............................................................. 1172
31.19.7 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-4-HV-PD ............................................... 1172
31.19.8 RP-C-EXT-BL-SMI-2-LV-PD ............................................... 1173

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

33
 31.19.9 RP-C-EXT-REL-4 ................................................................ 1173
31.20 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the RP Controller Expansion Zigbee
Modules ................................................................................. 1174
31.21 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the DALI Bus of the Zigbee DALI
Module ................................................................................... 1175
31.22 Wire Sizes and Lengths for the KNX Modbus Gateway ........ 1176
31.23 Communication Port Wiring ................................................... 1177
31.23.1 RS-485 Communications ..................................................... 1177
31.23.2 LonWorks Communications ................................................. 1177
31.23.3 USB Connections ................................................................. 1177
31.23.4 Ethernet Connections .......................................................... 1178
31.23.5 Sensor Bus Connections ..................................................... 1179
31.23.6 Room Bus Connections ....................................................... 1179
31.23.7 Modbus Network Connections ............................................. 1180
31.24 RJ45 Pinout for the RS-485 Ports of the RP-C Controller ..... 1182

32 RS-485 Communications ........................................ 1185

32.1 RS-485 Communications ....................................................... 1189
32.1.1 Generic RS-485 Network Devices ....................................... 1189
32.1.2 b3 BACnet Devices .............................................................. 1189
32.1.3 MNB BACnet Devices .......................................................... 1189
32.1.4 Legrand Power Meters ......................................................... 1190
32.1.5 Viconics VT/VZ/SE 7xxx Series Devices ............................. 1190
32.2 Generic RS-485 Network Devices ......................................... 1191
32.2.1 Worksheet for Configuration of RS-485 Bus with Generic RS-485
Devices ................................................................................ 1192
32.2.2 Configuration Selection for Generic RS-485 Network
Devices ................................................................................ 1192
32.2.3 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of
Excess Unit Load ................................................................. 1192
32.2.4 Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only 1192
32.2.5 Cable Routing ...................................................................... 1193
32.2.6 Cable Selection .................................................................... 1193
32.3 Worksheet for Configuration of RS-485 Bus with Generic RS-485
Devices .................................................................................. 1194
32.4 Configuration Selection for Generic RS-485 Network
Devices .................................................................................. 1196
32.4.1 Flowcharts ........................................................................... 1196
32.4.2 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 1 ................ 1198
32.4.3 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 2 ................ 1198
32.4.4 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 3 ................ 1198
32.4.5 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 4 ................ 1198
32.4.6 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 5 ................ 1199
32.4.7 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 6 ................ 1199
32.4.8 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 7 ................ 1200
32.4.9 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 8 ................ 1200
32.4.10 Power Supply Selection for Generic RS-485 Network Device
Configuration 7 and 8 ........................................................... 1200
32.5 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 1 .................. 1201

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

34
 32.6 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 2 .................. 1204
32.7 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 3 .................. 1207
32.8 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 4 .................. 1210
32.9 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 5 .................. 1213
32.10 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 6 .................. 1216
32.11 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 7 .................. 1219
32.12 Generic RS-485 Network Device Configuration 8 .................. 1223
32.13 Power Supply Selection for Generic RS-485 Network Device
Configuration 7 and 8 ............................................................. 1226
32.14 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of
Excess Unit Load (MNB and Generic RS-485 Devices) ......... 1228
32.15 Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only (MNB
and Generic RS-485 Devices) ............................................... 1230
32.16 Cable Routing ........................................................................ 1231
32.17 Cable Selection ...................................................................... 1232
32.18 b3 BACnet Devices ................................................................ 1235
32.18.1 General b3 BACnet Device Properties ................................. 1235
32.18.2 b3 BACnet Device Configuration ......................................... 1235
32.18.3 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of
Excess Unit Load ................................................................. 1235
32.18.4 Cable Routing ...................................................................... 1236
32.18.5 Cable Selection .................................................................... 1236
32.19 General b3 BACnet Device Properties ................................... 1237
32.20 b3 BACnet Device Configuration ........................................... 1238
32.21 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of
Excess Unit Load (b3 BACnet Devices) ................................. 1241
32.22 MNB BACnet Devices ............................................................ 1243
32.22.1 General MNB BACnet Device Properties ............................. 1243
32.22.2 MNB Configurations ............................................................. 1243
32.22.3 Existing MNB Systems Transition ........................................ 1243
32.22.4 Network Check-Up (Examination and Monitoring) ............... 1243
32.22.5 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of
Excess Unit Load ................................................................. 1244
32.22.6 Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only 1244
32.22.7 Cable Routing ...................................................................... 1245
32.22.8 Cable Selection .................................................................... 1245
32.23 General MNB BACnet Device Properties ............................... 1246
32.24 MNB Configurations ............................................................... 1247
32.24.1 MNB Configuration 1: Dual End-point Bias (MNB Source) ... 1247
32.24.2 MNB Configuration 2: Dual End-point Bias (External Supply
Source) ................................................................................ 1247
32.24.3 MNB Configuration 3: Mid-point Bias ................................... 1247
32.24.4 Power Supply Selection for MNB Configuration 1, 2 and 3 .. 1248
32.24.5 MNB Configuration 4: Single End-point Bias (Automation Server
Provided Source) ................................................................. 1248
32.24.6 MS/TP Data and Shield Connections ................................... 1248
32.25 MNB Configuration 1: Dual End-point Bias (MNB Source) ..... 1249

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

35
 32.26 MNB Configuration 2: Dual End-point Bias (External Supply
Source) .................................................................................. 1253
32.27 MNB Configuration 3: Mid-point Bias ..................................... 1256
32.28 Power Supply Selection for MNB Configuration 1, 2 and 3 .... 1259
32.29 MNB Configuration 4: Single End-point Bias (Automation Server
Provided Source) .................................................................. 1261
32.30 MS/TP Data and Shield Connections ..................................... 1264
32.31 Existing MNB Systems Transition .......................................... 1265
32.31.1 Guidelines on the Use of Legacy Cable Types .................... 1265
32.32 Network Check-Up (Examination and Monitoring) ................. 1267
32.33 Legrand Power Meters ........................................................... 1268
32.33.1 General Legrand Power Meter Properties ........................... 1268
32.33.2 Legrand Configurations ........................................................ 1268
32.33.3 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of
Excess Unit Load ................................................................. 1268
32.33.4 Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only 1269
32.33.5 Cable Routing ...................................................................... 1269
32.33.6 Cable Selection .................................................................... 1269
32.34 General Legrand Power Meter Properties .............................. 1270
32.35 Legrand Configurations ......................................................... 1271
32.35.1 Legrand Configuration 1: Terminated Bus with No Bias
Requirement ........................................................................ 1271
32.35.2 Legrand Configuration 2: Unterminated Bus with Minimal
Bias ...................................................................................... 1271
32.35.3 Legrand Configuration 3: Terminated Bus with Single End-point
Bias ...................................................................................... 1271
32.35.4 Legrand Configuration 4: Terminated Bus with Dual End-point
Bias ...................................................................................... 1271
32.35.5 Power Supply Selection for Legrand Configuration 4 ........... 1272
32.35.6 Configuration Summary ....................................................... 1272
32.36 Legrand Configuration 1: Terminated Bus with No Bias
Requirement .......................................................................... 1274
32.37 Legrand Configuration 2: Unterminated Bus with Minimal
Bias ........................................................................................ 1277
32.38 Legrand Configuration 3: Terminated Bus with Single End-point
Bias ........................................................................................ 1280
32.39 Legrand Configuration 4: Terminated Bus with Dual End-point
Bias ........................................................................................ 1283
32.40 Power Supply Selection for Legrand Configuration 4 ............. 1286
32.41 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of
Excess Unit Load (Legrand Power Meters) ............................ 1288
32.42 Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only
(Legrand Power Meters) ........................................................ 1290
32.43 Cable Selection (Legrand Power Meters) .............................. 1291
32.44 Viconics VT/VZ/SE 7xxx Series Devices ............................... 1293
32.44.1 General Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Device Properties .................. 1293
32.44.2 VT/VZ7xxx Configurations ................................................... 1293
32.44.3 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of
Excess Unit Load ................................................................. 1294

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

36
 32.44.4 Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only 1294
32.44.5 Cable Routing ...................................................................... 1294
32.44.6 Cable Selection .................................................................... 1294
32.45 General Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Device Properties .................... 1296
32.46 VT/VZ7xxx Configurations ..................................................... 1298
32.46.1 VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 1: Single End-point Bias (Automation
Server Provided Source) ...................................................... 1298
32.46.2 VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2: Dual End-point Bias (External
Supply Source) .................................................................... 1298
32.46.3 Power Supply Selection for VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2 ...... 1298
32.47 VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 1: Single End-point Bias (Automation
Server Provided Source) ........................................................ 1299
32.48 VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2: Dual End-point Bias (External Supply
Source) .................................................................................. 1302
32.49 Power Supply Selection for VT/VZ7xxx Configuration 2 ........ 1305
32.50 Unit Load Definition, Maximum Network Load and Affects of
Excess Unit Load (Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Devices) .................. 1307
32.51 Expanded Unit Load with Network of Isolated Devices Only
(Viconics VT/VZ7xxx Devices) ............................................... 1309

33 Hardware Troubleshooting ..................................... 1311

33.1 General Hardware Configuration Problem ............................. 1313
33.1.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1313
33.2 No Communication with Automation Server .......................... 1314
33.2.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1314
33.3 No Communication with Central IO Module ........................... 1315
33.3.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1315
33.4 Unexpected I/O Values .......................................................... 1316
33.4.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1316
33.5 Unexpected I/O Values .......................................................... 1317
33.5.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1317
33.6 Power Supply Overload ......................................................... 1318
33.6.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1318
33.7 No Power or MP-C Does Not Turn On ................................... 1319
33.7.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1319
33.8 No Power or MP-V Does Not Turn On ................................... 1321
33.8.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1321
33.9 No Power or IP-IO Module Does Not Turn On ....................... 1322
33.9.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1322
33.10 No Power or RP-C Does Not Turn On ................................... 1324
33.10.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1324
33.11 MP-C or MP-V Is Not Visible in the EcoStruxure Building
Operation Software ................................................................ 1325
33.11.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1325
33.12 IP-IO Module Is Not Visible in the EcoStruxure Building Operation
Software ................................................................................. 1326
33.12.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1326
33.13 RP-C Is Not Visible in the EcoStruxure Building Operation
Software ................................................................................. 1328

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

37
 33.13.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1328
33.14 Equipment Connected to an MP Controller Is Not Properly
Controlled .............................................................................. 1330
33.14.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1330
33.15 Equipment Connected to an IP-IO Module Is Not Properly
Controlled .............................................................................. 1331
33.15.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1331
33.16 Equipment Connected to an RP-C Controller Is Not Properly
Controlled .............................................................................. 1332
33.16.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1332
33.17 Date and Time Is Not Accurate .............................................. 1333
33.17.1 Solution ................................................................................ 1333
33.18 MP-V Damper Actuator Does Not Move or Respond to Position
Commands ............................................................................ 1334
33.18.1 Solution ................................................................................ 1334
33.19 VAV Box Controls to Full Open State with Maximum Air
Flow ....................................................................................... 1335
33.19.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1335
33.20 Air Flow Rate Higher or Lower Than Expected ...................... 1336
33.20.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1336
33.21 No Air Flow or Air Flow Is Not Changing ................................ 1338
33.21.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1338
33.22 SpaceLogic Sensor or MP Controller Sensor Bus Is Not
Operational ............................................................................ 1340
33.22.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1340
33.23 SpaceLogic Sensor or RP-C Controller Sensor Bus Is Not
Operational ............................................................................ 1342
33.23.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1342
33.24 SpaceLogic Sensor Offline .................................................... 1344
33.24.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1344
33.25 Sensor Bus Communication Problems .................................. 1345
33.25.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1345
33.26 RP Controller Expansion Module or Multi-sensor Is Not
Operational ............................................................................ 1346
33.26.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1346
33.27 RP Controller Expansion Module or Multi-sensor Offline ....... 1349
33.27.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1349
33.28 Room Bus Communication Problems .................................... 1351
33.28.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1351
33.29 AD v1 or AD v2 Does Not Turn On or Battery Does Not
Charge ................................................................................... 1352
33.29.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1352
33.30 AD v3 Does Not Turn On or Operate Correctly ...................... 1353
33.30.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1353
33.31 AD v1 or AD v2 Battery Does Not Fully Charge ..................... 1354
33.31.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1354
33.32 USB Data Communication is Lagging or Data is Lost ............ 1355
33.32.1 Solutions .............................................................................. 1355

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

38
 33.33 Network Unavailable .............................................................. 1356
33.33.1 Solution ................................................................................ 1356

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

39
Introduction

The Introduction part contains information on the purpose of

this guide, how this guide is organized, where to find more
information, and information on safety.
1 About This Guide

Topics
Purpose of This Guide
How This Guide is Organized
Safety Information
Consignes de sécurité
 1 About This Guide
1.1 Purpose of This Guide

1.1 Purpose of This Guide

This guide provides information about the SpaceLogic devices, such as
automation servers, BACnet/IP controllers (MP and RP controllers), IP-IO
modules, RP controller expansion modules, power supplies, and Central IO
modules. This information is intended to help you understand the different types
of hardware that can be in an EcoStruxure BMS, as well as how to use the
hardware.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

45
1 About This Guide
1.2 How This Guide is Organized

1.2 How This Guide is Organized

This EcoStruxure Building Guide is divided into the following parts:

Introduction
The Introduction part contains information on the purpose of this guide, how this
guide is organized, where to find more information, and information on safety.

Reference
The Reference part contains conceptual information, procedures, user interface
descriptions and troubleshooting information. If you want more information, see
WebHelp or the other EcoStruxure Building guides.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

46
 1 About This Guide
1.3 Safety Information

1.3 Safety Information

Read this information carefully and look at the equipment to become
familiar with the device before trying to install, operate, service or maintain
it.

1.3.1 Important Information

The following special messages may appear throughout this bulletin or on the
equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that
clarifies or simplifies a procedure.

The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label

indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal
injury if the instructions are not followed.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal
injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid
possible injury or death.

DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.

WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.

Please Note
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only
by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any
consequences arising out of the use of this material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the
construction, installation, and operation of electrical equipment and has received
safety training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

47
1 About This Guide
1.3 Safety Information

1.3.2 Cybersecurity Safety Notice

NOTICE
POTENTIAL COMPROMISE OF SYSTEM AVAILABILITY, INTEGRITY, AND
CONFIDENTIALITY
• Change default passwords at first use to help prevent unauthorized access to
device settings, controls, and information.
• Change passwords regularly to help prevent unauthorized access to device
settings, controls, and information.
• Do not share accounts. Each user must have their own account.
• When creating user and display names, it is important to avoid using personal
information, and to consider regional privacy policies. Display names will
appear in event logs to identify who performed operations on the device.
• It is recommended that log files be encrypted before transmission to help with
security and privacy.
• Disable unused ports, services, and default accounts to help minimize
pathways for malicious attackers.
• Place networked devices behind multiple layers of cyber defenses (such as
firewalls, network segmentation, and network intrusion detection and
protection).
• Use the recommended cybersecurity safety measures (for example, least
privilege, separation of duties) to help prevent unauthorized exposure, loss,
modification of data and logs, or interruption of services.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in loss of data, unauthorized
system access, or equipment damage.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

48
 1 About This Guide
1.4 Consignes de sécurité

1.4 Consignes de sécurité

Informations importantes
Lisez attentivement ces directives et examinez l'appareillage pour vous
familiariser avec son fonctionnement avant de faire son installation ou son
entretien. Les messages spéciaux suivants peuvent apparaître dans les
présentes directives ou sur l'appareil pour avertir l'utilisateur de dangers
potentiels ou pour attirer l'attention sur des informations qui clarifient ou
simplifient une procédure.

La présence de ce symbole sur une étiquette « Danger » ou «

Avertissement » signale un risque d'électrocution qui provoquera des
blessures physiques en cas de non-respect des consignes de sécurité.

Ce symbole est le symbole d'alerte de sécurité. Il vous avertit d'un risque

de blessures corporelles. Respectez scrupuleusement les consignes de
sécurité associées à ce symbole pour éviter de vous blesser ou de
mettre votre vie en danger.

Veuillez noter
Seul un personnel qualifié doit effectuer l'installation, l'exploitation, l'entretien et
la maintenance du matériel électrique. Schneider Electric n'assume aucune
responsabilité des conséquences éventuelles découlant de l'utilisation de cette
documentation.
Une personne qualifiée est une personne qui a les compétences et le savoir-faire
relatifs à la construction, l'installation et l'exploitation d'équipements électriques
et qui a reçu une formation à la sécurité lui permettant de reconnaître et d'éviter
les risques encourus.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

49
2 Additional Information

Topics
Where to Find Additional Information
 2 Additional Information
2.1 Where to Find Additional Information

2.1 Where to Find Additional Information

All the technical EcoStruxure BMS information is available online, on WebHelp.
WebHelp is a web-based help system for the EcoStruxure Building Operation
software and SpaceLogic devices, the software and hardware that powers the
EcoStruxure BMS.
By pressing F1 or clicking a Help button in the EcoStruxure Building Operation
software your web browser opens WebHelp with the latest, up-to-date, technical
documentation.

Figure: Help in EcoStruxure Building Operation software

Some EcoStruxure Building Operation software products give you context-

sensitive help by opening a WebHelp page that explains the view or dialog box
you have in focus. Some programs open up an overview page. From these
pages, you can follow the links to get more detailed information.
WebHelp contains all the technical information that is in the guides, specification
sheets, and installation sheets.

The WebHelp site

One of the advantages with WebHelp is that you can reach Help without having
the EcoStruxure Building Operation software installed on your computer. By
entering the URL address help.sbo.schneider-electric.com you can access
WebHelp from any computer, smartphone, or tablet connected to the internet.

Finding information
The easiest way to find information on WebHelp is to search for it.

Figure: Home page search

All technical information is gathered in one place, so you do not need to know
which guide, specification sheet, or installation sheet the information is in.

Filtering the information

To narrow down the search results, you can use these filters:
• Product
• Functionality
• Information type

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

53
2 Additional Information
2.1 Where to Find Additional Information

Figure: Search filters

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

54
Reference

The Reference part contains conceptual information,

procedures, user interface descriptions and troubleshooting
information. If you want more information, see WebHelp or
the other EcoStruxure Building guides.
3 Hardware

Topics
Hardware Overview
 3 Hardware
3.1 Hardware Overview

3.1 Hardware Overview

The Schneider Electric hardware devices for the EcoStruxure BMS include
terminal bases, PS-24V power supplies, Central IO modules, automation servers
such as AS-P servers and AS-B servers, BACnet/IP devices such as MP-Cs,
MP-Vs, IP-IO modules, and RP-Cs, SpaceLogic Sensor devices, Advanced
Display devices, and Operator Display devices.

3.1.1 Terminal Bases

The terminal bases are used for SpaceLogic devices that are based on the
patented two-piece design. The terminal base provides the I/O bus to the
electronics module installed on the terminal base as well as to the SpaceLogic
device installed to the right (next terminal base in the chain).
For more information, see section 7.3 “Terminal Bases” on page 134.

3.1.2 PS-24V Power Supplies

PS-24V is the power supply for the AS-P servers and Central IO modules. The
PS-24V power supply requires an input voltage of either 24 VAC +/–20 % or
24–30 VDC.
For more information, see section 5.1.5 “” on page 96.

3.1.3 AS-P Servers

The AS-P server offers enhanced processor performance, increased memory
size, dual Ethernet ports, and high-speed USB interfaces. The AS-P server is a
Schneider Electric manufactured embedded device that generally serves as the
lowest tier EcoStruxure BMS server within the EcoStruxure BMS. The AS-P
controls and supervises equipment, typically HVAC equipment. AS-P servers use
Central IO module with connected field devices, such as sensors and actuators,
to do that.
For more information, see section 6.1.13 “” on page 112.

3.1.4 Central IO Modules

By adding a variety of Central IO and power supply modules, you can use the
AS-P server to tailor the Intelligent Building Management System to your unique
requirements.
For more information, see section 7.1 “Central IO Modules” on page 129.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

59
3 Hardware
3.1 Hardware Overview

3.1.5 AS-B Servers

An AS-B server is a powerful automation server that features both onboard I/O
and built-in power supply. Like the other automation servers, the AS-B server is a
Schneider Electric manufactured embedded device that generally serves as the
lowest tier EcoStruxure BMS server within the EcoStruxure BMS. The
automation server controls and supervises equipment, typically HVAC
equipment. The AS-B server uses its onboard I/O with connected field devices,
such as sensors and actuators, to do that.
For more information, see section 8.1.15 “” on page 226.

3.1.6 MP-C Controllers

The MP-C controller is a multi-purpose, fully programmable, IP based field
controller. The MP-C models offer a flexible mix of I/O point types that suits a
wide range of HVAC applications. MP-C is a native SpaceLogic device, which
can either be used as a standalone BACnet/IP field controller or as part of an
EcoStruxure BMS with a AS-P or AS-B server, or an Enterprise Server, as the
parent server.
For more information, see section 10.1.15 “” on page 286.

3.1.7 MP-V Controllers

The MP-V controller is a multi-purpose, fully programmable, IP based field
controller dedicated for VAV applications. MP-V integrates a controller, a damper
actuator, and an air flow sensor in a single package for ease of installation. MP-V
is a native SpaceLogic device, which can either be used as a standalone
BACnet/IP field controller or as part of an EcoStruxure BMS with a AS-P or AS-B
server, or an Enterprise Server, as the parent server.
For more information, see section 11.1.16 “” on page 354.

3.1.8 IP-IO Modules

The IP-IO module provides I/O expansion to your HVAC application over
BACnet/IP and can share their I/O resources across applications running in
automation servers, BACnet/IP controllers, or third-party systems. The IP-IO
module can be installed near facilities in the field, away from the automation
server or the BACnet/IP controller.
For more information, see section 15.1.13 “” on page 500.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

60
 3 Hardware
3.1 Hardware Overview

3.1.9 RP-C Controllers

The RP-C controller is a room-purpose, fully programmable, IP based field
controller. The RP-C models offer a flexible mix of I/O point types that suit a wide
range of HVAC applications. The controller can either be used as a standalone
BACnet/IP field controller or as part of an EcoStruxure BMS with an AS-P or AS-
B server or an Enterprise Server as the parent server. The RP-C features a
wireless chip that allows a mobile device running the Commission mobile
application to connect directly to the controller.
For more information, see section 16.1.19 “” on page 565.

3.1.10 RP Controller Expansion Modules and Multi-

sensors
The RP controller expansion modules and multi-sensors provide a range of
devices that can be combined to form a connected room solution. The RP
controller expansion modules and multi-sensors are connected to the RP-C room
bus and provide the RP-C room controllers with I/O expansion and sensors that
enable lighting and blind control.
For more information, see section 17.1 “RP Controller Expansion Modules and
Multi-sensors” on page 651.

3.1.11 RP Controller Expansion Zigbee Modules

The RP controller expansion Zigbee modules provide devices that can be used to
form a connected room solution. The RP controller expansion Zigbee modules
are connected to the RP-C room controllers through the ZigbeeTM wireless
protocol and provide the controllers with I/O expansion that enable lighting
control.
For more information, see section 18.1 “RP Controller Expansion Zigbee
Modules” on page 845.

3.1.12 Remote Control

The RP-C-RC-BLE remote control connects wirelessly to the RP-C-EXT-MS-BLE
multi-sensor and enables the occupants of modern office buildings to control the
comfort level of their space.
For more information, see section 19.1.8 “” on page 893.

3.1.13 KNX Modbus Gateway

The KNX Modbus gateway RP-C-EXT-KNX connects to the RP-C controllers and
provides an interface between the controller and KNX devices such as push-
buttons, sensors, and control units for lights, blinds, and room temperature.
For more information, see section 20.1.10 “” on page 912.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

61
3 Hardware
3.1 Hardware Overview

3.1.14 SpaceLogic Sensors

SpaceLogic Sensors are a family of living space sensors designed for BACnet/IP
controllers using the EcoStruxure Building Operation user interface. These
sensors use an RJ-45 sensor bus that provides communication and power from
the BACnet/IP controller.
For more information, see section 21.1 “SpaceLogic Sensors” on page 935.

3.1.15 SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter

The SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter is plugged into a SpaceLogic Sensor to
provide a wireless Bluetooth connection to the BACnet/IP controller (Sensor Bus
compliant controller) for commissioning, maintenance, and troubleshooting of the
controller and the sensor.
For more information, see section 25.1.1 “” on page 1015.

3.1.16 SpaceLogic Zigbee Adapter

The SpaceLogic Zigbee Adapter is a USB-based wireless adapter that enables
ZigbeeTM wireless connectivity with an RP-C controller, AS-P server, or AS-B
server, extending the controller's or server's point count and bringing flexibility in
retrofit applications.
For more information, see section 26.1.1 “” on page 1026.

3.1.17 AD v1
AD v1 provides a Human Machine Interface (HMI) for local access to the
EcoStruxure BMS servers.
For more information, see section 27.1.7 “” on page 1052.

3.1.18 AD v2
AD v2 is the successor to AD v1, and offers several improvements such as
higher display resolution, enhanced processor performance, and increased
memory size. Like AD v1, AD v2 provides a Human Machine Interface (HMI) for
local access to the EcoStruxure BMS servers.
For more information, see section 28.1.7 “” on page 1066.

3.1.19 AD v3
Advanced Display v3 (AD v3) is the successor to AD v2. AD v3 provides an
industrial grade Human Machine Interface (HMI), with battery-free power supply,
for local access to the EcoStruxure BMS servers.
For more information, see section 29.1.9 “” on page 1081.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

62
 3 Hardware
3.1 Hardware Overview

3.1.20 Operator Display

SpaceLogic* Operator Display is a touch-screen Human Machine Interface (HMI)
for SpaceLogic controllers and servers, designed for local monitoring of building
controllers in small and medium-sized buildings, as well as in large buildings with
comprehensive building management systems. Operator Display is specifically
designed for equipment rooms and it simplifies operations, service, and
troubleshooting for System Integrators and Service Engineers, as well as for non-
technical users (notably Facility Managers and Janitors).
* Formerly known as SmartX.

For more information, see section 30.1.9 “” on page 1101.

3.1.21 Wiring
The wiring recommendations provide guidance regarding wiring of the Central IO
modules, automation servers, BACnet/IP devices, RP controller expansion
modules, and Operator Display.
For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

63
4 Terminal Bases

Topics
Terminal Bases
Backplane Board
Device Addressing
Device Installation
Installing a Terminal Base on a DIN-rail
Connecting Terminal Bases
Printing a Wiring List for the I/O Bus
Wiring a Terminal Base
Installing an Electronics Module on a Terminal Base
Printing a Label to Identify I/O Channels
Powering Up a Device
I/O Bus
I/O Bus Parts
I/O Bus Restrictions
 4 Terminal Bases
4.1 Terminal Bases

4.1 Terminal Bases

The terminal bases are used for SpaceLogic devices that are based on the
patented two-piece design. The terminal base provides the I/O bus to the
electronics module installed on the terminal base as well as to the SpaceLogic
device installed to the right (next terminal base in the chain).
There are three different types of terminal bases for the SpaceLogic device
devices:
• PS-24V power supply: one terminal block
• AS-P servers: no terminal block
• Central IO module: two terminal blocks

Figure: Terminal base for Central IO module

The terminal bases for the AS-P servers and Central IO module have the same
backplane boards, which are connecting the power bus, the address bus, and
communication bus from the left bus connector to the right bus connector. A
common name for these buses is the I/O bus.

Figure: Internal configuration of the terminal bases for the AS-P servers and Central IO
module

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

67
4 Terminal Bases
4.1 Terminal Bases

The terminal base for the PS-24V power supplies has a different backplane
board, which does not pass through the power bus input from the left connector.
The PS-24V power supply supplies power to the server and Central IO module
installed to the right. The ground connection is connected from the left bus
connector to the right bus connector in all terminal bases, because it is used as a
common signal ground for the address bus as well as the communication bus.

Figure: Internal configuration of the terminal base for the power supply

4.1.1 Backplane Board

A backplane board is mounted in the terminal base for the W1 width devices. The
backplane board is equipped with two 2x5-pin bus connectors, a 2x6-pin
electronics module connector, address logic circuitry, and a device label.
For more information, see section 4.2 “Backplane Board” on page 69.

4.1.2 Device Addressing

Each device can detect its order in the chain of connected devices and assigns
itself an address accordingly. This auto-addressing feature is provided by the
terminal base backplane.
For more information, see section 4.3 “Device Addressing” on page 73.

4.1.3 Device Installation

The devices are designed mainly for installing on DIN rails in a cabinet.
For more information, see section 4.4 “Device Installation” on page 75.

4.1.4 I/O Bus

The I/O bus is a common bus that delivers power, address information, and
communication to all devices connected to the bus. The I/O bus is provided to the
devices through the backplane in the terminal bases. The term I/O bus also
denotes the chain of devices that are connected together.
For more information, see section 4.12 “I/O Bus” on page 89.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

68
 4 Terminal Bases
4.2 Backplane Board

4.2 Backplane Board

A backplane board is mounted in the terminal base for the W1 width devices. The
backplane board is equipped with two 2x5-pin bus connectors, a 2x6-pin
electronics module connector, address logic circuitry, and a device label.

Figure: Backplane board

There are two versions of the backplane board:

• The AS-P server and Central IO module version passes power through from
the left to the right connector.
• The power supply version does not pass power through from the left to the
right connector.
The two backplane board versions incorporate different locations of the 2x6
electronics module connector. This arrangement prevents power interference
problems if one or more power supplies are unintentionally installed on terminal
bases that are designed for the AS-P servers or Central IO modules.

4.2.1 2x5 Connector

The right connector establishes connection with the left connector of the next
terminal base when the terminal bases are connected together.

Figure: Pinout for the left and right 2x5 connectors, seen from the outside

The pins are used as follows:

Table: Backplane Connector Pin Usage

Pin number Pin number

5 Address bit #4 10 +24 V backplane

(MSB) power

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

69
4 Terminal Bases
4.2 Backplane Board

Continued
Pin number Pin number

4 Address bit #3 9 +24 V bus power

3 Address bit #2 8 GND

2 Address bit #1 7 RS-485 – bus

communication

1 Address bit #0 6 RS-485 + bus

communication

4.2.2 2x6 Connector

The internal connector fetches or supplies power from/to the electronics module
that is installed on the terminal base.

Figure: Pinout for the 2x6 connector

Figure: The 2x6 connector and its two positions

For the power supply, the connector resides in the left position and the pins are
used as follows:

Table: MB-1X-PS: Power Supply

Pin number Pin number

12 +24 V power to bus 11 GND

10 +24 V power to bus 9 GND

8 +24 V backplane 7 Address bit #3

power

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

70
 4 Terminal Bases
4.2 Backplane Board

Continued
Pin number Pin number

6 Address bit #4 5 Address bit #2

(MSB)

4 RS-485 – bus 3 Address bit #1

communication

2 RS-485 + bus 1 Address bit #0

communication

For the AS-P servers and Central IO modules, the connector resides in the right
position and the pins are used as follows:

Table: MB-1X: AS-P Servers and Central IO modules

Pin number Pin number

12 GND 11 +24 V bus power

10 GND 9 +24 V bus power

8 Address bit #3 7 GND

6 Address bit #2 5 Address bit #4

(MSB)

4 Address bit #1 3 RS-485 – bus

communication

2 Address bit #0 1 RS-485 + bus

communication

4.2.3 Address Logic Circuitry

The backplane board includes circuitry that provides the electronics module that
is installed on the terminal base with a 5-bit address. The address circuitry on the
backplane receives its power from the +24 V backplane power. This is separated
from the +24 V bus power.

4.2.4 Central IO Module Address Calculation

An I/O modue 5-bit address is generated on the backplane Printed Circuit Board
(PCB), which is mounted in the terminal base. 5-bits are required to generate
physical addresses 0 to 31. The AS-P server and Central IO module read the
physical address and add 1 internally to yield logical addresses from 1 to 32,
which display as slot IDs in the EcoStruxure Building Operation software. The 5-
bit address defines the maximum of 32 modules in a system. Although the Power
Supply (PS-24V) uses an address, the device is not "smart." Therefore, the
Power Supply does not communicate on the I/O bus or respond to packets on the
I/O bus but consumes an address on the I/O bus.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

71
4 Terminal Bases
4.2 Backplane Board

The vertical 2x6 PCB connector on the backplane PCB provides power, ground,
communication, and the 5-bit address to a Central IO module plugged into the
terminal base.
The backplane PCB accepts an input address from the male connector located
on the left side of the terminal base. The backplane PCB circuitry adds 1 to the
address passed to it from the left connector and outputs it on the female
connector on the right side. As more terminal bases are added to a system, the
address increases from left to right.
The AS-P server and Central IO module read the address by way of the vertical
backplane female connector. The address read by the I/O electronics is also
output on the right-hand side female connector.
The first terminal base on an I/O bus cannot have another terminal base plugged
into its male backplane connector. Therefore, internal programming resistors
force the first physical address to be zero (0) at the female connector, which is
the logical address 1. For pin usage, refer to the 2x5 and 2x6 connector tables in
this topic.

4.2.5 Device Label

The device label on the backplane board is used for writing down what type of
electronics module is intended to be connected to the terminal base.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

72
 4 Terminal Bases
4.3 Device Addressing

4.3 Device Addressing

Each device can detect its order in the chain of connected devices and assigns
itself an address accordingly. This auto-addressing feature is provided by the
terminal base backplane.
In EcoStruxure Building Operation WorkStation, you create a logical Central IO
module to be associated with the physical Central IO module on the I/O bus. You
specify the Central IO module type and name. Initially, the module ID is Null,
which means that the Central IO module is non-operational. You assign a module
ID that is equal to the address (position) of the Central IO module on the I/O bus.
You can configure the module ID either when you create the logical Central IO
module or later. When the Central IO module is plugged into the system at the
intended position on the bus, the EcoStruxure Building Operation software
automatically associates the physical Central IO module with the logical Central
IO module that has a matching module ID and type.

Central IO module address calculation

The backplane generates a 5-bit address corresponding to the order (position) of
the terminal base in the chain and passes this address through the I/O bus to the
electronics module installed on the terminal base (base plate). For more
information, see section 4.2 “Backplane Board” on page 69.
The leftmost device in the chain gets the address (position) 1. The next device
gets the address 2, and so on, up to 32.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

73
4 Terminal Bases
4.3 Device Addressing

Figure: Device addressing

NOTE: Position 1 is reserved for a power supply. Position 2 is reserved for

an AS-P server. Although the power supply device gets an address, the PS-
24V does not use it. For more information, see section 4.14 “I/O Bus
Restrictions” on page 92.
When you replace an electronics module, the new module automatically picks up
the same address. If you remove an electronics module from its terminal base,
the addresses of the following devices are not affected.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

74
 4 Terminal Bases
4.4 Device Installation

4.4 Device Installation

The devices are designed mainly for installing on DIN rails in a cabinet.
Consider a simple example:

Figure: System ex. 1. A Power supply, an automation server, and two Central IO modules

Each device consists of two parts:

• Terminal base
• Electronics module

Figure: A hardware device: the electronics module and the terminal base

A separate terminal base means the terminal base can be installed and wired
before the electronics module with the application program and data is supplied.
The terminal base is usually installed on a DIN rail, but it can also be mounted
directly on the wall. The electronics module is easily plugged in to the terminal
base and firmly locked by pushing the handles in place.
Replacing an electronics module is done in seconds because no terminal wiring
is affected.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

75
4 Terminal Bases
4.4 Device Installation

4.4.1 DIN Rail Installation

Install the terminal bases on a horizontal DIN rail.

Figure: Terminal base installed on a horizontal DIN rail

A DIN rail is a common and convenient technique for installing a SpaceLogic

device along with other associated control and monitoring devices. The most
efficient ventilation is achieved with the wall-mounted DIN rail oriented
horizontally and with adequate space provided between the SpaceLogic device
rail and adjacent rails or other panel-mounted devices.

NOTICE
• For AS-P servers: Always install the terminal base on a horizontal DIN rail.
This position is required to provide sufficient cooling air flow through the
electronics module. Installation on a vertical DIN rail can significantly reduce
the life span of the module.
• For Central IO modules and PS-24V power supply: Install the terminal base
on a horizontal DIN rail. This position provides proper cooling air flow through
the electronics module.

The terminal bases are connected to each other by sliding the terminal bases
together using the built-in connectors.
To ensure that the correct electronics module is used with the correct terminal
base, you must always check that the warning label on the terminal base
backplane indicates which module type is to be connected. Write the intended
module type, if it is not already printed, on the label.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

76
 4 Terminal Bases
4.4 Device Installation

Figure: Terminal base with label for intended module type

Install only the module type that is indicated on the label on the terminal base
backplane. A mismatch can cause electric shock and damage the electronics
module.

WARNING
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Install only the module type that is indicated on the label on the terminal base
backplane.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

If the label does not indicate the intended module type, consult the control panel
documentation to determine the intended module type.
To prevent the modules from sliding sideways on the DIN rail, fix an end clamp
for DIN 35 (part number SXWDINEND10001) tightly against the rightmost device
on the rail. The end clamp is easily removed if you bend the snap lock open with
a screwdriver.

Figure: End clamp for DIN 35 fixed across the DIN rail

The chain of devices can be split on multiple DIN rails (rows) by using an
extension cord called S-cable. Maximum five S-cables are allowed per system.
The S-cable connects the last (rightmost) device on one DIN rail with the first
(leftmost) device on the next DIN rail. The complete chain of devices must remain
within one cabinet for EMC reasons.
The following figure shows an example of how you can use an S-cable to connect
devices that are installed on separate DIN rails in a cabinet. For sufficient cooling
air flow through the devices, the DIN rails and the devices are installed
horizontally in the cabinet.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

77
4 Terminal Bases
4.4 Device Installation

Figure: Devices installed on separate, horizontal rails and connected using an S-cable

The S-cable is available with right angle connectors and in 1.5 m (5 ft) and 0.75
m (2 ft 5 in) lengths. You can serially connect up to two S-cables to extend the
length.
The following image shows the minimum space required for plugging/unplugging
the S-cable from the device but also provides information on the minimum bend
radius required to reduce the stress of the cable. The S-cable with straight
connectors is a discontinued product, which can no longer be ordered from
Schneider Electric.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

78
 4 Terminal Bases
4.4 Device Installation

Figure: S-cable connecting devices on separate rails

4.4.2 Device Order

The order in which the devices are installed in the chain (I/O bus) is important.
The devices should be installed in the following order:
• Position 1 (leftmost): Power supply (mandatory)
• Position 2: AS-P server (mandatory)
• Position 3 to 32: Central IO modules and extra power supplies as needed
based on power budget. One power supply can supply power for loads up to
30 W. For more information, see section 5.5 “Power Budget” on page 105.
NOTE: There is a limit of one automation server per I/O bus.
The rules are summarized in the following illustration.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

79
4 Terminal Bases
4.4 Device Installation

Figure: Order of devices on the I/O bus

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

80
 4 Terminal Bases
4.5 Installing a Terminal Base on a DIN-rail

4.5 Installing a Terminal Base on a DIN-rail

You install a terminal base on a horizontal DIN-rail prior to connecting it to its
neighboring terminal bases.
For more information, see section 4.4 “Device Installation” on page 75.

To install a terminal base on a DIN-rail

1. Ensure that the DIN-rail is horizontal.

NOTICE
• For AS-P servers: Always install the terminal base on a horizontal DIN
rail. This position is required to provide sufficient cooling air flow through
the electronics module. Installation on a vertical DIN rail can significantly
reduce the life span of the module.
• For Central IO modules and PS-24V power supply: Install the terminal
base on a horizontal DIN rail. This position provides proper cooling air
flow through the electronics module.

2. Pull down the DIN-rail clip.

3. Hook the terminal base onto the top of the DIN-rail.

4. Push the terminal base fully onto the DIN-rail and release the DIN-rail clip.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

81
4 Terminal Bases
4.6 Connecting Terminal Bases

4.6 Connecting Terminal Bases

You connect terminal bases together to provide continuity of the power supply
and the address bus.
For more information, see section 4.4 “Device Installation” on page 75.

To connect terminal bases

1. Ensure that each terminal base is clipped to the DIN-rail.
2. Push each terminal base firmly against its neighbor to the left, ensuring that
the power supply and address bus connector is properly mated.

3. On the backplane label of each terminal base, write the type of module to be
connected to that terminal base.
You can now wire the terminal base.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

82
 4 Terminal Bases
4.7 Printing a Wiring List for the I/O Bus

4.7 Printing a Wiring List for the I/O Bus

You print an I/O wiring list for the I/O bus that describes which I/O points are
associated with each Central IO module. You use the printed copy of this list to
help wire the I/O bus network.
NOTE: If a Module ID is Null, you cannot print the wiring list. If a channel is
Null, the I/O point labels do not display in the wiring list.
For more information, see section 4.13 “I/O Bus Parts” on page 90.

To print a wiring list for the I/O bus

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, click the IO Bus on an
automation server.
2. On the Actions menu, click Print IO wiring list.

3. In the Print IO Wiring List dialog box, click the Printer icon .
4. To print a wiring list for a single Central IO module, right-click the selected
Central IO module.
5. Click Print IO wiring list.

6. Click the Printer icon .

Observe that the complete path to the Central IO module is displayed on the title
bar for the I/O wiring list.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

83
4 Terminal Bases
4.8 Wiring a Terminal Base

4.8 Wiring a Terminal Base

You can wire a terminal base prior to installing an electronics module.
For more information, see section 4.4 “Device Installation” on page 75.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
Disconnect the power supply and other high voltage equipment before wiring.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Always use the recommended cables (or wires with larger cross-sectional
area). For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

NOTE: Wiring can also be carried out after a module has been installed in
its terminal base.

To wire a terminal base

1. To access the terminal block screws, remove the electronics module or
open the clear plastic label carrier.

2. Loosen the screws of the terminal block.

3. Strip approximately 7 mm (0.3 inch) of the insulation from the end of each
wire.
4. Insert the stripped end of each wire fully into its intended terminal. Ensure
that no bare wire strands extend from the terminal.
5. Tigthen the screws using a small flat-blade screwdriver. Ensure that the
screws are fully tightened. Use the following recommended screw tightening
torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in).
6. Close the top clear plastic label carrier or refit the electronics module.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

84
 4 Terminal Bases
4.9 Installing an Electronics Module on a Terminal Base

4.9 Installing an Electronics Module on a

Terminal Base
You install an electronics module directly onto the relevant terminal base, where
it will connect to the power supply and address bus.
For more information, see section 4.4 “Device Installation” on page 75.

WARNING
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Install only the module type that is indicated on the label on the terminal base
backplane.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

To install an electronics module on a terminal base

1. Pull out the two handles on the left and right sides of the module.
2. Plug in the module to the terminal base, ensuring that the PCB header pins
align correctly with the backplane socket, and press firmly.
3. Push the handles in firmly to lock the module in place.

2.

1.
2.

3.
1.

3.

Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

85
4 Terminal Bases
4.9 Installing an Electronics Module on a Terminal Base

4. Open the clear plastic label carriers.

5. Write and insert the labels.

6. Close the label carriers.
You can now power up the device.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

86
 4 Terminal Bases
4.10 Printing a Label to Identify I/O Channels

4.10 Printing a Label to Identify I/O Channels

You print labels to identify I/O channels on the placard of a Central IO module
much the same way you label circuits on an electrical panel. You accept the
default names for the I/O point labels or customize the I/O point names for your
own application.
NOTE: If a Module ID is Null, you cannot print the label. If a channel is Null,
the I/O point labels do not display in the Print IO Module Labels dialog box.

To print a label to identify I/O channels

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, expand the IO Bus on an
automation server.
2. In the List View, right-click the Central IO module, onboard IO module, the
entire IO Bus folder, or multiple Central IO modules.
3. Click Print IO module labels.
4. In the Print IO Module Labels dialog box, select Blank Label Text to print
labels with only the channel number with no additional label text.
NOTE: The label text prints in red if the text is too long to fit on the
label.
5. In the Paper Type box, select a paper type.
6. Click Print to print the Central IO module label or Save to save any changes
to the point’s label text property.
7. For an AS-B server onboard Central IO module, cut along the dotted lines
and fold the label along the fold edge to fit on the placard.
The label is properly sized to fit on the placard of the Central IO module.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

87
4 Terminal Bases
4.11 Powering Up a Device

4.11 Powering Up a Device

You perform the following steps to power up a device.
For more information, see section 4.4 “Device Installation” on page 75.

To power up a device
1. Check that the device is properly seated in its terminal base.
2. Check that all wiring is correct.
3. Ensure that power is supplied to the backplane.
4. After powering up, check that the Status LED changes to a constant green
light after about a minute (can also be off briefly during each period of
activity).

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

88
 4 Terminal Bases
4.12 I/O Bus

4.12 I/O Bus

The I/O bus is a common bus that delivers power, address information, and
communication to all devices connected to the bus. The I/O bus is provided to the
devices through the backplane in the terminal bases. The term I/O bus also
denotes the chain of devices that are connected together.

4.12.1 I/O Bus Parts

The I/O bus consists of the following parts:
• Power bus
• Address bus
• Communication bus
For more information, see section 4.13 “I/O Bus Parts” on page 90.

4.12.2 I/O Bus Restrictions

The I/O bus imposes restrictions on the number of devices that can be connected
to the bus and what type of devices that are allowed on certain positions.
For more information, see section 4.14 “I/O Bus Restrictions” on page 92.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

89
4 Terminal Bases
4.13 I/O Bus Parts

4.13 I/O Bus Parts

The I/O bus consists of the following parts:
• Power bus
• Address bus
• Communication bus

Figure: I/O bus parts

Power bus
The power bus distributes 24 VDC power from the power supply to the AS-P
server and the Central IO modules.
Use the power budget to calculate the maximum number of devices that the
power supply can supply. If more devices are used, additional power supplies
must be added to the I/O bus.
For more information, see section 5.5 “Power Budget” on page 105.

Address bus
The address bus is used to pass the address from the terminal base backplane to
the electronics module that is installed on the terminal base to the next terminal
base on the I/O bus. Typically, the physical position (address) of the devices on
the I/O bus should match the module IDs in the EcoStruxure Building Operation
software. For more information, see section 4.3 “Device Addressing” on page 73.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

90
 4 Terminal Bases
4.13 I/O Bus Parts

Continued
Electronics Module Physical Position Number EcoStruxure Building
Operation Module ID

Power Supply 1 Number is hidden in

WorkStation

AS-P server 2 Number is hidden in

WorkStation

Central IO module 3 3

Central IO module n n <=32

Communication bus
The communication bus enables serial (RS-485) communication between the
AS-P server and the Central IO modules. The AS-P server controls and
supervises the communication on the communication bus. The Central IO
modules also monitor their communication status. When a new Central IO
module is configured and connected to the I/O bus, the automation server
automatically detects the new Central IO module.
NOTE: All the buses use a common ground, which is connected to the
signal return paths with terminals called “RET”. The signal return path is also
called signal ground.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

91
4 Terminal Bases
4.14 I/O Bus Restrictions

4.14 I/O Bus Restrictions

The I/O bus imposes restrictions on the number of devices that can be connected
to the bus and what type of devices that are allowed on certain positions.
The following restrictions apply to the I/O bus:
• Position 1 reserved for a power supply
• Position 2 reserved for a AS-P server
• Maximum one AS-P server per I/O bus
• Maximum 32 devices per I/O bus
NOTE: Even when connected by an S-cable, no more than 32 devices are
allowed on the I/O bus.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

92
5 Power Supplies

Topics
PS-24V Power Supplies
Electronics Modules
Terminal Bases
Power Supply PS-24V LEDs
Power Budget
 5 Power Supplies
5.1 PS-24V Power Supplies

5.1 PS-24V Power Supplies

PS-24V is the power supply for the AS-P servers and Central IO modules. The
PS-24V power supply requires an input voltage of either 24 VAC +/–20 % or
24–30 VDC.
The PS-24V power supply is based on the patented two-piece design. Each PS-
24V device consists of an electronics module and a terminal base.
PS-24V is usually installed on a DIN rail in a cabinet and provides power to the
subsequent devices in the chain through the terminal base backplane. A PS-24V
power supply consumes one address position, even though the address is not
used.
A system may contain more than one PS-24V to supply the power needed,
depending on the type and number of connected devices. A power budget table
can be used for proper calculations. For more information, see section 5.5
“Power Budget” on page 105.
The output voltage is 24 VDC supplied on the backplane, maximum 30 W. If the
output is overloaded, the power is automatically shut down and the Status LED
turns red. At an interval of a couple of seconds the power supply retries to switch
on the power output. This is sometimes called ‘the hiccup mode’. For more
information, see section 33.6 “Power Supply Overload” on page 1318.
The power supply has galvanic isolation between the primary (input power) and
secondary (output power) side of the power supply.

Figure: Power supply PS-24V

5.1.1 Electronics Modules

The electronics module is the main component of SpaceLogic devices that are
based on the patented two-piece design. The electronics module is installed on a
terminal base, which constitutes the second component of the device.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

95
5 Power Supplies
5.1 PS-24V Power Supplies

For more information, see section 7.2 “Electronics Modules” on page 132.

5.1.2 Terminal Bases

The terminal bases are used for SpaceLogic devices that are based on the
patented two-piece design. The terminal base provides the I/O bus to the
electronics module installed on the terminal base as well as to the SpaceLogic
device installed to the right (next terminal base in the chain).
For more information, see section 7.3 “Terminal Bases” on page 134.

5.1.3 Power Supply PS-24V LEDs

There are two LEDs on the front panel of the PS-24V. The LEDs indicate status
for input and output power.
For more information, see section 5.4 “Power Supply PS-24V LEDs” on page
103.

5.1.4 Power Budget

Use the power budget to calculate the maximum number of devices that the
power supply can supply. If more devices are used, additional power supplies
must be added to the I/O bus.
For more information, see section 5.5 “Power Budget” on page 105.

5.1.5 Specifications
DC output

Voltage 24 VDC

Accuracy +/-1 VDC

Maximum power 30 W

AC input

Nominal voltage 24 VAC

Operating voltage range +/- 20 %

Frequency 50/60 Hz

Maximum current 2.5 A rms

Recommended transformer rating 60 VA or higher

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

96
 5 Power Supplies
5.1 PS-24V Power Supplies

DC input

Nominal voltage 24 to 30 VDC

Operating voltage range 21 to 33 VDC

Maximum power consumption 40 W

Terminals

Environment

Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

Ambient temperature, storage -20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Material

Plastic flame rating UL94-5VB

Enclosure PC/ABS

Ingress protection rating IP 20

Mechanical

Dimensions including terminal base 90 W x 114 H x 64 D mm (3.6 W x 4.5 H x 2.5 D in.)

Weight including terminal base 0.285 kg (0.63 lb)

Weight excluding terminal base 0.186 kg (0.41 lb)

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

97
5 Power Supplies
5.1 PS-24V Power Supplies

5.1.6 Internal Configuration

The PS-24V power supply module does not connect to the address and communication busses in the
terminal base. The AC/DC converter terminals L/+ and N/- are isolated from the circuits on the
secondary side of the converter. You can wire these terminals without concern for polarity matching, but
it is good practice to connect the positive supply voltage to L/+ and the negative supply voltage to N/- in
order to prevent confusion.

Figure: PS-24V internal configuration

The earth ground terminal ( ) on the PS-24V power supply is connected to signal ground, which is the
same as the negative output from the power supply. The purpose of this connection is to comply with
EMC directives.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

98
 5 Power Supplies
5.2 Electronics Modules

5.2 Electronics Modules

The electronics module is the main component of SpaceLogic devices that are
based on the patented two-piece design. The electronics module is installed on a
terminal base, which constitutes the second component of the device.
The electronics module has two handles, which have to be pulled out when
removing the module from or inserting the module to the terminal base. In their
inner position, the handles lock the module to the terminal base. This effectively
helps prevent unintentional separation. Two plastic label carriers can carry labels
that show field markings. Wiring connections are made at terminal blocks
contained on the terminal base. The terminal screws are accessible without
removing the module. Power for all devices is taken from the 24 VDC rails of the
backplane that is part of the terminal base.

Figure: General assembly

Number Device Parts

Electronics module

Terminal block

Terminal base

Ventilation slot

Label carrier

DIN rail

Backplane board with device label

LEDs

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

99
5 Power Supplies
5.2 Electronics Modules

Continued
Number Device Parts

Handle

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

100
 5 Power Supplies
5.3 Terminal Bases

5.3 Terminal Bases

The terminal bases are used for SpaceLogic devices that are based on the
patented two-piece design. The terminal base provides the I/O bus to the
electronics module installed on the terminal base as well as to the SpaceLogic
device installed to the right (next terminal base in the chain).
There are three different types of terminal bases for the SpaceLogic device
devices:
• PS-24V power supply: one terminal block
• AS-P servers: no terminal block
• Central IO module: two terminal blocks

Figure: Terminal base for Central IO module

The terminal bases for the AS-P servers and Central IO module have the same
backplane boards, which are connecting the power bus, the address bus, and
communication bus from the left bus connector to the right bus connector. A
common name for these buses is the I/O bus.

Figure: Internal configuration of the terminal bases for the AS-P servers and Central IO
module

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

101
5 Power Supplies
5.3 Terminal Bases

The terminal base for the PS-24V power supplies has a different backplane
board, which does not pass through the power bus input from the left connector.
The PS-24V power supply supplies power to the server and Central IO module
installed to the right. The ground connection is connected from the left bus
connector to the right bus connector in all terminal bases, because it is used as a
common signal ground for the address bus as well as the communication bus.

Figure: Internal configuration of the terminal base for the power supply

5.3.1 Backplane Board

A backplane board is mounted in the terminal base for the W1 width devices. The
backplane board is equipped with two 2x5-pin bus connectors, a 2x6-pin
electronics module connector, address logic circuitry, and a device label.
For more information, see section 4.2 “Backplane Board” on page 69.

5.3.2 Device Addressing

Each device can detect its order in the chain of connected devices and assigns
itself an address accordingly. This auto-addressing feature is provided by the
terminal base backplane.
For more information, see section 4.3 “Device Addressing” on page 73.

5.3.3 Device Installation

The devices are designed mainly for installing on DIN rails in a cabinet.
For more information, see section 4.4 “Device Installation” on page 75.

5.3.4 I/O Bus

The I/O bus is a common bus that delivers power, address information, and
communication to all devices connected to the bus. The I/O bus is provided to the
devices through the backplane in the terminal bases. The term I/O bus also
denotes the chain of devices that are connected together.
For more information, see section 4.12 “I/O Bus” on page 89.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

102
 5 Power Supplies
5.4 Power Supply PS-24V LEDs

5.4 Power Supply PS-24V LEDs

There are two LEDs on the front panel of the PS-24V. The LEDs indicate status
for input and output power.

Figure: PS-24V power supply LEDs

Table: Power Supply PS-24V LEDs

Function Color

Main power Green

Status Green/red

5.4.1 Main Power LED

The Main Power LED indicates status for input power. The Main Power LED
indicates the condition.

Table: Main Power LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, constant Input power

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

103
5 Power Supplies
5.4 Power Supply PS-24V LEDs

Continued
LED Patterns Condition

No light No input power

5.4.2 Status LED

The PS-24V power supply Status LED indicates the condition of the device.

Table: Power Supply Status LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, constant Output voltage and load OK

Red/green, flashing Output slightly overloaded

Red, constant Output overloaded

No light No input power

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

104
 5 Power Supplies
5.5 Power Budget

5.5 Power Budget

Use the power budget to calculate the maximum number of devices that the
power supply can supply. If more devices are used, additional power supplies
must be added to the I/O bus.
The power supply delivers and output voltage of 24 VDC +/– 1 V at an output
current of about 1.25 A. The power supply can supply power for loads up to 30
W.
NOTE: The number of devices that the power supply can supply is 30 W
based on the individual wattage requirements of each device installed in a
system.
To determine the number and position of the power supplies, use the following
power budget table.

Table: Power Budget Table

Device Power (W)

AS-P server 10.0

UI-16 1.8

DI-16 1.6

RTD-DI-16 1.6

DO-FA-12 1.8

DO-FA-12-H 1.8

DO-FC-8 2.2

DO-FC-8-H 2.2

AO-8 4.9

AO-8-H 4.9

AO-V-8 0.7

AO-V-8-H 0.7

UI-8-DO-FC-4 1.9

UI-8-DO-FC-4-H 1.9

UI-8-AO-4 3.2

UI-8-AO-4-H 3.2

UI-8-AO-V-4 1.0

UI-8-AO-V-4-H 1.0

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

105
6 AS-P Servers

Topics
AS-P Servers
Electronics Modules
Terminal Bases
AS-P Server Communication Ports
AS-P Server Screw Terminals
AS-P Server LEDs
 6 AS-P Servers
6.1 AS-P Servers

6.1 AS-P Servers

The AS-P server offers enhanced processor performance, increased memory
size, dual Ethernet ports, and high-speed USB interfaces. The AS-P server is a
Schneider Electric manufactured embedded device that generally serves as the
lowest tier EcoStruxure BMS server within the EcoStruxure BMS. The AS-P
controls and supervises equipment, typically HVAC equipment. AS-P servers use
Central IO module with connected field devices, such as sensors and actuators,
to do that.
AS-P servers are based on the patented two-piece design. Each AS-P server
consists of an electronics module and a terminal base.
The AS-P server is installed with the Central IO modules on DIN rails in cabinets.
The AS-P server electronics module uses a W1 enclosure. Power is supplied
through the terminal base backplane.

Figure: AS-P server

6.1.1 Electronics Modules

The electronics module is the main component of SpaceLogic devices that are
based on the patented two-piece design. The electronics module is installed on a
terminal base, which constitutes the second component of the device.
For more information, see section 7.2 “Electronics Modules” on page 132.

6.1.2 Terminal Bases

The terminal bases are used for SpaceLogic devices that are based on the
patented two-piece design. The terminal base provides the I/O bus to the
electronics module installed on the terminal base as well as to the SpaceLogic
device installed to the right (next terminal base in the chain).

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

109
6 AS-P Servers
6.1 AS-P Servers

For more information, see section 7.3 “Terminal Bases” on page 134.

6.1.3 AS-P Server Models

The AS-P server comes in four models that offer support for different functions.
Model LonWorks Secure Boot

AS-P Yes No

AS-P-NL No No

AS-P-S Yes Yes

AS-P-NLS No Yes

The AS-P-S and AS-P-NLS models are hardware only. An AS-P software
package needs to be purchased separately. For more information, see the AS-P
Specification Sheet.

6.1.4 Memory
An AS-P server has two types of memory:
• 512 MB DDR3 SDRAM (for program execution)
• 4 GB eMMC memory (for storage)
If a power outage occurs, all important variables are automatically saved to the
eMMC memory before complete shutdown. When power returns, this data
retention function helps ensure that the AS-P server can continue to run with the
correct set of values.

6.1.5 Supported Building Standards

The AS-P server natively communicates with three of the most popular
communication protocols:
• BACnet: The AS-P server directly communicates to BACnet/IP and BACnet
MS/TP networks, which provides access to MP and RP controllers, b3
BACnet devices, and BACnet devices. The AS-P server also supports
BACnet/SC applications as a BACnet/SC node or BACnet/SC router, which
allows the AS-P server to be in BACnet/SC networks and support
applications that connect BACnet/IP or MS/TP networks with BACnet/SC
networks.
• LonWorks: The AS-P server has a built-in FTT-10 port, which enables
access to Xenta devices and LonWorks devices.
• Modbus: The AS-P server natively integrates Modbus RS-485 master and
slave configurations, as well as IP client and server. This integration
provides access to devices that communicate on the Modbus protocol, such
as power meters, circuit breakers, and lighting controllers.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

110
 6 AS-P Servers
6.1 AS-P Servers

NOTE: The AS-P server models AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS do not support
LonWorks.

6.1.6 AS-P Server Communication Ports

An AS-P server has the following communication ports:
• 2 Ethernet 10/100 megabit ports
• 2 RS-485 ports
• 2 LonWorks (TP/FT and RS-485) ports (not available on the AS-P-NL and
AS-P-NLS models)
• 1 USB host port
• 1 USB device port
• 1 backplane I/O bus port
For more information, see section 6.4 “AS-P Server Communication Ports” on
page 120.

6.1.7 AS-P Server Screw Terminals

There are pluggable screw terminals at the top of an AS-P server.
For more information, see section 6.5 “AS-P Server Screw Terminals” on page
121.

6.1.8 AS-P Server LEDs

There are several LEDs on the front panel of an AS-P server.
For more information, see section 6.6 “AS-P Server LEDs” on page 124.

6.1.9 Reset Functions

There are four different types of reset for the automation servers: warm start, cold
start, reset, and reset to DFU mode. Depending on the type of reset, the
automation server can be reset using the reset button or a command from
WorkStation.
For more information, see section 9.2 “Automation Server Reset Functions” on
page 277.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

111
6 AS-P Servers
6.1 AS-P Servers

6.1.10 Communication Port Wiring

The wiring recommendations for the communication ports on the automation
servers, BACnet/IP devices, RP controller expansion modules, and Operator
Display devices apply to wires and cables used for RS-485 communications,
LonWorks communications, USB connections, Ethernet connections, sensor bus
connections, room bus connections, and RP controller Modbus network
connections. Always use the recommended cables and wires.
For more information, see section 31.23 “Communication Port Wiring” on page
1177.

6.1.11 AS-P Server Software

Before you engineer an AS-P server, install the AS-P server software on the
server using Device Administrator. The software is not pre-loaded on the AS-P
servers.
For more information, see the Installing AS-P or AS-B Software topic on
WebHelp.

6.1.12 Automation Server Replacement Using

Restore
Backup and Restore helps assure that automation server data can be restored to
a replacement automation server in the event of detected failure, or to the same
automation server in the event of data loss. As a precaution, you back up your
automation servers regularly so that you can use the most current backup to
restore the automation server data to a replacement automation server. You also
configure the new automation server to match the name and the network settings
of the replaced automation server so the system can identify this automation
server when online.
For more information, see the Automation Server Replacement Using Restore
topic on WebHelp.

6.1.13 Specifications
Electrical

DC input supply power 10 W

DC input supply voltage 24 VDC

Environment

Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

Ambient temperature, storage -20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

112
 6 AS-P Servers
6.1 AS-P Servers

Material

Plastic flame rating UL94-5VB

Enclosure PC/ABS

Ingress protection rating IP 20

Mechanical

Dimensions including terminal base 90 W x 114 H x 64 D mm (3.6 W x 4.5 H x 2.5 D in.)

Weight including terminal base 0.321 kg (0.71 lb)

Weight excluding terminal base 0.245 kg (0.54 lb)

Real-time clock

Accuracy in runtime mode NTP server

Accuracy in backup mode, at 25 °C (77 °F) +/-52 seconds per month

Backup time, at 25 °C (77 °F) 10 days

Communication ports

Ethernet Dual 10/100BASE-TX (RJ45)

USB 1 USB 2.0 device port (mini-B)

1 USB 2.0 host port (type-A), 5 VDC, 2.5 W

RS-485 Dual 2-wire ports, bias 5.0 VDC

LonWorksa TP/FT-10
a) AS-P-NL (SXWASPXXX10002) and AS-P-NLS (SXWASPSBX10002) do not support LonWorks.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

113
6 AS-P Servers
6.1 AS-P Servers

Communications

BACnet BACnet/IP and MS/TP, port configurable, default 47808

BACnet/SC, port configurable, no default port
BTL B-BC (BACnet Building Controller)a
a) See the BTL Product Catalog for up-to-date details on BTL listed firmware revisions on BACnet
International's home page.

Modbus Modbus TCP, client and server

Serial, RS-485, master or slave

TCP Binary, port fixed, 4444

HTTP Non-binary, port configurable, default 80

HTTPS Encrypted supporting TLS 1.3, 1.2, 1.1a, and 1.0a, port configurable default 443
a) Disabled by default.

SMTP Email sending, port configurable, default 25

SNMP version 3
Network supervision using poll and trap
Application alarm distribution using trap

LNS

LNS version OpenLNS

Installed on WorkStation PC

LonMark

Resource files version 14.00

CPU

Frequency 500 MHz

Type SPEAr1380, ARM Cortex-A9 dual-core

DDR3 SDRAM 512 MB

eMMC memory 4 GB

Memory backup Yes, battery-free, no maintenance

6.1.14 Internal Configuration

All serial communication ports of the AS-P server module refer to signal ground
as shown in the figure below.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

114
 6 AS-P Servers
6.1 AS-P Servers

Figure: AS-P server internal configuration

NOTE: The AS-P server models AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS do not have
LonWorks (LON) communication ports.
The I/O bus in the terminal base provides the AS-P server module with power
and an address.
The address value in the I/O bus is increased by one for each terminal base. The
I/O bus also enables RS-485 communication between the Central IO module and
the automation server.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

115
6 AS-P Servers
6.2 Electronics Modules

6.2 Electronics Modules

The electronics module is the main component of SpaceLogic devices that are
based on the patented two-piece design. The electronics module is installed on a
terminal base, which constitutes the second component of the device.
The electronics module has two handles, which have to be pulled out when
removing the module from or inserting the module to the terminal base. In their
inner position, the handles lock the module to the terminal base. This effectively
helps prevent unintentional separation. Two plastic label carriers can carry labels
that show field markings. Wiring connections are made at terminal blocks
contained on the terminal base. The terminal screws are accessible without
removing the module. Power for all devices is taken from the 24 VDC rails of the
backplane that is part of the terminal base.

Figure: General assembly

Number Device Parts

Electronics module

Terminal block

Terminal base

Ventilation slot

Label carrier

DIN rail

Backplane board with device label

LEDs

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

116
 6 AS-P Servers
6.2 Electronics Modules

Continued
Number Device Parts

Handle

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

117
6 AS-P Servers
6.3 Terminal Bases

6.3 Terminal Bases

The terminal bases are used for SpaceLogic devices that are based on the
patented two-piece design. The terminal base provides the I/O bus to the
electronics module installed on the terminal base as well as to the SpaceLogic
device installed to the right (next terminal base in the chain).
There are three different types of terminal bases for the SpaceLogic device
devices:
• PS-24V power supply: one terminal block
• AS-P servers: no terminal block
• Central IO module: two terminal blocks

Figure: Terminal base for Central IO module

The terminal bases for the AS-P servers and Central IO module have the same
backplane boards, which are connecting the power bus, the address bus, and
communication bus from the left bus connector to the right bus connector. A
common name for these buses is the I/O bus.

Figure: Internal configuration of the terminal bases for the AS-P servers and Central IO
module

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

118
 6 AS-P Servers
6.3 Terminal Bases

The terminal base for the PS-24V power supplies has a different backplane
board, which does not pass through the power bus input from the left connector.
The PS-24V power supply supplies power to the server and Central IO module
installed to the right. The ground connection is connected from the left bus
connector to the right bus connector in all terminal bases, because it is used as a
common signal ground for the address bus as well as the communication bus.

Figure: Internal configuration of the terminal base for the power supply

6.3.1 Backplane Board

A backplane board is mounted in the terminal base for the W1 width devices. The
backplane board is equipped with two 2x5-pin bus connectors, a 2x6-pin
electronics module connector, address logic circuitry, and a device label.
For more information, see section 4.2 “Backplane Board” on page 69.

6.3.2 Device Addressing

Each device can detect its order in the chain of connected devices and assigns
itself an address accordingly. This auto-addressing feature is provided by the
terminal base backplane.
For more information, see section 4.3 “Device Addressing” on page 73.

6.3.3 Device Installation

The devices are designed mainly for installing on DIN rails in a cabinet.
For more information, see section 4.4 “Device Installation” on page 75.

6.3.4 I/O Bus

The I/O bus is a common bus that delivers power, address information, and
communication to all devices connected to the bus. The I/O bus is provided to the
devices through the backplane in the terminal bases. The term I/O bus also
denotes the chain of devices that are connected together.
For more information, see section 4.12 “I/O Bus” on page 89.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

119
6 AS-P Servers
6.4 AS-P Server Communication Ports

6.4 AS-P Server Communication Ports

An AS-P server has the following communication ports:
• 2 Ethernet 10/100 megabit ports
• 2 RS-485 ports
• 2 LonWorks (TP/FT and RS-485) ports (not available on the AS-P-NL and
AS-P-NLS models)
• 1 USB host port
• 1 USB device port
• 1 backplane I/O bus port

Table: AS-P Server Communication Ports

Communication port Connection

Ethernet 1 10/100 IP, LAN/WAN, Modbus, BACnet

Ethernet 2 10/100 IP, LAN/WAN, Modbus, BACnet

RS-485 COM A Modbus, BACnet

RS-485 COM B Modbus, BACnet

LonWorks (TP/FT and RS-485)a LonWorks

USB host Advanced Display (AD), Zigbee Adapter

USB device Device Administrator

Backplane I/O bus Internal power supply and I/O addressing

a) The AS-P server models AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS do not support LonWorks.

The Ethernet communication is performed over a 10/100BaseTX, 10 or 100

Mbit/s, twisted pair network. The AS-P servers have two Ethernet ports with RJ45
connectors.
The two Ethernet ports can be configured in three different modes: switching
enabled, second port disabled, or dual IP networks. One port should be
connected to the site network. When switching between the two ports is enabled,
the other port can be used to connect computers running WorkStation or
WebStation, Modbus TCP units, or BACnet/IP devices such as MP controllers,
but not another EcoStruxure BMS server. To limit access to the system, you can
disconnect the second port. When the two ports are configured in dual IP mode,
you can connect a separate network of IP devices to the second port. The
automation server has the option to act as a DHCP server on this network. You
can lock the DHCP network and only allow current DHCP clients to communicate
with the automation server.
The USB host port (facing down) can be used for connecting devices such as the
Advanced Display (AD) and Zigbee Adapter. For more information, see section
29.6 “Connecting AD v3 to an Automation Server and a 24 VDC Power Supply”
on page 1091. For more information, see section 26.1.1 “” on page 1026.
The USB device port on the front is intended for program download from a PC by
means of Device Administrator. It is connected to a PC or a downstream port of a
hub.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

120
 6 AS-P Servers
6.5 AS-P Server Screw Terminals

6.5 AS-P Server Screw Terminals

There are pluggable screw terminals at the top of an AS-P server.
The AS-P server comes in different models. The AS-P and AS-P-S models have
three screw terminal blocks (with 4, 3, and 5 poles) whereas the AS-P-NL and
AS-P-NLS models have two screw terminal blocks (with 4 and 3 poles).
Recommended screw tightening torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in)

AS-P and AS-P-S models

Figure: AS-P and AS-P-S models, screw terminals and other connectors

Table: Top Side Screw Terminals, AS-P and AS-P-S Models

Terminal number Designation Usage

COM A

1 TX/RX + RS-485 communication

2 TX/RX – RS-485 communication

3 RET Internally connected to

ground

4 Bias + 5.0 VDC, 25 mA output for

RS-485 biasing

COM B

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

121
6 AS-P Servers
6.5 AS-P Server Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

5 TX/RX + RS-485 communication

6 TX/RX – RS-485 communication

7 RET Internally connected to

ground

LON

8 TX/RX + RS-485 LonWorks

9 TX/RX – RS-485 LonWorks

10 RET Internally connected to

ground

11 LON-1 TP/FT-10 Free topology

LonWorks network, 78 kbps

12 LON-2 TP/FT-10 Free topology

LonWorks network, 78 kbps

The screw terminals 1 to 7, intended for RS-485 communication, act as

connectors to the AS-P server and are easily inserted/removed without disrupting
the network. Doing so may help in isolating possible RS-485 communication
problems.

AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS models

Figure: AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS models, screw terminals and other connectors

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

122
 6 AS-P Servers
6.5 AS-P Server Screw Terminals

Table: Top Side Screw Terminals, AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS Models

Terminal number Designation Usage

COM A

1 TX/RX + RS-485 communication

2 TX/RX – RS-485 communication

3 RET Internally connected to

ground

4 Bias + 5.0 VDC, 25 mA output for

RS-485 biasing

COM B

5 TX/RX + RS-485 communication

6 TX/RX – RS-485 communication

7 RET Internally connected to

ground

Other

8 NC Not connected

9 NC Not connected

10 RET Internally connected to

ground

11 NC Not connected

12 NC Not connected

The screw terminals 1 to 7, intended for RS-485 communication, act as

connectors to the AS-P server and are easily inserted/removed without disrupting
the network. Doing so may help in isolating possible RS-485 communication
problems.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

123
6 AS-P Servers
6.6 AS-P Server LEDs

6.6 AS-P Server LEDs

There are several LEDs on the front panel of an AS-P server.
The AS-P server comes in different models. The AS-P and AS-P-S models have
nine LEDs whereas the AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS models have seven LEDs.

Figure: AS-P server LEDs

Table: The Nine LEDs

Function Color

RS-485 A, Tx Yellow

RS-485 A, Rx Green

RS-485 B, Tx Yellow

RS-485 B, Rx Green

Ethernet 1, Link/Act/Speed Green/Yellow

Ethernet 2, Link/Act/Speed Green/Yellow

LON, Txa Yellow

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

124
 6 AS-P Servers
6.6 AS-P Server LEDs

Continued
Function Color

LON, Modea Red

Status (AS-P server) Green/Red

a) The AS-P server models AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS do not have LEDs for LonWorks (LON).

NOTE: The AS-P server Ethernet and Status indicators comprise two LEDs
(green/yellow and green/red respectively) in one structure. Normally, when
one LED is lit, the other is not lit and vice versa, that is, the indicator will
show one color at a time.
The LEDs indicate status of the AS-P server and the ongoing communication.

6.6.1 Status LED

The automation server Status LED indicates the condition of the device.

Table: Automation Server Status LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, constant Normal operation, status OK

Green, flashing (~1 Hz) Device restarting, wait

Red, constant Detected error, attention required

Red, flashing (~1 Hz) Device operates, but a problem needs

attention

Red/green, flashing (~1 Hz) Firmware being downloaded, wait

Red/green, vague Device firmware upgrade mode, wait

No light No input power

6.6.2 RS-485 LEDs

The RS-485 (COM A and COM B) LEDs indicate the condition of the RS-485
communication.

Table: RS-485 LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Yellow, flashing (Tx) Transmit data

Green, flashing (Rx) Receive data

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

125
6 AS-P Servers
6.6 AS-P Server LEDs

6.6.3 Ethernet LEDs

The Ethernet (1 and 2) LEDs indicate the condition of the Ethernet
communication.

Table: Ethernet LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, flashing 10 Mbit communication

Yellow, flashing 100 Mbit communication

6.6.4 LON LEDs

The LON LEDs indicate the condition of the LonWorks RS-485 communication.

Table: LON LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Yellow, flashing (Tx) LON communication RS-485

Red, short flash (Mode) During start-up; otherwise for future use

NOTE: The AS-P server models AS-P-NL and AS-P-NLS do not have
LonWorks (LON) LEDs.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

126
7 Central IO Modules

Topics
Central IO Modules
Electronics Modules
Terminal Bases
Central IO Module LEDs
Override Switches and Potentiometers
Input Modules
DI-16 Central IO Module
UI-16 Central IO Module
RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module
Output Modules
DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO Modules
DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO Modules
AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO Modules
AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO Modules
Mixed Modules
UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules
UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules
UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules
 7 Central IO Modules
7.1 Central IO Modules

7.1 Central IO Modules

By adding a variety of Central IO and power supply modules, you can use the
AS-P server to tailor the Intelligent Building Management System to your unique
requirements.
Power and communications are delivered to the automation server and its family
of Central IO modules in a common bus, thus allowing them to be plugged
together without tools. This simple one-step process involves sliding the modules
together using their built-in connectors.
The available Central IO modules are designed to accommodate a fixed number
of inputs and outputs. For example, several Central IO modules, such as digital
inputs, only support a single electrical type. Other modules, such as digital inputs
mixed with digital outputs, support a combination of electrical types. The various
modules enable you to select the right combination of points necessary for your
project.
The Central IO modules are based on the patented two-piece design. Each
Central IO module consists of an electronics module and a terminal base.

Figure: Central IO module, DO-FC-8-H

7.1.1 Electronics Modules

The electronics module is the main component of SpaceLogic devices that are
based on the patented two-piece design. The electronics module is installed on a
terminal base, which constitutes the second component of the device.
For more information, see section 7.2 “Electronics Modules” on page 132.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

129
7 Central IO Modules
7.1 Central IO Modules

7.1.2 Terminal Bases

The terminal bases are used for SpaceLogic devices that are based on the
patented two-piece design. The terminal base provides the I/O bus to the
electronics module installed on the terminal base as well as to the SpaceLogic
device installed to the right (next terminal base in the chain).
For more information, see section 7.3 “Terminal Bases” on page 134.

7.1.3 Central IO Module LEDs

The Central IO modules have the following status indicator LEDs on the front of
the module:
• I/O Module Status LED
• I/O Channel Status LEDs
For more information, see section 7.4 “Central IO Module LEDs” on page 136.

7.1.4 Override Switches and Potentiometers

For Central IO modules with outputs, the following components on the front
provide control of the output channels:
• Override switches
• Potentiometers
For more information, see section 7.5 “Override Switches and Potentiometers” on
page 138.

7.1.5 External Device Connections

There are many different kinds of external devices from different vendors that can
be connected to an EcoStruxure BMS.
For more information, see section 31.12 “External Device Connections” on page
1155.

7.1.6 Grounding and Power

It is important to perform the grounding correctly for the following reasons:
• To design a system that is not harmed by detected minor connection errors.
• To design a system that works well and is resistant to EMI.
• To minimize the effects of ground currents that can cause unstable
measurements.
For more information, see section 31.3 “Grounding and Power” on page 1132.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

130
 7 Central IO Modules
7.1 Central IO Modules

7.1.7 Input Modules

Input modules support a single electrical type, such as digital or universal inputs.
The available input modules include the following:
• DI-16
• UI-16
• RTD-DI-16
For more information, see section 7.6 “Input Modules” on page 141.

7.1.8 Output Modules

Output modules support a number of electrical types, such as digital, tristate, and
pulsed digital outputs. The available output modules include the following:
• DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H
• DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H
• AO-8 and AO-8-H
• AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H
For more information, see section 7.10 “Output Modules” on page 166.

7.1.9 Mixed Modules

Mixed modules support a combination of electrical types, such as universal
inputs mixed with digital outputs. The available mixed modules include the
following:
• UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DOFC-4-H
• UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H
• UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H
For more information, see section 7.15 “Mixed Modules” on page 185.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

131
7 Central IO Modules
7.2 Electronics Modules

7.2 Electronics Modules

The electronics module is the main component of SpaceLogic devices that are
based on the patented two-piece design. The electronics module is installed on a
terminal base, which constitutes the second component of the device.
The electronics module has two handles, which have to be pulled out when
removing the module from or inserting the module to the terminal base. In their
inner position, the handles lock the module to the terminal base. This effectively
helps prevent unintentional separation. Two plastic label carriers can carry labels
that show field markings. Wiring connections are made at terminal blocks
contained on the terminal base. The terminal screws are accessible without
removing the module. Power for all devices is taken from the 24 VDC rails of the
backplane that is part of the terminal base.

Figure: General assembly

Number Device Parts

Electronics module

Terminal block

Terminal base

Ventilation slot

Label carrier

DIN rail

Backplane board with device label

LEDs

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

132
 7 Central IO Modules
7.2 Electronics Modules

Continued
Number Device Parts

Handle

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

133
7 Central IO Modules
7.3 Terminal Bases

7.3 Terminal Bases

The terminal bases are used for SpaceLogic devices that are based on the
patented two-piece design. The terminal base provides the I/O bus to the
electronics module installed on the terminal base as well as to the SpaceLogic
device installed to the right (next terminal base in the chain).
There are three different types of terminal bases for the SpaceLogic device
devices:
• PS-24V power supply: one terminal block
• AS-P servers: no terminal block
• Central IO module: two terminal blocks

Figure: Terminal base for Central IO module

The terminal bases for the AS-P servers and Central IO module have the same
backplane boards, which are connecting the power bus, the address bus, and
communication bus from the left bus connector to the right bus connector. A
common name for these buses is the I/O bus.

Figure: Internal configuration of the terminal bases for the AS-P servers and Central IO
module

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

134
 7 Central IO Modules
7.3 Terminal Bases

The terminal base for the PS-24V power supplies has a different backplane
board, which does not pass through the power bus input from the left connector.
The PS-24V power supply supplies power to the server and Central IO module
installed to the right. The ground connection is connected from the left bus
connector to the right bus connector in all terminal bases, because it is used as a
common signal ground for the address bus as well as the communication bus.

Figure: Internal configuration of the terminal base for the power supply

7.3.1 Backplane Board

A backplane board is mounted in the terminal base for the W1 width devices. The
backplane board is equipped with two 2x5-pin bus connectors, a 2x6-pin
electronics module connector, address logic circuitry, and a device label.
For more information, see section 4.2 “Backplane Board” on page 69.

7.3.2 Device Addressing

Each device can detect its order in the chain of connected devices and assigns
itself an address accordingly. This auto-addressing feature is provided by the
terminal base backplane.
For more information, see section 4.3 “Device Addressing” on page 73.

7.3.3 Device Installation

The devices are designed mainly for installing on DIN rails in a cabinet.
For more information, see section 4.4 “Device Installation” on page 75.

7.3.4 I/O Bus

The I/O bus is a common bus that delivers power, address information, and
communication to all devices connected to the bus. The I/O bus is provided to the
devices through the backplane in the terminal bases. The term I/O bus also
denotes the chain of devices that are connected together.
For more information, see section 4.12 “I/O Bus” on page 89.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

135
7 Central IO Modules
7.4 Central IO Module LEDs

7.4 Central IO Module LEDs

The Central IO modules have the following status indicator LEDs on the front of
the module:
• I/O Module Status LED
• I/O Channel Status LEDs

Figure: Central IO module LEDs

7.4.1 Central IO Module Status LED

Each Central IO module contains a green/red Status LED that indicates the
status of the module in relationship to the automation server. The LED is labeled
Status and is located on the lower right side of the Central IO module placard.
The Central IO module Status LED indicates the condition of the device.

Table: Central IO Module Status LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, constant Online and configured (at least one

channel/point downloaded successfully)

Green, flashing (200 ms ON, 200 ms OFF) Online and unconfigured (physical module
that either matches/mismatches logical
module)

Green, slow flashing (approximately every Low power mode (saves energy)
3 s)

Red, constant Error requiring attention (for example, the

input voltage is too low)

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

136
 7 Central IO Modules
7.4 Central IO Module LEDs

Continued
LED Patterns Condition

Red, flashing (100 ms ON, 100 ms OFF) Offline with respect to the automation
server (both configured and unconfigured
modules)

Red/Green, flashing (green 100 ms, red Bootloader mode (downloading data)
100 ms)

No light No input power

7.4.2 I/O Channel Status LEDs

Each digital input (DI) channel, digital output (DO) channel, and Universal Input
(UI) channel contains a green I/O channel status LED. This LED indicates the
On/Off state of the digital input or output.
You can also configure I/O channel status LEDs as an invert, so that either a
HIGH or LOW voltage level can turn the LED ON.
NOTE: For Universal Inputs, the I/O Channel Status LED is active only if the
channel is configured as a digital input or as a counter input.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

137
7 Central IO Modules
7.5 Override Switches and Potentiometers

7.5 Override Switches and Potentiometers

For Central IO modules with outputs, the following components on the front
provide control of the output channels:
• Override switches
• Potentiometers

Figure: Override switches and potentiometers

7.5.1 Override Switches

Central IO modules with analog or digital outputs are available with Hand-Off-
Auto (HOA) override switches on the front of the Central IO module. The switches
provide override control of the output channels. The analog and digital output
channels operate differently depending on the type of output:
• Analog outputs work in conjunction with the potentiometers to manually
adjust the voltage or current output by the channel.
• Digital outputs are used with Form A or Form C relays to open and close
relay contacts.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

138
 7 Central IO Modules
7.5 Override Switches and Potentiometers

Figure: Form A and Form C relays

The output of the channel can be directed from program control or manual
control. The output can be disabled as well.
The following table describes the actions associated with each position of the
analog override switch.

Table: Analog Override Switch

Switch Position Action

HAND Using the potentiometer, you can manually

adjust the voltage or current of the output.
Programs have no effect on the output
when the switch is in this position.

AUTO Programs control the output.

OFF The voltage or current is set to zero scale.

Programs have no effect on the output
when the switch is in this position.

The following table describes the actions associated with each position of the
digital override switch.

Table: Digital Override Switch

Switch Position Action

HAND The output relay is energized to an ON

state. Programs have no effect on the
output when the switch is in this position.

AUTO Programs control the output.

OFF The output relay is de-energized to an OFF

state. Programs have no effect on the
output when the switch is in this position.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

139
7 Central IO Modules
7.5 Override Switches and Potentiometers

7.5.2 Potentiometers
Each analog output channel contains a potentiometer that allows you to manually
adjust the voltage or current output by the channel. These potentiometers are
one-turn with a range of values from zero to full-scale.

Figure: Potentiometers

The potentiometers are used in conjunction with the override switches to

manually adjust the current or voltage output of the analog output channel.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

140
 7 Central IO Modules
7.6 Input Modules

7.6 Input Modules

Input modules support a single electrical type, such as digital or universal inputs.
The available input modules include the following:
• DI-16
• UI-16
• RTD-DI-16

7.6.1 DI-16 Central IO Module

The DI-16 Central IO module is a digital input, 16-channel I/O module. You can
use the DI-16 Central IO module for sensing of multiple dry digital inputs in
applications such as equipment status or alarm point monitoring.
The maximum counter frequency is 25 Hz on all sixteen inputs. This input type is
useful in metering applications.
The following input types are supported:
• Digital input
• Dry contact, Open Collector, or Open Drain
For more information, see section 7.7.2 “” on page 145.

7.6.2 UI-16 Central IO Module

The UI-16 Central IO module is a 16-channel universal input I/O module with
status indicators for each of the inputs. You can use this module for any mix of
temperature, pressure, flow, status points, and similar inputs in a control system
with a 0-10 V input range and a 12-bit A/D conversion. You can also make
adjustments for various sensor types using the available pull-up resistors.
The following input types are supported:
• Dry contact closing
• Voltage 0–10 V
• Current 0–20 mA
• Thermistor– 10k Type I (Continuum), 10k Type II (I/NET), 10k Type III
(Satchwell), 10k Linearized (Satchwell D?T), 10k Type IV (FD), and 10k
Type V (FD w/ 11k shunt)
• Thermistor– 1.8k (Xenta)
• Thermistor– 1k (Balco)
• Thermistor- 20k (Honeywell)
• Thermistor- 2.2k (Johnson Controls)
• Supervised
For more information, see section 7.8.2 “” on page 153.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

141
7 Central IO Modules
7.6 Input Modules

7.6.3 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module

A Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) is a sensing element that uses the
change in the resistance of a metal, such as platinum or nickel, to measure
temperature ranges from -50C to 150C. Due to their accuracy and repeatability,
RTDs are used in scientific and industrial applications to measure temperature
for kilns, gas turbine exhaust, diesel engines, and other industrial processes as
well as for room temperature measurement.
The RTD-DI-16 Central IO module is a 16-channel I/O module with 1 return per 2
inputs. It supports the following input types:
• RTD Temperature including:
– Pt100
– Pt1000
– Ni1000
– LG-Ni1000
– JCI-Ni1000
• RTD Resistance including:
– 100 ohms
– 1,000 ohms
• Resistance including 0 to 15,000 ohms
• Digital
• Counter
The RTD connection type is either a 2-wire or 3-wire configuration with a 3-wire
RTD using 2 inputs. For more information, see section 7.9.2 “” on page 162.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

142
 7 Central IO Modules
7.7 DI-16 Central IO Module

7.7 DI-16 Central IO Module

The DI-16 Central IO module is a digital input, 16-channel I/O module. Each
channel has a dedicated two-color (red and green) status LED that provides local
monitoring of digital and counter input types.
You can configure the channel status LED to display either red or green for each
input state. The front panel contains both the I/O channel and module status
LEDs.

Figure: DI-16 Central IO module

7.7.1 Inputs
The inputs of the DI-16 Central IO module are designed to read two different
types of inputs:
• Digital
• Counter

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

143
7 Central IO Modules
7.7 DI-16 Central IO Module

Figure: Internal configuration

Applied voltages beyond the absolute maximum ratings cause over current in the
protection component DZ.
The I/O bus in the terminal base provides the Central IO module with power and
an address.
The address value in the I/O bus is increased by one for each terminal base. The
I/O bus also enables RS-485 communication between the Central IO module and
the automation server.

Digital inputs
The external connection of a digital input is shown in the following figure:

Figure: Digital input external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

144
 7 Central IO Modules
7.7 DI-16 Central IO Module

Counter inputs
A counter input uses the same hardware configuration as the digital input that is
shown in the figure above.

7.7.2 Specifications
Input channels 16

DC input supply power 1.6 W

DC input supply voltage 24 VDC

Environment

Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

Ambient temperature, storage -20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Material

Plastic flame rating UL94-5VB

Enclosure PC/ABS

Ingress protection rating IP 20

Mechanical

Dimensions including terminal base 90 W x 114 H x 64 D mm (3.6 W x 4.5 H x 2.5 D in.)

Weight including terminal base 0.255 kg (0.56 lb)

Weight excluding terminal base 0.131 kg (0.29 lb)

Terminal base TB-IO-W1

Terminals

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

145
7 Central IO Modules
7.7 DI-16 Central IO Module

All inputs

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, 2.4 mA

Absolute maximum ratings -0.5 to +24 VDC

LED polarity Software selectable, if the LED is activated when the input is high or low

LED color Red or green, software selectable

Digital

Minimum pulse width 120 ms

Counter

Minimum pulse width 20 ms

Maximum frequency 25 Hz

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

146
 7 Central IO Modules
7.8 UI-16 Central IO Module

7.8 UI-16 Central IO Module

The UI-16 Central IO module is a universal input, 16-channel I/O module. Each
channel has a dedicated status two-color LED that provides local monitoring of
digital, counter, and supervised input types. The front panel shows the module
status LED and the I/O channel status LEDs.

Figure: UI-16 Central IO Module

7.8.1 Universal inputs

The universal inputs of the UI-16 Central IO module are designed to read several
different types of inputs.
Input types:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current
• Temperature
• Resistive

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

147
7 Central IO Modules
7.8 UI-16 Central IO Module

Figure: Universal input internal configuration

Applied voltages beyond the absolute maximum ratings will cause over current in
the protection component DZ.
The I/O bus in the terminal base provides the Central IO module with power and
an address.
The address value in the I/O bus is increased by one for each terminal base. The
I/O bus also enables RS-485 communication between the Central IO module and
the automation server.

Digital inputs
The external connection of a digital input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Digital input external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

148
 7 Central IO Modules
7.8 UI-16 Central IO Module

Counter inputs
A counter input uses the same hardware configuration as the digital input that is
shown in the figure above.

Supervised inputs
Supervised inputs are contact closing inputs supplemented with the supervision
of the field wiring integrity. This supervision is a required feature in many security
system applications. The supervised inputs provide the ability to detect specific
forms of tampering or trouble with the wire connections to the field contacts. The
supervision is achieved with a combination of 1 or 2 resistors attached to the
contact in the field. The resistor combination creates continuous current flow
through the field contact loop and presents a defined set of expected resistance
values for each of the defined conditions. If someone is attempting to defeat the
monitoring of the field contact by short circuiting the wire with a jumper or cutting
the wire, the objective is to detect and indicate such a condition. The resistors
need to be located at the end of the cable close to the field contact, so that the
point where there is a risk that the circuit is defeated is between the resistors and
the I/O.
Three different types of supervised input connections are supported:
• Series only
• Parallel only
• Series and parallel
Each type of supervised input connection provides a different capability in
regards to what form of tamper/trouble can be detected regardless of switch
contact open or closed condition.
Series only: A single resistor, which is connected in series with the switch, can
only detect tamper/trouble in the form of a short circuit across the wire pair. A
single series resistor supervision is frequently configured with a normally closed
field contact. This provides for the short circuit to be detected and a cut wire will
show as an alarm condition. The external connection of a series only supervised
input connection is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Series only external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RS = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

149
7 Central IO Modules
7.8 UI-16 Central IO Module

Parallel only: A single resistor, which is connected in parallel with the switch,
can only detect tamper/trouble in the form of an open circuit in the field wiring
loop. With single parallel resistor supervision and use of a normally open switch
in the field, the opened wiring shows as a fault and the shorted wiring shows as
an alarm condition. The external connection of a parallel only supervised input
connection is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Parallel only external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Series and parallel: Two resistors, where one is connected in series with the
switch and one is connected in parallel with the switch, can detect tamper/trouble
conditions in the form of both an open and a shorted circuit. The external
connection of a series and parallel supervised input connection is shown in the
following figure.

Figure: Series and parallel external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

150
 7 Central IO Modules
7.8 UI-16 Central IO Module

Voltage inputs
The external connection of a voltage input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Voltage input external connection

VG is the monitored external voltage (0 to 10 VDC).

RIN = 100 kohm

Current inputs
The external connection of a current input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Current input external connection

IG is the monitored external current (0 to 20 mA).

RSH = 47 ohm
In the internal configuration of the current input, there is a current limit circuit in
order to protect the shunt resistor from over load. The input current is limited to
40 mA with a serial connected FET transistor. If this limit is reached for 0.5
seconds, the transistor is turned off. When 5 seconds have elapsed, the
transistor is turned on again to make a new start attempt.

Temperature inputs
The external connection of a temperature input is shown in the following figure.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

151
7 Central IO Modules
7.8 UI-16 Central IO Module

Figure: Temperature input external connection

RT is the monitored external thermistor.

When a universal input is used as a temperature input, VS and RPU in the internal
configuration of the universal input are used according to the following table.
Thermistor type VS RPU

20 kohm 5V 10 kohm

10 kohm 5V 10 kohm

2.2 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

1.8 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

The resulting voltage across the thermistor is measured and a temperature is

calculated dependent on the selected thermistor type.

Resistive inputs
The external connection of a resistive input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Resistive input external connection

RM is the monitored external resistance.

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

152
 7 Central IO Modules
7.8 UI-16 Central IO Module

7.8.2 Specifications
Input channels 16

DC input supply power 1.8 W

DC input supply voltage 24 VDC

Environment

Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

Ambient temperature, storage -20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Material

Plastic flame rating UL94-5VB

Enclosure PC/ABS

Ingress protection rating IP 20

Mechanical

Dimensions including terminal base 90 W x 114 H x 64 D mm (3.6 W x 4.5 H x 2.5 D in.)

Weight including terminal base 0.269 kg (0.59 lb)

Weight excluding terminal base 0.146 kg (0.32 lb)

Terminal base TB-IO-W1

Universal inputs

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

153
7 Central IO Modules
7.8 UI-16 Central IO Module

Absolute maximum ratings -0.5 to +24 VDC

A/D converter resolution 12 bits

Digital

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, 2.4 mA

Minimum pulse width 120 ms

LED polarity Software selectable, if the LED is activated when the input is high or low

LED color Red or green, software selectable

Counter

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, 2.4 mA

Minimum pulse width 20 ms

Maximum frequency 25 Hz

LED polarity Software selectable, if the LED is activated when the input is high or low

LED color Red or green, software selectable

Supervised

5 V circuit, 1 or 2 resistors
Monitored switch combinations Series only, parallel only, and series and parallel

Resistor range 1 to 10 kohm

For a 2-resistor configuration, each resistor must have the same value +/- 5 %

Voltage

Range 0 to 10 VDC

Accuracy +/-(7 mV + 0.2 % of reading)

Resolution 2.7 mV

Impedance 100 kohm

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

154
 7 Central IO Modules
7.8 UI-16 Central IO Module

Reliability check Yes

Current

Range 0 to 20 mA

Accuracy +/-(0.03 mA + 0.4 % of reading)

Resolution 5.6 μA

Impedance 47 ohm

Reliability check Yes

Resistive

10 ohm to 10 kohm accuracy +/-(7 + 4 x 10-3 x R) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm

10 kohm to 60 kohm accuracy +/-(4 x 10-3 x R + 7 x 10-8 x R2) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm

Reliability check Yes

Temperature

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Reliability check Yes

Supported thermistors

Honeywell 20 kohm

Type I (Continuum) 10 kohm

Type II (I/NET) 10 kohm

Type III (Satchwell) 10 kohm

Type IV (FD) 10 kohm

Type V (FD w/ 11k shunt) Linearized 10 kohm

Satchwell D?T Linearized 10 kohm

Johnson Controls 2.2 kohm

Xenta 1.8 kohm

Balco 1 kohm

Measurement accuracy

20 kohm, 10 kohm, 2.2 kohm, and 1.8 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 50 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 122 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
50 to 100 °C: +/-0.5 °C (122 to 212 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-1.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-2.7 °F)

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

155
7 Central IO Modules
7.8 UI-16 Central IO Module

Linearized 10 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-3.0 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-5.4 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.8 °F)
0 to 50 °C: +/-0.3 °C (32 to 122 °F: +/-0.5 °F)
50 to 100 °C: +/-0.5 °C (122 to 212 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-2.0 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-3.6 °F)

1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-2.7 °F)

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

156
 7 Central IO Modules
7.9 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module

7.9 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module

The RTD-DI-16 module is an RTD temperature, RTD resistance, digital, counter,
or resistance input, 16-channel I/O module. Each channel has a dedicated two-
color (red and green) status LED.
You can configure the channel status LED to display either red or green for each
input state. The front panel contains both the I/O channel and module status
LEDs.

Figure: RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module

7.9.1 Inputs
The inputs of the RTD-DI-16 Central IO module are designed to read seven
different types of inputs:
• 2-wire RTD temperature
• 3-wire RTD temperature
• 2-wire RTD resistive
• 3-wire RTD resistive
• Digital
• Counter
• Resistive

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

157
7 Central IO Modules
7.9 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module

Figure: Internal configuration

Applied voltages beyond the absolute maximum ratings cause over current in the
protection component DZ.
In a 2-wire configuration, the leads are connected to IN and RET or RET and
IN/3W. This provides up to 16 inputs for 2-wire configurations.
In a 3-wire configuration, the leads are connected to IN, RET, and IN/3W. This
provides up to 8 inputs for 3-wire configurations.
The I/O bus in the terminal base provides the Central IO module with power and
an address.
The address value in the I/O bus is increased by one for each terminal base. The
I/O bus also enables RS-485 communication between the Central IO module and
the automation server.

2-wire RTD temperature inputs

The external connection of a 2-wire RTD temperature input is shown in the
following figure.

Figure: 2-wire temperature input external connection

RT is the monitored external RTD.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

158
 7 Central IO Modules
7.9 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module

RW is the wiring resistance.

In the internal configuration of the RTD temperature input, IS is used according to
the following table.
RTD type IS

Pt100 1.5 mA

Pt1000 750 µA

Ni1000 750 µA

LG-Ni1000 750 µA

JCI-Ni1000 750 µA

The current source nominal duty cycle is 5 %. The current to the RTD is pulsed to
minimize self-heating.
When an input is used as a 2-wire RTD temperature input, you need to specify
the wiring resistance in the software.
The input is measuring the total resulting voltage and the voltage across the RTD
is calculated. The voltage across the RTD is then converted to a raw resistance
value.

3-wire RTD temperature inputs

The external connection of a 3-wire RTD temperature input is shown in the
following figure.

Figure: 3-wire temperature input external connection

RT is the monitored external RTD.

RW is the wiring resistance.
In the internal configuration of the RTD temperature input, IS is used according to
the following table.
RTD type IS

Pt100 1.5 mA

Pt1000 750 µA

Ni1000 750 µA

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

159
7 Central IO Modules
7.9 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module

Continued
RTD type IS

LG-Ni1000 750 µA

JCI-Ni1000 750 µA

The current source nominal duty cycle is 5 %. The current to the RTD is pulsed to
minimize self-heating.
When an input is used as a 3-wire RTD temperature input, the Central IO module
automatically compensates for the wiring resistance using the third wire.
The input is measuring the total resulting voltage and the voltage across the RTD
is calculated. The voltage across the RTD is then converted to a raw resistance
value.

2-wire RTD resistive inputs

The external connection of a 2-wire RTD resistive input is shown in the following
figure.

Figure: 2-wire RTD resistive input external connection

RT is the monitored external resistance.

RW is the wiring resistance.
In the internal configuration of the RTD resistive input, IS is used according to the
following table.
RTD type IS

100 ohm 1.5 mA

1,000 ohm 750 µA

The current source nominal duty cycle is 5 %. The current to the RTD is pulsed to
minimize self-heating.
The input is measuring the total resulting voltage and the voltage across the RTD
is calculated. The voltage across the RTD is then converted to a raw resistance
value.
The RTD resistive input type is used to measure the resistance of an RTD other
than the supported types. The resistance to temperature conversion must be

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

160
 7 Central IO Modules
7.9 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module

performed in a function block or script program in the automation server. The

resistance to temperature conversion must take into account the wiring
resistance.

3-wire RTD resistive inputs

The external connection of a 3-wire RTD resistive input is shown in the following
figure.

Figure: 3-wire RTD resistive input external connection

RT is the monitored external resistance.

RW is the wiring resistance.
In the internal configuration of the RTD resistive input, IS is used according to the
following table.
RTD type IS

100 ohm 1.5 mA

1,000 ohm 750 µA

The current source nominal duty cycle is 5 %. The current to the RTD is pulsed to
minimize self-heating.
When an input is used as a 3-wire RTD resistive input, the Central IO module
automatically compensates for the wiring resistance using the third wire.
The input is measuring the total resulting voltage and the voltage across the RTD
is calculated. The voltage across the RTD is then converted to a raw resistance
value.
The RTD resistive input type is used to measure the resistance of an RTD other
than the supported types. The resistance to temperature conversion must be
performed in a function block or script program in the automation server.

Digital inputs
The external connection of a digital input is shown in the following figure.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

161
7 Central IO Modules
7.9 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module

Figure: Digital input external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10.1 kohm

Counter inputs
A counter input utilizes the same hardware configuration as the digital input as
shown in the figure above.

Resistive inputs
The external connection of a resistive input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Resistive input external connection

RT is the monitored external resistance.

IS = 100 µA

7.9.2 Specifications
Input channels 16
3-wire RTDs require 2 inputs

DC input supply power 1.6 W

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

162
 7 Central IO Modules
7.9 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module

DC input supply voltage 24 VDC

Environment

Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

Ambient temperature, storage -20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Material

Plastic flame rating UL94-5VB

Enclosure PC/ABS

Ingress protection rating IP 20

Mechanical

Dimensions including terminal base 90 W x 114 H x 64 D mm (3.6 W x 4.5 H x 2.5 D in.)

Weight including terminal base 0.269 kg (0.59 lb)

Weight excluding terminal base 0.146 kg (0.32 lb)

Terminal base TB-IO-W1

Universal inputs

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

163
7 Central IO Modules
7.9 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module

Absolute maximum ratings -0.5 to +24 VDC

RTD temperature

Reliability check Yes

Supported RTDs Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000, LG-Ni1000, and JCI-Ni1000

Pt100

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Measurement accuracy +/-0.3 °C (+/-0.54 °F)

Resolution 0.03 °C (0.05°F)

Pt1000

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Measurement accuracy +/-0.2 °C (+/-0.36 °F)

Resolution 0.03 °C (0.05 °F)

Ni1000

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Measurement accuracy +/-0.1 °C (+/-0.18 °F)

Resolution 0.03 °C (0.05 °F)

LG-Ni1000

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Measurement accuracy +/-0.1 °C (+/-0.18 °F)

Resolution 0.03 °C (0.05 °F)

JCI-Ni1000

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Measurement accuracy +/- 0.1 °C (+/- 0.18 °F)

Resolution 0.03 °C (0.05 °F)

RTD temperature wiring

Maximum wire resistance 20 ohm/wire (40 ohm total)

Maximum wire capacitance 60 nF

The wire resistance and capacitance typically corresponds to a 200 m wire.

RTD resistive

Reliability check Yes

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

164
 7 Central IO Modules
7.9 RTD-DI-16 Central IO Module

100 ohm

Range 50 to 220 ohm

Including wiring resistance

Measurement accuracy +/-(0.08 + 2 x 10-4 x R) ohm

R = resistance in ohm

Resolution 0.01 ohm

1,000 ohm

Range 500 to 2,200 ohm

Including wiring resistance

Measurement accuracy +/-(0.3 + 2 x 10-4 x R) ohm

R = resistance in ohm

Resolution 0.1 ohm

RTD resistive wiring

Maximum wire capacitance 60 nF

Digital

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, 2.4 mA

Minimum pulse width 120 ms

LED polarity Software selectable, if the LED is activated when the input is high or low

LED color Red or green, software selectable

Counter

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, 2.4 mA

Minimum pulse width 20 ms

Maximum frequency 25 Hz

LED polarity Software selectable, if the LED is activated when the input is high or low

LED color Red or green, software selectable

Resistive

Range 0 to 15,000 ohm

Accuracy +/-(3 + 6 x 10-4 x R) ohm

R = resistance in ohm

Resolution 1 ohm

Reliability check Yes

Maximum wire capacitance 60 nF

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

165
7 Central IO Modules
7.10 Output Modules

7.10 Output Modules

Output modules support a number of electrical types, such as digital, tristate, and
pulsed digital outputs. The available output modules include the following:
• DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H
• DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H
• AO-8 and AO-8-H
• AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H
NOTE: Module names with an -H indicate the presence of Hand-Off-Auto
override switches.

7.10.1 DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO

Modules
The DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO modules are digital output, Form A
relay, 12-channel I/O modules.
The supported output types include the following:
• Digital Form A
• Tristate
The Form-A relays in the DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H modules are designed for
direct load applications for up to 2 A loads. For more information, see section
7.11.2 “” on page 169.

7.10.2 DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO

Modules
The DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO modules are digital output, Form C
relay, 8-channel I/O modules.
The supported output types include the following:
• Digital Form C
• Tristate
The Form-C relays in the DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H modules are designed for
direct load applications for up to 3 A loads. For more information, see section
7.12.2 “” on page 173.

7.10.3 AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO Modules

The AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO modules are analog output, 8-channel I/O
modules. Each channel contains both voltage and current outputs.
The following output types are supported:
• Voltage 0–10 VDC

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

166
 7 Central IO Modules
7.10 Output Modules

• Current 0–20 mA
Since the AO-8 and AO-8-H modules control 0-10 VDC outputs, the modules
support a wide range of devices, such as valves and actuators. You can use the
AO-8 and AO-8-H modules to drive 0-20 mA currents on any of its eight
channels. For more information, see section 7.13.2 “” on page 178.

7.10.4 AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO Modules

The AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO modules are analog output, 8-channel I/O
modules that contain only voltage outputs.
The supported output type is Voltage 0–10 VDC, so the AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H
modules support a wide range of devices, such as valves and actuators. For
more information, see section 7.14.2 “” on page 182.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

167
7 Central IO Modules
7.11 DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO Modules

7.11 DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO

Modules
The DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO modules are 12-channel, Form A
relay, digital output I/O modules.
NOTE: Module names with an -H indicate the presence of Hand-Off-Auto
override switches.
The front panel includes a dedicated two-color status LED that provides local
monitoring of the digital outputs. You can configure the LED to display either red
or green for each output state.

Figure: DO-FA-12-H Central IO module

7.11.1 Digital outputs

The Form A digital outputs of the DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO
modules are normally open contacts with one common terminal (C) and one
normally open terminal (NO). The terminals are isolated from signal ground.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

168
 7 Central IO Modules
7.11 DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO Modules

Figure: Form A digital output internal configuration

The I/O bus in the terminal base provides the Central IO module with power and
an address.
The address value in the I/O bus is increased by one for each terminal base. The
I/O bus also enables RS-485 communication between the Central IO module and
the automation server.

7.11.2 Specifications
Output channels 12

DC input supply power 1.8 W

DC input supply voltage 24 VDC

Environment

Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

Ambient temperature, storage -20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Material

Plastic flame rating UL94-5VB

Enclosure PC/ABS

Ingress protection rating IP 20

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

169
7 Central IO Modules
7.11 DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO Modules

Mechanical

Dimensions including terminal base 90 W x 114 H x 64 D mm (3.6 W x 4.5 H x 2.5 D in.)

Weight including terminal base 0.317 kg (0.70 lb)

Weight excluding terminal base 0.194 kg (0.43 lb)

Terminal base TB-IO-W1

Digital outputs

Contact rating 250 VAC/30 VDC, 2 A, Pilot Duty (Power Factor 0.35)

Switch type Form A Relay

Single Pole Single Throw
Normally Open

Isolation contact to system ground 3000 VAC

Cycle life (Resistive load) At least 100,000 cycles

Minimum pulse width 100 ms

LED polarity energized relay On

LED polarity non-energized relay Off

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

170
 7 Central IO Modules
7.11 DO-FA-12 and DO-FA-12-H Central IO Modules

LED color Green

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

171
7 Central IO Modules
7.12 DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO Modules

7.12 DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO

Modules
The DO-FC-8 and and DO-FC-8-H Central IO modules are digital output, Form C
relay, 8-channel I/O modules.
NOTE: Module names with an -H indicate the presence of Hand-Off-Auto
override switches.
The front panel includes dedicated two-color (red and green) status LEDs for
local monitoring of digital outputs. You can configure these LEDs to display either
red or green for each output state.

Figure: DO-FC-8-H Central IO module

7.12.1 Digital outputs

The Form C digital outputs of the DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO modules
are switching contacts with one common terminal (C), one normally open
terminal (NO), and one normally closed terminal (NC). The terminals are isolated
from signal ground.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

172
 7 Central IO Modules
7.12 DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO Modules

Figure: Form C digital output internal configuration

The I/O bus in the terminal base provides the Central IO module with power and
an address.
The address value in the I/O bus is increased by one for each terminal base. The
I/O bus also enables RS-485 communication between the Central IO module and
the automation server.

7.12.2 Specifications
Output channels 8

DC input supply power 2.2 W

DC input supply voltage 24 VDC

Environment

Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

Ambient temperature, storage -20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Material

Plastic flame rating UL94-5VB

Enclosure PC/ABS

Ingress protection rating IP 20

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

173
7 Central IO Modules
7.12 DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO Modules

Mechanical

Dimensions including terminal base 90 W x 114 H x 64 D mm (3.6 W x 4.5 H x 2.5 D in.)

Weight including terminal base 0.332 kg (0.73 lb)

Weight excluding terminal base 0.209 kg (0.46 lb)

Terminal base TB-IO-W1

Digital outputs

Contact rating 250 VAC/30 VDC, 3 A, Pilot Duty (Power Factor 0.35)

Switch type Form C Relay

Single Pole Double Throw
Normally Open or Normally Closed

Isolation contact to system ground 5000 VAC

Cycle life (Resistive load) At least 100,000 cycles

Minimum pulse width 100 ms

LED polarity energized relay On

LED polarity non-energized relay Off

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

174
 7 Central IO Modules
7.12 DO-FC-8 and DO-FC-8-H Central IO Modules

LED color Green

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

175
7 Central IO Modules
7.13 AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO Modules

7.13 AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO Modules

The AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO modules are analog output, 8-channel I/O
modules.
NOTE: Module names with an -H indicate the presence of Hand-Off-Auto
override switches.
The front panel shows the module status LED, override switches, and adjustable
potentiometers.

Figure: AO-8-H Central IO module

7.13.1 Analog outputs

The analog outputs of the AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO modules are designed to
be used for voltage or current outputs.
The I/O bus in the terminal base provides the Central IO module with power and
an address.
The address value in the I/O bus is increased by one for each terminal base. The
I/O bus also enables RS-485 communication between the Central IO module and
the automation server.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

176
 7 Central IO Modules
7.13 AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO Modules

Voltage outputs

Figure: Voltage output internal configuration and connection of external resistive load

ROUT is approximately equal to 10 ohm.

VOUT range is 0 to 10 VDC.
RLOAD minimum is 5 kohm.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

177
7 Central IO Modules
7.13 AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO Modules

Current outputs

Figure: Current output internal configuration and connection of external resistive load

IOUT range is 0 to 20 mA.

RLOAD maximum is 650 ohm.

7.13.2 Specifications
Output channels 8

DC input supply power 4.9 W

DC input supply voltage 24 VDC

Environment

Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

Ambient temperature, storage -20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Material

Plastic flame rating UL94-5VB

Enclosure PC/ABS

Ingress protection rating IP 20

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

178
 7 Central IO Modules
7.13 AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO Modules

Mechanical

Dimensions including terminal base 90 W x 114 H x 64 D mm (3.6 W x 4.5 H x 2.5 D in.)

Weight including terminal base 0.282 kg (0.62 lb)

Weight excluding terminal base 0.159 kg (0.35 lb)

Terminal base TB-IO-W1

Analog outputs, AO

Voltage

Range 0 to 10 VDC

Accuracy +/-100 mV

Resolution 42 mV

Minimum load resistance 5 kohm

Load range -1 to +2 mA

Reliability check Yes

Terminals Voltage Output (VO), Return (RET)

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

179
7 Central IO Modules
7.13 AO-8 and AO-8-H Central IO Modules

Current

Range 0 to 20 mA

Accuracy +/-0.2 mA

Resolution 0.1 mA

Load range 0 to 650 ohm

Reliability check Yes

Terminals Current Output (CO), Return (RET)

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

180
 7 Central IO Modules
7.14 AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO Modules

7.14 AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO

Modules
The AO-V-8 and and AO-V-8-H Central IO modules are analog output, 8-channel
I/O modules.
NOTE: Module names with an -H indicate the presence of Hand-Off-Auto
override switches.
The front panel shows the module status LED, override switches, and adjustable
potentiometers.

Figure: AO-V-8-H Central IO Module

7.14.1 Analog outputs

The analog outputs of the AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO modules are
designed to be used for voltage outputs.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

181
7 Central IO Modules
7.14 AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO Modules

Figure: Voltage output internal configuration and connection of external resistive load

ROUT is approximately equal to 10 ohm.

VOUT range is 0 to 10 VDC.
RLOAD minimum is 5 kohm.
The I/O bus in the terminal base provides the Central IO module with power and
an address.
The address value in the I/O bus is increased by one for each terminal base. The
I/O bus also enables RS-485 communication between the Central IO module and
the automation server.

7.14.2 Specifications
Output channels 8

DC input supply power 0.7 W

DC input supply voltage 24 VDC

Environment

Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

Ambient temperature, storage -20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

182
 7 Central IO Modules
7.14 AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO Modules

Material

Plastic flame rating UL94-5VB

Enclosure PC/ABS

Ingress protection rating IP 20

Mechanical

Dimensions including terminal base 90 W x 114 H x 64 D mm (3.6 W x 4.5 H x 2.5 D in.)

Weight including terminal base 0.279 kg (0.61 lb)

Weight excluding terminal base 0.156 kg (0.34 lb)

Terminal base TB-IO-W1

Analog outputs, AO

Voltage

Range 0 to 10 VDC

Accuracy +/-100 mV

Resolution 42 mV

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

183
7 Central IO Modules
7.14 AO-V-8 and AO-V-8-H Central IO Modules

Minimum load resistance 5 kohm

Load range -1 to +2 mA

Reliability check Yes

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

184
 7 Central IO Modules
7.15 Mixed Modules

7.15 Mixed Modules

Mixed modules support a combination of electrical types, such as universal
inputs mixed with digital outputs. The available mixed modules include the
following:
• UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DOFC-4-H
• UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H
• UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H
NOTE: Module names with an -H indicate the presence of Hand-Off-Auto
override switches.

7.15.1 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central

IO Modules
The UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO modules combine 8 universal
inputs and 4 digital Form C relay outputs. You can use these modules when an
application requires only a few points of each type.
The following input types are supported:
• Dry contact closing
• Voltage 0–10 VDC
• Current 0–20 mA
• Thermistor – 10k Type 1 (Continuum), 10k Type II (I/NET), 10k Type III
(Satchwell), 10k Linearized (Satchwell D?T), 10k Type IV (FD), and 10k
Type V (FD w/11k shunt)
• Thermistor – 1.8k (Xenta)
• Thermistor – 1k (Balco)
• Thermistor – 20k (Honeywell)
• Thermistor – 2.2k (Johnson Controls)
• Supervised
• Counter inputs
The following output types are supported:
• Digital Form C
• Tristate
The Form-C relays in the UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H modules are
designed for direct load applications for up to 3 A loads. For more information,
see section 7.16.3 “” on page 193.

7.15.2 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO

Modules
The UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO modules are combination I/O
modules, consisting of 8 universal input channels and 4 analog output channels.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

185
7 Central IO Modules
7.15 Mixed Modules

You can use these modules when an application requires only a few points of
each type.
The following input types are supported:
• Dry contact closing
• Voltage 0–10 VDC
• Current 0–20 mA
• Thermistor – 10k Type 1 (Continuum), 10k Type II (I/NET), 10k Type III
(Satchwell), 10k Linearized (Satchwell D?T), 10k Type IV (FD), and 10k
Type V (FD w/11k shunt)
• Thermistor – 1.8k (Xenta)
• Thermistor – 1k (Balco)
• Thermistor – 20k (Honeywell)
• Thermistor – 2.2k (Johnson Controls)
• Supervised
• Counter inputs
The following output types are supported:
• Voltage 0–10 VDC
• Current 0–20 mA
For more information, see section 7.17.3 “” on page 205.

7.15.3 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO

Modules
The UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO modules are combined input and
output I/O modules that support 8 universal input channels and 4 analog output
channels.
The following input types are supported:
• Dry contact closing
• Voltage 0–10 VDC
• Current 0–20 mA
• Thermistor – 10k Type 1 (Continuum), 10k Type II (I/NET), 10k Type III
(Satchwell), 10k Linearized (Satchwell D?T), 10k Type IV (FD), and 10k
Type V (FD w/11k shunt)
• Thermistor – 1.8k (Xenta)
• Thermistor – 1k (Balco)
• Thermistor – 20k (Honeywell)
• Thermistor – 2.2k (Johnson Controls)
• Supervised
• Counter inputs
The supported output type is Voltage 0–10 VDC. For more information, see
section 7.18.3 “” on page 216.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

186
 7 Central IO Modules
7.16 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules

7.16 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H

Central IO Modules
The UI-8/DO-FC-4 and and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO modules combine 8
universal inputs and 4 digital Form C relay outputs.
NOTE: Module names with an -H indicate the presence of Hand-Off-Auto
override switches.
The front panel includes a dedicated two-color (red and green) status LED for
local monitoring of digital inputs and outputs. You can configure the LED to
display either red or green for each input or output state.

Figure: UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Module

7.16.1 Universal inputs

The universal inputs of the UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO
modules are designed to read several different types of inputs.
Input types:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current
• Temperature
• Resistive

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

187
7 Central IO Modules
7.16 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules

Figure: Universal input internal configuration

Applied voltages beyond the absolute maximum ratings will cause over current in
the protection component DZ.
The I/O bus in the terminal base provides the Central IO module with power and
an address.
The address value in the I/O bus is increased by one for each terminal base. The
I/O bus also enables RS-485 communication between the Central IO module and
the automation server.

Digital inputs
The external connection of a digital input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Digital input external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

188
 7 Central IO Modules
7.16 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules

Counter inputs
A counter input uses the same hardware configuration as the digital input that is
shown in the figure above.

Supervised inputs
Supervised inputs are contact closing inputs supplemented with the supervision
of the field wiring integrity. This supervision is a required feature in many security
system applications. The supervised inputs provide the ability to detect specific
forms of tampering or trouble with the wire connections to the field contacts. The
supervision is achieved with a combination of 1 or 2 resistors attached to the
contact in the field. The resistor combination creates continuous current flow
through the field contact loop and presents a defined set of expected resistance
values for each of the defined conditions. If someone is attempting to defeat the
monitoring of the field contact by short circuiting the wire with a jumper or cutting
the wire, the objective is to detect and indicate such a condition. The resistors
need to be located at the end of the cable close to the field contact, so that the
point where there is a risk that the circuit is defeated is between the resistors and
the I/O.
Three different types of supervised input connections are supported:
• Series only
• Parallel only
• Series and parallel
Each type of supervised input connection provides a different capability in
regards to what form of tamper/trouble can be detected regardless of switch
contact open or closed condition.
Series only: A single resistor, which is connected in series with the switch, can
only detect tamper/trouble in the form of a short circuit across the wire pair. A
single series resistor supervision is frequently configured with a normally closed
field contact. This provides for the short circuit to be detected and a cut wire will
show as an alarm condition. The external connection of a series only supervised
input connection is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Series only external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RS = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

189
7 Central IO Modules
7.16 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules

Parallel only: A single resistor, which is connected in parallel with the switch,
can only detect tamper/trouble in the form of an open circuit in the field wiring
loop. With single parallel resistor supervision and use of a normally open switch
in the field, the opened wiring shows as a fault and the shorted wiring shows as
an alarm condition. The external connection of a parallel only supervised input
connection is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Parallel only external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Series and parallel: Two resistors, where one is connected in series with the
switch and one is connected in parallel with the switch, can detect tamper/trouble
conditions in the form of both an open and a shorted circuit. The external
connection of a series and parallel supervised input connection is shown in the
following figure.

Figure: Series and parallel external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

190
 7 Central IO Modules
7.16 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules

Voltage inputs
The external connection of a voltage input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Voltage input external connection

VG is the monitored external voltage (0 to 10 VDC).

RIN = 100 kohm

Current inputs
The external connection of a current input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Current input external connection

IG is the monitored external current (0 to 20 mA).

RSH = 47 ohm
In the internal configuration of the current input, there is a current limit circuit in
order to protect the shunt resistor from over load. The input current is limited to
40 mA with a serial connected FET transistor. If this limit is reached for 0.5
seconds, the transistor is turned off. When 5 seconds have elapsed, the
transistor is turned on again to make a new start attempt.

Temperature inputs
The external connection of a temperature input is shown in the following figure.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

191
7 Central IO Modules
7.16 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules

Figure: Temperature input external connection

RT is the monitored external thermistor.

When a universal input is used as a temperature input, VS and RPU in the internal
configuration of the universal input are used according to the following table.
Thermistor type VS RPU

20 kohm 5V 10 kohm

10 kohm 5V 10 kohm

2.2 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

1.8 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

The resulting voltage across the thermistor is measured and a temperature is

calculated dependent on the selected thermistor type.

Resistive inputs
The external connection of a resistive input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Resistive input external connection

RM is the monitored external resistance.

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

192
 7 Central IO Modules
7.16 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules

7.16.2 Digital outputs

The Form C digital outputs of the UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO
modules are switching contacts with one common terminal (C), one normally
open terminal (NO), and one normally closed terminal (NC). The terminals are
isolated from signal ground.

Figure: Form C digital output internal configuration

The I/O bus in the terminal base provides the Central IO module with power and
an address.
The address value in the I/O bus is increased by one for each terminal base. The
I/O bus also enables RS-485 communication between the Central IO module and
the automation server.

7.16.3 Specifications
Input channels 8

Output channels 4

DC input supply power 1.9 W

DC input supply voltage 24 VDC

Environment

Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

Ambient temperature, storage -20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

193
7 Central IO Modules
7.16 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules

Material

Plastic flame rating UL94-5VB

Enclosure PC/ABS

Ingress protection rating IP 20

Mechanical

Dimensions including terminal base 90 W x 114 H x 64 D mm (3.6 W x 4.5 H x 2.5 D in.)

Weight including terminal base 0.304 kg (0.67 lb)

Weight excluding terminal base 0.181 kg (0.40 lb)

Terminal base TB-IO-W1

Universal inputs

Absolute maximum ratings -0.5 to +24 VDC

A/D converter resolution 12 bits

Digital

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, 2.4 mA

Minimum pulse width 120 ms

LED polarity Software selectable, if the LED is activated when the input is high or low

LED color Red or green, software selectable

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

194
 7 Central IO Modules
7.16 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules

Counter

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, 2.4 mA

Minimum pulse width 20 ms

Maximum frequency 25 Hz

LED polarity Software selectable, if the LED is activated when the input is high or low

LED color Red or green, software selectable

Supervised

5 V circuit, 1 or 2 resistors
Monitored switch combinations Series only, parallel only, and series and parallel

Resistor range 1 to 10 kohm

For a 2-resistor configuration, each resistor must have the same value +/- 5 %

Voltage

Range 0 to 10 VDC

Accuracy +/-(7 mV + 0.2 % of reading)

Resolution 2.7 mV

Impedance 100 kohm

Reliability check Yes

Current

Range 0 to 20 mA

Accuracy +/-(0.03 mA + 0.4 % of reading)

Resolution 5.6 μA

Impedance 47 ohm

Reliability check Yes

Resistive

10 ohm to 10 kohm accuracy +/-(7 + 4 x 10-3 x R) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm

10 kohm to 60 kohm accuracy +/-(4 x 10-3 x R + 7 x 10-8 x R2) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm

Reliability check Yes

Temperature

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Reliability check Yes

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

195
7 Central IO Modules
7.16 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules

Supported thermistors

Honeywell 20 kohm

Type I (Continuum) 10 kohm

Type II (I/NET) 10 kohm

Type III (Satchwell) 10 kohm

Type IV (FD) 10 kohm

Type V (FD w/ 11k shunt) Linearized 10 kohm

Satchwell D?T Linearized 10 kohm

Johnson Controls 2.2 kohm

Xenta 1.8 kohm

Balco 1 kohm

Measurement accuracy

20 kohm, 10 kohm, 2.2 kohm, and 1.8 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 50 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 122 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
50 to 100 °C: +/-0.5 °C (122 to 212 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-1.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-2.7 °F)

Linearized 10 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-3.0 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-5.4 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.8 °F)
0 to 50 °C: +/-0.3 °C (32 to 122 °F: +/-0.5 °F)
50 to 100 °C: +/-0.5 °C (122 to 212 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-2.0 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-3.6 °F)

1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-2.7 °F)

Digital outputs

Contact rating 250 VAC/30 VDC, 3 A, Pilot Duty (Power Factor 0.35)

Switch type Form C Relay

Single Pole Double Throw
Normally Open or Normally Closed

Isolation contact to system ground 5000 VAC

Cycle life (Resistive load) At least 100,000 cycles

Minimum pulse width 100 ms

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

196
 7 Central IO Modules
7.16 UI-8/DO-FC-4 and UI-8/DO-FC-4-H Central IO Modules

LED polarity energized relay On

LED polarity non-energized relay Off

LED color Green

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

197
7 Central IO Modules
7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules

7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO

Modules
The UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO modules combine 8 universal inputs
and 4 analog outputs.
NOTE: Module names with an -H indicate the presence of Hand-Off-Auto
override switches.
The front panel includes a dedicated two-color (red and green) status LED for
local monitoring of contact, counter, and supervised input types. You can
configure the LED to display either red or green for each input or output state.

Figure: UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Module

7.17.1 Universal inputs

The universal inputs of the UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO modules are
designed to read several different types of inputs.
Input types:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current
• Temperature
• Resistive

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

198
 7 Central IO Modules
7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules

Figure: Universal input internal configuration

Applied voltages beyond the absolute maximum ratings will cause over current in
the protection component DZ.
The I/O bus in the terminal base provides the Central IO module with power and
an address.
The address value in the I/O bus is increased by one for each terminal base. The
I/O bus also enables RS-485 communication between the Central IO module and
the automation server.

Digital inputs
The external connection of a digital input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Digital input external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

199
7 Central IO Modules
7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules

Counter inputs
A counter input uses the same hardware configuration as the digital input that is
shown in the figure above.

Supervised inputs
Supervised inputs are contact closing inputs supplemented with the supervision
of the field wiring integrity. This supervision is a required feature in many security
system applications. The supervised inputs provide the ability to detect specific
forms of tampering or trouble with the wire connections to the field contacts. The
supervision is achieved with a combination of 1 or 2 resistors attached to the
contact in the field. The resistor combination creates continuous current flow
through the field contact loop and presents a defined set of expected resistance
values for each of the defined conditions. If someone is attempting to defeat the
monitoring of the field contact by short circuiting the wire with a jumper or cutting
the wire, the objective is to detect and indicate such a condition. The resistors
need to be located at the end of the cable close to the field contact, so that the
point where there is a risk that the circuit is defeated is between the resistors and
the I/O.
Three different types of supervised input connections are supported:
• Series only
• Parallel only
• Series and parallel
Each type of supervised input connection provides a different capability in
regards to what form of tamper/trouble can be detected regardless of switch
contact open or closed condition.
Series only: A single resistor, which is connected in series with the switch, can
only detect tamper/trouble in the form of a short circuit across the wire pair. A
single series resistor supervision is frequently configured with a normally closed
field contact. This provides for the short circuit to be detected and a cut wire will
show as an alarm condition. The external connection of a series only supervised
input connection is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Series only external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RS = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

200
 7 Central IO Modules
7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules

Parallel only: A single resistor, which is connected in parallel with the switch,
can only detect tamper/trouble in the form of an open circuit in the field wiring
loop. With single parallel resistor supervision and use of a normally open switch
in the field, the opened wiring shows as a fault and the shorted wiring shows as
an alarm condition. The external connection of a parallel only supervised input
connection is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Parallel only external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Series and parallel: Two resistors, where one is connected in series with the
switch and one is connected in parallel with the switch, can detect tamper/trouble
conditions in the form of both an open and a shorted circuit. The external
connection of a series and parallel supervised input connection is shown in the
following figure.

Figure: Series and parallel external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

201
7 Central IO Modules
7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules

Voltage inputs
The external connection of a voltage input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Voltage input external connection

VG is the monitored external voltage (0 to 10 VDC).

RIN = 100 kohm

Current inputs
The external connection of a current input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Current input external connection

IG is the monitored external current (0 to 20 mA).

RSH = 47 ohm
In the internal configuration of the current input, there is a current limit circuit in
order to protect the shunt resistor from over load. The input current is limited to
40 mA with a serial connected FET transistor. If this limit is reached for 0.5
seconds, the transistor is turned off. When 5 seconds have elapsed, the
transistor is turned on again to make a new start attempt.

Temperature inputs
The external connection of a temperature input is shown in the following figure.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

202
 7 Central IO Modules
7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules

Figure: Temperature input external connection

RT is the monitored external thermistor.

When a universal input is used as a temperature input, VS and RPU in the internal
configuration of the universal input are used according to the following table.
Thermistor type VS RPU

20 kohm 5V 10 kohm

10 kohm 5V 10 kohm

2.2 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

1.8 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

The resulting voltage across the thermistor is measured and a temperature is

calculated dependent on the selected thermistor type.

Resistive inputs
The external connection of a resistive input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Resistive input external connection

RM is the monitored external resistance.

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

203
7 Central IO Modules
7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules

7.17.2 Analog outputs

The analog outputs of the UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO modules are
designed to be used for voltage or current outputs.
The I/O bus in the terminal base provides the Central IO module with power and
an address.
The address value in the I/O bus is increased by one for each terminal base. The
I/O bus also enables RS-485 communication between the Central IO module and
the automation server.

Voltage outputs

Figure: Voltage output internal configuration and connection of external resistive load

ROUT is approximately equal to 10 ohm.

VOUT range is 0 to 10 VDC.
RLOAD minimum is 5 kohm.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

204
 7 Central IO Modules
7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules

Current outputs

Figure: Current output internal configuration and connection of external resistive load

IOUT range is 0 to 20 mA.

RLOAD maximum is 650 ohm.

7.17.3 Specifications
Input channels 8

Output channels 4

DC input supply power 3.2 W

DC input supply voltage 24 VDC

Environment

Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

Ambient temperature, storage -20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Material

Plastic flame rating UL94-5VB

Enclosure PC/ABS

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

205
7 Central IO Modules
7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules

Ingress protection rating IP 20

Mechanical

Dimensions including terminal base 90 W x 114 H x 64 D mm (3.6 W x 4.5 H x 2.5 D in.)

Weight including terminal base 0.276 kg (0.61 lb)

Weight excluding terminal base 0.152 kg (0.34 lb)

Terminal base TB-IO-W1

Universal inputs

Absolute maximum ratings -0.5 to +24 VDC

A/D converter resolution 12 bits

Digital

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, 2.4 mA

Minimum pulse width 120 ms

LED polarity Software selectable, if the LED is activated when the input is high or low

LED color Red or green, software selectable

Counter

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, 2.4 mA

Minimum pulse width 20 ms

Maximum frequency 25 Hz

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

206
 7 Central IO Modules
7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules

LED polarity Software selectable, if the LED is activated when the input is high or low

LED color Red or green, software selectable

Supervised

5 V circuit, 1 or 2 resistors
Monitored switch combinations Series only, parallel only, and series and parallel

Resistor range 1 to 10 kohm

For a 2-resistor configuration, each resistor must have the same value +/- 5 %

Voltage

Range 0 to 10 VDC

Accuracy +/-(7 mV + 0.2 % of reading)

Resolution 2.7 mV

Impedance 100 kohm

Reliability check Yes

Current

Range 0 to 20 mA

Accuracy +/-(0.03 mA + 0.4 % of reading)

Resolution 5.6 μA

Impedance 47 ohm

Reliability check Yes

Resistive

10 ohm to 10 kohm accuracy +/-(7 + 4 x 10-3 x R) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm

10 kohm to 60 kohm accuracy +/-(4 x 10-3 x R + 7 x 10-8 x R2) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm

Reliability check Yes

Temperature

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Reliability check Yes

Supported thermistors

Honeywell 20 kohm

Type I (Continuum) 10 kohm

Type II (I/NET) 10 kohm

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

207
7 Central IO Modules
7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules

Type III (Satchwell) 10 kohm

Type IV (FD) 10 kohm

Type V (FD w/ 11k shunt) Linearized 10 kohm

Satchwell D?T Linearized 10 kohm

Johnson Controls 2.2 kohm

Xenta 1.8 kohm

Balco 1 kohm

Measurement accuracy

20 kohm, 10 kohm, 2.2 kohm, and 1.8 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 50 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 122 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
50 to 100 °C: +/-0.5 °C (122 to 212 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-1.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-2.7 °F)

Linearized 10 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-3.0 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-5.4 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.8 °F)
0 to 50 °C: +/-0.3 °C (32 to 122 °F: +/-0.5 °F)
50 to 100 °C: +/-0.5 °C (122 to 212 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-2.0 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-3.6 °F)

1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-2.7 °F)

Analog outputs, AO

Voltage

Range 0 to 10 VDC

Accuracy +/-100 mV

Resolution 42 mV

Minimum load resistance 5 kohm

Load range -1 to +2 mA

Reliability check Yes

Terminals Voltage Output (VO), Return (RET)

Current

Range 0 to 20 mA

Accuracy +/-0.2 mA

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

208
 7 Central IO Modules
7.17 UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-4-H Central IO Modules

Resolution 0.1 mA

Load range 0 to 650 ohm

Reliability check Yes

Terminals Current Output (CO), Return (RET)

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

209
7 Central IO Modules
7.18 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules

7.18 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central

IO Modules
The UI-8/AO-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4 Central IO modules combine 8 universal inputs
and 4 analog outputs.
NOTE: Module names with an -H indicate the presence of Hand-Off-Auto
override switches.
The front panel includes a dedicated two-color (red and green) status LED for
local monitoring of contact, counter, and supervised input types. You can
configure the LED to display either red or green for each input or output state.

Figure: UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Module

7.18.1 Universal inputs

The universal inputs of the UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO modules
are designed to read several different types of inputs.
Input types:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current
• Temperature
• Resistive

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

210
 7 Central IO Modules
7.18 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules

Figure: Universal input internal configuration

Applied voltages beyond the absolute maximum ratings will cause over current in
the protection component DZ.
The I/O bus in the terminal base provides the Central IO module with power and
an address.
The address value in the I/O bus is increased by one for each terminal base. The
I/O bus also enables RS-485 communication between the Central IO module and
the automation server.

Digital inputs
The external connection of a digital input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Digital input external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

211
7 Central IO Modules
7.18 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules

Counter inputs
A counter input uses the same hardware configuration as the digital input that is
shown in the figure above.

Supervised inputs
Supervised inputs are contact closing inputs supplemented with the supervision
of the field wiring integrity. This supervision is a required feature in many security
system applications. The supervised inputs provide the ability to detect specific
forms of tampering or trouble with the wire connections to the field contacts. The
supervision is achieved with a combination of 1 or 2 resistors attached to the
contact in the field. The resistor combination creates continuous current flow
through the field contact loop and presents a defined set of expected resistance
values for each of the defined conditions. If someone is attempting to defeat the
monitoring of the field contact by short circuiting the wire with a jumper or cutting
the wire, the objective is to detect and indicate such a condition. The resistors
need to be located at the end of the cable close to the field contact, so that the
point where there is a risk that the circuit is defeated is between the resistors and
the I/O.
Three different types of supervised input connections are supported:
• Series only
• Parallel only
• Series and parallel
Each type of supervised input connection provides a different capability in
regards to what form of tamper/trouble can be detected regardless of switch
contact open or closed condition.
Series only: A single resistor, which is connected in series with the switch, can
only detect tamper/trouble in the form of a short circuit across the wire pair. A
single series resistor supervision is frequently configured with a normally closed
field contact. This provides for the short circuit to be detected and a cut wire will
show as an alarm condition. The external connection of a series only supervised
input connection is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Series only external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RS = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

212
 7 Central IO Modules
7.18 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules

Parallel only: A single resistor, which is connected in parallel with the switch,
can only detect tamper/trouble in the form of an open circuit in the field wiring
loop. With single parallel resistor supervision and use of a normally open switch
in the field, the opened wiring shows as a fault and the shorted wiring shows as
an alarm condition. The external connection of a parallel only supervised input
connection is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Parallel only external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Series and parallel: Two resistors, where one is connected in series with the
switch and one is connected in parallel with the switch, can detect tamper/trouble
conditions in the form of both an open and a shorted circuit. The external
connection of a series and parallel supervised input connection is shown in the
following figure.

Figure: Series and parallel external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

213
7 Central IO Modules
7.18 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules

Voltage inputs
The external connection of a voltage input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Voltage input external connection

VG is the monitored external voltage (0 to 10 VDC).

RIN = 100 kohm

Current inputs
The external connection of a current input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Current input external connection

IG is the monitored external current (0 to 20 mA).

RSH = 47 ohm
In the internal configuration of the current input, there is a current limit circuit in
order to protect the shunt resistor from over load. The input current is limited to
40 mA with a serial connected FET transistor. If this limit is reached for 0.5
seconds, the transistor is turned off. When 5 seconds have elapsed, the
transistor is turned on again to make a new start attempt.

Temperature inputs
The external connection of a temperature input is shown in the following figure.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

214
 7 Central IO Modules
7.18 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules

Figure: Temperature input external connection

RT is the monitored external thermistor.

When a universal input is used as a temperature input, VS and RPU in the internal
configuration of the universal input are used according to the following table.
Thermistor type VS RPU

20 kohm 5V 10 kohm

10 kohm 5V 10 kohm

2.2 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

1.8 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

The resulting voltage across the thermistor is measured and a temperature is

calculated dependent on the selected thermistor type.

Resistive inputs
The external connection of a resistive input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Resistive input external connection

RM is the monitored external resistance.

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

215
7 Central IO Modules
7.18 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules

7.18.2 Analog outputs

The analog outputs of the UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO modules
are designed to be used for voltage outputs.

Figure: Voltage output internal configuration and connection of external resistive load

ROUT is approximately equal to 10 ohm.

VOUT range is 0 to 10 VDC.
RLOAD minimum is 5 kohm.
The I/O bus in the terminal base provides the Central IO module with power and
an address.
The address value in the I/O bus is increased by one for each terminal base. The
I/O bus also enables RS-485 communication between the Central IO module and
the automation server.

7.18.3 Specifications
Input channels 8

Output channels 4

DC input supply power 1.0 W

DC input supply voltage 24 VDC

Environment

Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

216
 7 Central IO Modules
7.18 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules

Ambient temperature, storage -20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Material

Plastic flame rating UL94-5VB

Enclosure PC/ABS

Ingress protection rating IP 20

Mechanical

Dimensions including terminal base 90 W x 114 H x 64 D mm (3.6 W x 4.5 H x 2.5 D in.)

Weight including terminal base 0.275 kg (0.61 lb)

Weight excluding terminal base 0.152 kg (0.34 lb)

Terminal base TB-IO-W1

Universal inputs

Absolute maximum ratings -0.5 to +24 VDC

A/D converter resolution 12 bits

Digital

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, 2.4 mA

Minimum pulse width 120 ms

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

217
7 Central IO Modules
7.18 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules

LED polarity Software selectable, if the LED is activated when the input is high or low

LED color Red or green, software selectable

Counter

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, 2.4 mA

Minimum pulse width 20 ms

Maximum frequency 25 Hz

LED polarity Software selectable, if the LED is activated when the input is high or low

LED color Red or green, software selectable

Supervised

5 V circuit, 1 or 2 resistors
Monitored switch combinations Series only, parallel only, and series and parallel

Resistor range 1 to 10 kohm

For a 2-resistor configuration, each resistor must have the same value +/- 5 %

Voltage

Range 0 to 10 VDC

Accuracy +/-(7 mV + 0.2 % of reading)

Resolution 2.7 mV

Impedance 100 kohm

Reliability check Yes

Current

Range 0 to 20 mA

Accuracy +/-(0.03 mA + 0.4 % of reading)

Resolution 5.6 μA

Impedance 47 ohm

Reliability check Yes

Resistive

10 ohm to 10 kohm accuracy +/-(7 + 4 x 10-3 x R) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm

10 kohm to 60 kohm accuracy +/-(4 x 10-3 x R + 7 x 10-8 x R2) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm

Reliability check Yes

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

218
 7 Central IO Modules
7.18 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules

Temperature

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Reliability check Yes

Supported thermistors

Honeywell 20 kohm

Type I (Continuum) 10 kohm

Type II (I/NET) 10 kohm

Type III (Satchwell) 10 kohm

Type IV (FD) 10 kohm

Type V (FD w/ 11k shunt) Linearized 10 kohm

Satchwell D?T Linearized 10 kohm

Johnson Controls 2.2 kohm

Xenta 1.8 kohm

Balco 1 kohm

Measurement accuracy

20 kohm, 10 kohm, 2.2 kohm, and 1.8 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 50 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 122 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
50 to 100 °C: +/-0.5 °C (122 to 212 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-1.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-2.7 °F)

Linearized 10 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-3.0 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-5.4 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.8 °F)
0 to 50 °C: +/-0.3 °C (32 to 122 °F: +/-0.5 °F)
50 to 100 °C: +/-0.5 °C (122 to 212 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-2.0 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-3.6 °F)

1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-2.7 °F)

Analog outputs, AO

Voltage

Range 0 to 10 VDC

Accuracy +/-100 mV

Resolution 42 mV

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

219
7 Central IO Modules
7.18 UI-8/AO-V-4 and UI-8/AO-V-4-H Central IO Modules

Minimum load resistance 5 kohm

Load range -1 to +2 mA

Reliability check Yes

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

220
8 AS-B Servers

Topics
AS-B Servers
AS-B Server Communication Ports
AS-B Server Screw Terminals
Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 24 I/O Points
Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 36 I/O Points
AS-B Server LEDs
AS-B Server Onboard I/O
Universal Inputs/Outputs
Digital Inputs
Relay Outputs
Triac Outputs
AS-B Server Device Installation
Installing an AS-B Server on a DIN Rail
Installing a Terminal Block on an AS-B Server
Removing a Terminal Block from an AS-B Server
Wiring a Terminal Block on an AS-B Server
Printing a Wiring List for the I/O Bus
Printing a Label to Identify I/O Channels
Powering Up an AS-B Server
 8 AS-B Servers
8.1 AS-B Servers

8.1 AS-B Servers

An AS-B server is a powerful automation server that features both onboard I/O
and built-in power supply. Like the other automation servers, the AS-B server is a
Schneider Electric manufactured embedded device that generally serves as the
lowest tier EcoStruxure BMS server within the EcoStruxure BMS. The
automation server controls and supervises equipment, typically HVAC
equipment. The AS-B server uses its onboard I/O with connected field devices,
such as sensors and actuators, to do that.
The AS-B server is installed on DIN rails in cabinets.

Figure: AS-B server

8.1.1 AS-B Server Models

The AS-B server comes in eight models that offer two different sets of I/O point
count and I/O mix.
Model I/O Points

AS-B-24 24

AS-B-24H 24

AS-B-24-P 24

AS-B-24H-P 24

AS-B-36 36

AS-B-36H 36

AS-B-36-P 36

AS-B-36H-P 36

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

223
8 AS-B Servers
8.1 AS-B Servers

AS-B servers with “H” in the product name are equipped with a display for output
override.
AS-B servers with “P” in the product name are hardware only. An AS-B software
package needs to be purchased separately. For more information, see the AS-B
Specification Sheet.
AS-B servers with 36 I/O points have the same small footprint as AS-B servers
with 24 I/O points.

8.1.2 AS-B Server Onboard I/O

The AS-B server offers a mix of I/O point types that match a wide variety of
HVAC applications. Most of the I/O points are universal inputs/outputs, which are
highly flexible and can be configured as either inputs or outputs.
For more information, see section 8.7 “AS-B Server Onboard I/O” on page 243.

8.1.3 Output Override Function

The output override function allows you to manually override outputs. This
function can be used for testing, commissioning, and maintenance of equipment.
For more information, see section 13.1.7 “” on page 428.

8.1.4 Built-in Power Supply

The device has a built-in power supply designed to accommodate 24 VAC or 24
VDC input power. The main AC/DC input (L/+ and N/-) is galvanically isolated
from the electronics. This removes the risk of damage due to earth currents and
permits the input power to be wired without concern for polarity matching.

8.1.5 Memory
An AS-B server has two types of memory:
• 256 MB DDR2 SDRAM (for program execution)
• 4 GB eMMC memory (for storage)
If a power outage occurs, all important variables are automatically saved to the
eMMC memory before complete shutdown. When power returns, this data
retention function helps ensure that AS-B can continue to run with the correct set
of values.

8.1.6 Supported Building Standards

The AS-B server natively communicates with two of the most popular
communication protocols:
• BACnet: The AS-B server directly communicates to BACnet/IP and BACnet
MS/TP networks, which provides access to MP and RP controllers, b3

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

224
 8 AS-B Servers
8.1 AS-B Servers

BACnet devices, and BACnet devices. The AS-B server also supports
BACnet/SC applications as a BACnet/SC node or BACnet/SC router, which
allows the AS-B server to be in BACnet/SC networks and support
applications that connect BACnet/IP or MS/TP networks with BACnet/SC
networks.
• Modbus: The AS-B server natively integrates Modbus RS-485 master and
slave configurations, as well as IP client and server. This integration
provides access to devices that communicate on the Modbus protocol, such
as power meters, circuit breakers, and lighting controllers.

8.1.7 AS-B Server Communication Ports

AS-B has the following communication ports:
• 2 Ethernet 10/100 megabit ports
• 1 RS-485 port
• 1 USB host port
• 1 USB device port
For more information, see section 8.2 “AS-B Server Communication Ports” on
page 230.

8.1.8 AS-B Server Screw Terminals

AS-B servers use pluggable terminal blocks, which are easy to install and
remove from the device. The terminal blocks are delivered with the device.
For more information, see section 8.3 “AS-B Server Screw Terminals” on page
231.

8.1.9 AS-B Server LEDs

There are five LEDs on the front panel of the AS-B server.
For more information, see section 8.6 “AS-B Server LEDs” on page 241.

8.1.10 Reset Functions

There are four different types of reset for the automation servers: warm start, cold
start, reset, and reset to DFU mode. Depending on the type of reset, the
automation server can be reset using the reset button or a command from
WorkStation.
For more information, see section 9.2 “Automation Server Reset Functions” on
page 277.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

225
8 AS-B Servers
8.1 AS-B Servers

8.1.11 Device Installation

The AS-B servers are designed for installing on DIN rails in a cabinet.
For more information, see section 8.12 “AS-B Server Device Installation” on page
260.

8.1.12 Wiring
The wiring recommendations provide guidance regarding wiring of the Central IO
modules, automation servers, BACnet/IP devices, RP controller expansion
modules, and Operator Display.
For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.

8.1.13 AS-B Server Software

Before you engineer an AS-B server, install the AS-B server software on the
server using Device Administrator. The software is not pre-loaded on the AS-B
servers.
For more information, see the Installing AS-P or AS-B Software topic on
WebHelp.

8.1.14 Server Replacement Using Restore

Backup and Restore helps assure that automation server data can be restored to
a replacement automation server in the event of detected failure, or to the same
automation server in the event of data loss. As a precaution, you back up your
automation servers regularly so that you can use the most current backup to
restore the automation server data to a replacement automation server. You also
configure the new automation server to match the name and the network settings
of the replaced automation server so the system can identify this automation
server when online.
For more information, see the Automation Server Replacement Using Restore
topic on WebHelp.

8.1.15 Specifications
AC input

Nominal voltage 24 VAC

Operating voltage range +/- 20 %

Frequency 50/60 Hz

Maximum current 0.5 A rms

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

226
 8 AS-B Servers
8.1 AS-B Servers

Recommended transformer rating ≥15 VA

DC input

Nominal voltage 24 to 30 VDC

Operating voltage range 21 to 33 VDC

Maximum power consumption 10 W

Environment

Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

Ambient temperature, storage -20 to +70 °C (-4 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Material

Plastic flame rating UL94-5VB

Enclosure PC/ABS

Ingress protection rating IP 20

Mechanical

Dimensions 198 W x 110 H x 64 D mm (7.8 W x 4.3 H x 2.5 D in.)

Weight, including terminal blocks 0.504 kg (1.111 lb)a

a) The weight includes the display and keys, which are 0.022 kg (0.049 lb).

Weight, excluding terminal blocks 0.420 kg (0.926 lb)a

a) The weight includes the display and keys, which are 0.022 kg (0.049 lb).

Real-time clock

Accuracy in runtime mode NTP server

Accuracy in backup mode, at 25 °C (77 °F) +/-52 seconds per month

Backup time, at 25 °C (77 °F) 10 days

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

227
8 AS-B Servers
8.1 AS-B Servers

Communication ports

Ethernet Dual 10/100BASE-TX (RJ45)

USB 1 USB 2.0 device port (mini-B)

1 USB 2.0 host port (type-A), 5 VDC, 2.5 W

RS-485 2-wire port, bias 5.0 VDC

Communications

BACnet BACnet/IP and MS/TP, port configurable, default 47808

BACnet/SC, port configurable, no default port
BTL B-BC (BACnet Building Controller)a
a) See the BTL Product Catalog for up-to-date details on BTL listed firmware revisions on BACnet
International's home page.

Modbus Modbus TCP, client and server

Serial, RS-485, master or slave

TCP Binary, port fixed, 4444

HTTP Non-binary, port configurable, default 80

HTTPS Encrypted supporting TLS 1.3, 1.2, 1.1a, and 1.0a, port configurable default 443
a) Disabled by default.

SMTP Email sending, port configurable, default 25

SNMP version 3
Network supervision using poll and trap
Application alarm distribution using trap

CPU

Frequency 333 MHz

Type SPEAr320S, ARM926 core

DDR2 SDRAM 256 MB

eMMC memory 4 GB

Memory backup Yes, battery-free, no maintenance

8.1.16 Internal Configuration

The AS-B servers internal configuration with regards to the signal ground is
shown in the following figure.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

228
 8 AS-B Servers
8.1 AS-B Servers

Figure: AS-B server internal configuration

The earth ground terminal ( ) of the built-in power supply is connected to signal
ground, which is the same as the negative output from the power supply. The
purpose of this connection is to comply with EMC directives.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

229
8 AS-B Servers
8.2 AS-B Server Communication Ports

8.2 AS-B Server Communication Ports

AS-B has the following communication ports:
• 2 Ethernet 10/100 megabit ports
• 1 RS-485 port
• 1 USB host port
• 1 USB device port

Table: AS-B Server Communication Ports

Communication port Connection

Ethernet 1 10/100 IP, LAN/WAN, Modbus, BACnet

Ethernet 2 10/100 IP, LAN/WAN, Modbus, BACnet

RS-485 Modbus, BACnet

USB host Advanced Display (AD), Zigbee Adapter

USB device Device Administrator

The Ethernet communication is performed over a 10/100BaseTX, 10 or 100

Mbit/s, twisted pair network. The AS-B servers have two Ethernet ports with RJ45
connectors.
The two Ethernet ports can be configured in three different modes: switching
enabled, second port disabled, or dual IP networks. One port should be
connected to the site network. When switching between the two ports is enabled,
the other port can be used to connect computers running WorkStation or
WebStation, Modbus TCP units, or BACnet/IP devices such as MP controllers,
but not another EcoStruxure BMS server. To limit access to the system, you can
disconnect the second port. When the two ports are configured in dual IP mode,
you can connect a separate network of IP devices to the second port. The
automation server has the option to act as a DHCP server on this network. You
can lock the DHCP network and only allow current DHCP clients to communicate
with the automation server.
The USB host port can be used for connecting devices such as the Advanced
Display (AD) and Zigbee Adapter. For more information, see section 29.6
“Connecting AD v3 to an Automation Server and a 24 VDC Power Supply” on
page 1091. For more information, see section 26.1.1 “” on page 1026.
The USB device port is intended for program download from a PC by means of
Device Administrator. The port is connected to a PC or a downstream port of a
hub.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

230
 8 AS-B Servers
8.3 AS-B Server Screw Terminals

8.3 AS-B Server Screw Terminals

AS-B servers use pluggable terminal blocks, which are easy to install and
remove from the device. The terminal blocks are delivered with the device.
Spare terminal blocks can be ordered using the part number
SXWASBCON10001.
The wiring recommendations are provided separately. For more information, see
section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.

8.3.1 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 24

I/O Points
AS-B servers with 24 I/O points use nine pluggable terminal blocks and one fixed
terminal block.
For more information, see section 8.4 “Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 24
I/O Points” on page 232.

8.3.2 Screw Terminals for AS-B servers with 36

I/O Points
AS-B servers with 36 I/O points use nine pluggable terminal blocks and one fixed
terminal block.
For more information, see section 8.5 “Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 36
I/O Points” on page 236.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

231
8 AS-B Servers
8.4 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 24 I/O Points

8.4 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with

24 I/O Points
AS-B servers with 24 I/O points use nine pluggable terminal blocks and one fixed
terminal block.
Recommended screw tightening torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in)

Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, AS-B server with 24 I/O points

The terminal blocks are used as follows:

• One 3-position pluggable terminal block for the power input
• One 2-position fixed terminal block for the two return (RET) terminals 4 and 5
• One 4-position pluggable terminal block for RS-485 communication
• One 6-position pluggable terminal block for the four universal inputs/outputs
of type Ub
• One 6-position pluggable terminal block for the four digital inputs
• One 8-position pluggable terminal block for the four relay outputs
• Four 6-position pluggable terminal blocks for the 12 universal inputs/outputs
of type Ua

Table: Screw Terminals, AS-B Server with 24 I/O Points

Terminal number Designation Usage

Power input

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

232
 8 AS-B Servers
8.4 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 24 I/O Points

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

1 L/+ Line (L) lead when operating

the device from 24 VAC,
50/60 Hz, 15 VA
Positive (+) lead when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 10 W

2 N/– Neutral (N) lead when

operating the device from 24
VAC, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
Negative (–) lead when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 10 W

3 Earth ground

Return terminals

4 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

5 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

RS-485

6 Bias + 5.0 VDC, RS-485 bias

supply, current limited 40
mA

7 TX/RX + RS-485 communication

8 TX/RX – RS-485 communication

9 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

Universal inputs/outputs

10 Ub1 Universal input/output, type

Ub

11 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

12 Ub2 Universal input/output, type

Ub

13 Ub3 Universal input/output, type

Ub

14 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

15 Ub4 Universal input/output, type

Ub

Digital inputs

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

233
8 AS-B Servers
8.4 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 24 I/O Points

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

16 DI1 Digital input

17 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

18 DI2 Digital input

19 DI3 Digital input

20 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

21 DI4 Digital input

Relay outputs

22 DO1 Relay output, type Form A

23 DO1 Relay output, type Form A

24 DO2 Relay output, type Form A

25 DO2 Relay output, type Form A

26 DO3 Relay output, type Form A

27 DO3 Relay output, type Form A

28 DO4 Relay output, type Form A

29 DO4 Relay output, type Form A

Universal inputs/outputs,
type Ua

30 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

31 Ua1 Universal input/output, type

Ua

32 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

33 Ua2 Universal input/output, type

Ua

34 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

35 Ua3 Universal input/output, type

Ua

36 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

37 Ua4 Universal input/output, type

Ua

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

234
 8 AS-B Servers
8.4 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 24 I/O Points

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

38 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

39 Ua5 Universal input/output, type

Ua

40 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

41 Ua6 Universal input/output, type

Ua

42 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

43 Ua7 Universal input/output, type

Ua

44 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

45 Ua8 Universal input/output, type

Ua

46 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

47 Ua9 Universal input/output, type

Ua

48 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

49 Ua10 Universal input/output, type

Ua

50 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

51 Ua11 Universal input/output, type

Ua

52 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

53 Ua12 Universal input/output, type

Ua

The screw terminals 6 to 9, intended for RS-485 communication, act as

connectors to the AS-B server and are easily inserted/removed without disrupting
the network. Doing so may help in isolating possible RS-485 communication
problems.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

235
8 AS-B Servers
8.5 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 36 I/O Points

8.5 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with

36 I/O Points
AS-B servers with 36 I/O points use nine pluggable terminal blocks and one fixed
terminal block.
Recommended screw tightening torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in)

Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, AS-B server with 36 I/O points

The terminal blocks are used as follows:

• One 3-position pluggable terminal block for the power input
• One 2-position fixed terminal block for the two return (RET) terminals 4 and 5
• One 4-position pluggable terminal block for the RS-485 communication
• One 6-position pluggable terminal block for the six universal inputs/outputs
of type Ub
• One 6-position pluggable terminal block for the four triac outputs
• One 8-position pluggable terminal block for the four relay outputs
• Four 6-position pluggable terminal blocks for the 20 universal inputs/outputs
of type Ua
One of the terminal blocks also accomodates two terminals for universal
inputs/outputs of type Ub.

Table: Screw Terminals, AS-B Server with 36 I/O Points

Terminal number Designation Usage

Power input

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

236
 8 AS-B Servers
8.5 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 36 I/O Points

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

1 L/+ Line (L) lead when operating

the device from 24 VAC,
50/60 Hz, 15 VA
Positive (+) lead when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 10 W

2 N/– Neutral (N) lead when

operating the device from 24
VAC, 50/60 Hz, 15 VA
Negative (–) lead when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 10 W

3 Earth ground

Return terminals

4 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

5 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

RS-485

6 Bias + 5.0 VDC, RS-485 bias

supply, current limited 40
mA

7 TX/RX + RS-485 communication

8 TX/RX – RS-485 communication

9 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

Universal inputs/outputs,
type Ub

10 Ub1 Universal input/output, type

Ub

11 Ub2 Universal input/output, type

Ub

12 Ub3 Universal input/output, type

Ub

13 Ub4 Universal input/output, type

Ub

14 Ub5 Universal input/output, type

Ub

15 Ub6 Universal input/output, type

Ub

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

237
8 AS-B Servers
8.5 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 36 I/O Points

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

Triac outputs

16 DO5 Triac output

17 COM1 Common connection for

DO5 and DO6
The COM terminal can be
connected to 24 VAC for
high-side switching or to
ground for low-side
switching.

18 DO6 Triac output

19 DO7 Triac output

20 COM2 Common connection for

DO7 and DO8
The COM terminal can be
connected to 24 VAC for
high-side switching or to
ground for low-side
switching.

21 DO8 Triac output

Relay outputs

22 DO1 Relay output, type Form A

23 DO1 Relay output, type Form A

24 DO2 Relay output, type Form A

25 DO2 Relay output, type Form A

26 DO3 Relay output, type Form A

27 DO3 Relay output, type Form A

28 DO4 Relay output, type Form A

29 DO4 Relay output, type Form A

Universal inputs/outputs,
type Ub

30 Ub7 Universal input/output, type

Ub

31 Ub8 Universal input/output, type

Ub

Universal inputs/outputs,
type Ua

32 Ua1 Universal input/output, type

Ua

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

238
 8 AS-B Servers
8.5 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 36 I/O Points

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

33 Ua2 Universal input/output, type

Ua

34 Ua3 Universal input/output, type

Ua

35 Ua4 Universal input/output, type

Ua

36 Ua5 Universal input/output, type

Ua

37 Ua6 Universal input/output, type

Ua

38 Ua7 Universal input/output, type

Ua

39 Ua8 Universal input/output, type

Ua

40 Ua9 Universal input/output, type

Ua

41 Ua10 Universal input/output, type

Ua

42 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

43 Ua11 Universal input/output, type

Ua

44 Ua12 Universal input/output, type

Ua

45 Ua13 Universal input/output, type

Ua

46 Ua14 Universal input/output, type

Ua

47 Ua15 Universal input/output, type

Ua

48 RET Internally connected to

terminal 3 (earth ground)

49 Ua16 Universal input/output, type

Ua

50 Ua17 Universal input/output, type

Ua

51 Ua18 Universal input/output, type

Ua

52 Ua19 Universal input/output, type

Ua

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

239
8 AS-B Servers
8.5 Screw Terminals for AS-B Servers with 36 I/O Points

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

53 Ua20 Universal input/output, type

Ua

The screw terminals 6 to 9, intended for RS-485 communication, act as

connectors to the AS-B server and are easily inserted/removed without disrupting
the network. Doing so may help in isolating possible RS-485 communication
problems.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

240
 8 AS-B Servers
8.6 AS-B Server LEDs

8.6 AS-B Server LEDs

There are five LEDs on the front panel of the AS-B server.

Figure: AS-B server LEDs

Table: The Five LEDs

Function Color

Status (AS-B) Green/Red

RS-485 Tx Yellow

RS-485 Rx Green

Ethernet 1 Green/Yellow

Ethernet 2 Green/Yellow

NOTE: The AS-B server Ethernet and Status indicators comprise two LEDs
(green/yellow and green/red respectively) in one structure. Normally, when
one LED is lit, the other is not lit and vice versa, that is, the indicator will
show one color at a time.
The LEDs indicate status of the AS-B server and the ongoing communication.

8.6.1 Status LED

The automation server Status LED indicates the condition of the device.

Table: Automation Server Status LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, constant Normal operation, status OK

Green, flashing (~1 Hz) Device restarting, wait

Red, constant Detected error, attention required

Red, flashing (~1 Hz) Device operates, but a problem needs

attention

Red/green, flashing (~1 Hz) Firmware being downloaded, wait

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

241
8 AS-B Servers
8.6 AS-B Server LEDs

Continued
LED Patterns Condition

Red/green, vague Device firmware upgrade mode, wait

No light No input power

8.6.2 RS-485 LEDs

The RS-485 LEDs indicate the condition of the RS-485 communication.

Table: RS-485 LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Yellow, flashing (Tx) Transmit data

Green, flashing (Rx) Receive data

8.6.3 Ethernet LEDs

The Ethernet (1 and 2) LEDs indicate the condition of the Ethernet
communication.

Table: Ethernet LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, flashing 10 Mbit communication

Yellow, flashing 100 Mbit communication

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

242
 8 AS-B Servers
8.7 AS-B Server Onboard I/O

8.7 AS-B Server Onboard I/O

The AS-B server offers a mix of I/O point types that match a wide variety of
HVAC applications. Most of the I/O points are universal inputs/outputs, which are
highly flexible and can be configured as either inputs or outputs.
AS-B servers with 36 I/O points have the following types:
• 20 Universal inputs/outputs, Ua type
• 8 Universal inputs/outputs, Ub type
• 4 Triac outputs
• 4 Relay outputs
AS-B servers with 36 I/O points have the following types:
• 20 Universal inputs/outputs, Ua type
• 8 Universal inputs/outputs, Ub type
• 4 Triac outputs
• 4 Relay outputs

8.7.1 Universal Inputs/Outputs

The universal inputs/outputs are ideal for any mix of temperature, pressure, flow,
status points, and similar point types in a building control system.
For more information, see section 8.8.3 “” on page 250.

8.7.2 Digital Inputs

The digital inputs can be used for sensing of multiple dry contact digital inputs in
applications, such as equipment status monitoring or alarm point monitoring.
For more information, see section 8.9.2 “” on page 255.

8.7.3 Relay Outputs

The relay outputs support digital Form A point types. The Form A relays are
designed for direct load applications.
For more information, see section 8.10.2 “” on page 256.

8.7.4 Triac Outputs

The triac outputs can be used in many applications to switch 24 VAC on or off for
external loads such as actuators, relays, or indicators. Triacs are silent and do
not suffer from relay contact wear.
For more information, see section 8.11.2 “” on page 258.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

243
8 AS-B Servers
8.8 Universal Inputs/Outputs

8.8 Universal Inputs/Outputs

The universal inputs/outputs are ideal for any mix of temperature, pressure, flow,
status points, and similar point types in a building control system.
As counter inputs, the universal inputs/outputs are commonly used in energy
metering applications. As RTD inputs, they are ideal for temperature points in a
building control system. As supervised inputs, they are used for security
applications where it is critical to know whether or not a wire has been cut or
shorted. These events provide a separate indication of alarms and events in the
system.
The universal inputs/outputs are capable of supporting analog outputs of type
voltage outputs. Therefore, the universal inputs/outputs support a wide range of
devices, such as actuators.
The AS-B server's universal inputs/outputs consist of two types: Ua and Ub. The
difference between the two types of universal inputs/outputs is that the Ub type
supports current inputs.

8.8.1 Inputs
The universal inputs/outputs can be configured to read several different types of
inputs:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current (Ub only)
• Temperature
• Resistive
• 2-Wire RTD temperature
• 2-Wire RTD resistive

Digital inputs
The external connection of a digital input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Digital input external connection

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

244
 8 AS-B Servers
8.8 Universal Inputs/Outputs

K is the monitored external switch.

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm

Counter inputs
A counter input uses the same hardware configuration as the digital input that is
shown in the figure above.

Supervised inputs
Supervised inputs are contact closing inputs supplemented with the supervision
of the field wiring integrity. This supervision is a required feature in many security
system applications. The supervised inputs provide the ability to detect specific
forms of tampering or trouble with the wire connections to the field contacts. The
supervision is achieved with a combination of 1 or 2 resistors attached to the
contact in the field. The resistor combination creates continuous current flow
through the field contact loop and presents a defined set of expected resistance
values for each of the defined conditions. If someone is attempting to defeat the
monitoring of the field contact by short circuiting the wire with a jumper or cutting
the wire, the objective is to detect and indicate such a condition. The resistors
need to be located at the end of the cable close to the field contact, so that the
point where there is a risk that the circuit is defeated is between the resistors and
the I/O.
Three different types of supervised input connections are supported:
• Series only
• Parallel only
• Series and parallel
Each type of supervised input connection provides a different capability in
regards to what form of tamper/trouble can be detected regardless of switch
contact open or closed condition.
Series only: A single resistor, which is connected in series with the switch, can
only detect tamper/trouble in the form of a short circuit across the wire pair. A
single series resistor supervision is frequently configured with a normally closed
field contact. This provides for the short circuit to be detected and a cut wire will
show as an alarm condition. The external connection of a series only supervised
input connection is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Series only external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

245
8 AS-B Servers
8.8 Universal Inputs/Outputs

RS = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Parallel only: A single resistor, which is connected in parallel with the switch,
can only detect tamper/trouble in the form of an open circuit in the field wiring
loop. With single parallel resistor supervision and use of a normally open switch
in the field, the opened wiring shows as a fault and the shorted wiring shows as
an alarm condition. The external connection of a parallel only supervised input
connection is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Parallel only external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Series and parallel: Two resistors, where one is connected in series with the
switch and one is connected in parallel with the switch, can detect tamper/trouble
conditions in the form of both an open and a shorted circuit. The external
connection of a series and parallel supervised input connection is shown in the
following figure.

Figure: Series and parallel external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

246
 8 AS-B Servers
8.8 Universal Inputs/Outputs

RPU = 10 kohm

Voltage inputs
The external connection of a voltage input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Voltage input external connection

VG is the monitored external voltage (0 to 10 VDC).

RIN = 100 kohm

Current inputs
The external connection of a current input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Current input external connection

IG is the monitored external current (0 to 20 mA).

RSH = 47 ohm
In the internal configuration of the current input, there is a current limit circuit in
order to help protect the shunt resistor from over load. The input current is limited
to 40 mA with a serial connected FET transistor. If this limit is reached for 0.5
seconds, the transistor is turned off. When 5 seconds have elapsed, the
transistor is turned on again to make a new start attempt.

Temperature inputs
The external connection of a temperature input is shown in the following figure.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

247
8 AS-B Servers
8.8 Universal Inputs/Outputs

Figure: Temperature input external connection

RT is the monitored external thermistor.

When a universal input is used as a temperature input, VS and RPU in the internal
configuration of the universal input are used according to the following table.
Thermistor type VS RPU

20 kohm 5V 10 kohm

10 kohm 5V 10 kohm

2.2 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

1.8 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

The resulting voltage across the thermistor is measured and a temperature is

calculated dependent on the selected thermistor type.

Resistive inputs
The external connection of a resistive input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Resistive input external connection

RM is the monitored external resistance.

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

248
 8 AS-B Servers
8.8 Universal Inputs/Outputs

2-wire RTD temperature inputs

The external connection of a 2-wire RTD temperature input is shown in the
following figure.

Figure: 2-wire temperature input external connection

RT is the monitored external RTD.

RW is the wiring resistance.
VS = 1 V
RPU = 1.5 kohm
When an input is used as a 2-wire RTD temperature input, you need to specify
the wiring resistance in the software.
The input is measuring the total resulting voltage and the voltage across the RTD
is calculated. The voltage across the RTD is then converted to a raw resistance
value.

2-wire RTD resistive inputs

The external connection of a 2-wire RTD resistive input is shown in the following
figure.

Figure: 2-wire RTD resistive input external connection

RT is the monitored external resistance.

RW is the wiring resistance.
VS = 1 V
RPU = 1.5 kohm

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

249
8 AS-B Servers
8.8 Universal Inputs/Outputs

The input is measuring the total resulting voltage and the voltage across the RTD
is calculated. The voltage across the RTD is then converted to a raw resistance
value.
The RTD resistive input type is used to measure the resistance of an RTD other
than the supported types. The resistance to temperature conversion must be
performed in a function block or script program in the device. The resistance to
temperature conversion must take into accoundtthe wiring resistance.

8.8.2 Outputs
Voltage outputs
The universal inputs/outputs can be configured as voltage outputs.

Figure: Voltage output internal configuration and connection of external resistive load

ROUT is approximately equal to 10 ohm.

VOUT range is 0 to 10 VDC.
RLOAD minimum is 5 kohm.

8.8.3 Specifications
Channels, AS-B servers with 24 I/O points 12 Ua, Ua1 to Ua12
4 Ub, Ub1 to Ub4

Channels, AS-B servers with 36 I/O points 20 Ua, Ua1 to Ua20,

8 Ub, Ub1 to Ub8

Absolute maximum ratings -0.5 to +24 VDC

A/D converter resolution 16 bits

Digital inputs

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, typical wetting current 2.4
mA

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

250
 8 AS-B Servers
8.8 Universal Inputs/Outputs

Minimum pulse width 120 ms

Counter inputs

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, typical wetting current 2.4
mA

Minimum pulse width 20 ms

Maximum frequency 25 Hz

Supervised inputs

5 V circuit, 1 or 2 resistors
Monitored switch combinations Series only, parallel only, and series and parallel

Resistor range 1 to 10 kohm

For a 2-resistor configuration, each resistor must have the same value +/- 5 %

Voltage inputs

Range 0 to 10 VDC

Accuracy +/-(7 mV + 0.2 % of reading)

Resolution 0.5 mV

Impedance 100 kohm

Current inputs

Range 0 to 20 mA

Accuracy +/-(0.01 mA + 0.4 % of reading)

Resolution 1 μA

Impedance 47 ohm

Resistive inputs

10 ohm to 10 kohm accuracy +/-(7 + 4 x 10-3 x R) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm

10 kohm to 60 kohm accuracy +/-(4 x 10-3 x R + 7 x 10-8 x R2) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm

Temperature inputs (thermistors)

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Supported thermistors

Honeywell 20 kohm

Type I (Continuum) 10 kohm

Type II (I/NET) 10 kohm

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

251
8 AS-B Servers
8.8 Universal Inputs/Outputs

Type III (Satchwell) 10 kohm

Type IV (FD) 10 kohm

Type V (FD w/ 11k shunt) Linearized 10 kohm

Satchwell D?T Linearized 10 kohm

Johnson Controls 2.2 kohm

Xenta 1.8 kohm

Balco 1 kohm

Measurement accuracy

20 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)

10 kohm, 2.2 kohm, and 1.8 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-0.75 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-1.35 °F)
-30 to +100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (-22 to +212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)

Linearized 10 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-2.0 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-3.6 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.75 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.35 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)

1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-1.8 °F)

RTD temperature

Supported RTDs Pt1000, Ni1000, LG-Ni1000, and JCI-Ni1000

Pt1000

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Measurement accuracy -50 to +70 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-58 to +158 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
70 to 150 °C: +/-0.7 °C (158 to 302 °F: +/-1.3 °F)

Ni1000

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Measurement accuracy +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

LG-Ni1000

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Measurement accuracy +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

JCI-Ni1000

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

252
 8 AS-B Servers
8.8 Universal Inputs/Outputs

Measurement accuracy +/- 0.5 °C (+/- 0.9 °F)

RTD temperature wiring

Maximum wire resistance 20 ohm/wire (40 ohm total)

Maximum wire capacitance 60 nF

The wire resistance and capacitance typically corresponds to a 200 m wire.

RTD resistive

1,000 ohm

Range 500 to 2,200 ohm

Including wiring resistance

Measurement accuracy +/-(0.2 + 1.5 x 10-3 x R) ohm

R = resistance in ohm

Resolution 0.1 ohm

RTD resistive wiring

Maximum wire capacitance 60 nF

Voltage outputs

Range 0 to 10 VDC

Accuracy +/-60 mV

Resolution 10 mV

Minimum load resistance 5 kohm

Load range -1 to +2 mA

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

253
8 AS-B Servers
8.9 Digital Inputs

8.9 Digital Inputs

The digital inputs can be used for sensing of multiple dry contact digital inputs in
applications, such as equipment status monitoring or alarm point monitoring.
As counter inputs, digital inputs are commonly used in energy metering
applications.

8.9.1 Inputs
The DI digital inputs are designed to read two different types of inputs:
• Digital
• Counter

Figure: Digital input internal configuration

Applied voltages beyond the absolute maximum ratings cause over current in the
protection component DZ.

Digital inputs
The external connection of a digital input is shown in the following figure:

Figure: Digital input external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

VS = 24 V

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

254
 8 AS-B Servers
8.9 Digital Inputs

RPU = 10 kohm

Counter inputs
A counter input uses the same hardware configuration as the digital input that is
shown in the figure above.

8.9.2 Specifications
Channels, AS-B servers with 24 I/O points 4, DI1 to DI4

Channels, AS-B servers with 36 I/O points 0

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, typical wetting current 2.4
mA

Absolute maximum ratings -0.5 to +24 VDC

Digital inputs

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, typical wetting current 2.4
mA

Minimum pulse width 120 ms

Counter inputs

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, typical wetting current 2.4
mA

Minimum pulse width 20 ms

Maximum frequency 25 Hz

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

255
8 AS-B Servers
8.10 Relay Outputs

8.10 Relay Outputs

The relay outputs support digital Form A point types. The Form A relays are
designed for direct load applications.
The outputs can be configured as one of the following types:
• Digital output
• Digital pulsed output
• Tristate output
• Tristate pulsed output
Consider the expected number of operation cycles specified for the relay output
(cycle life rating) when configuring the period for a pulse width modulated (PWM)
output point.

8.10.1 Outputs
The DO relay outputs are Form A digital outputs, which means the outputs are
normally open contacts with one common terminal (C) and one normally open
terminal (NO). The terminals are isolated from other circuits of the device and
from signal ground.

Figure: Form A digital output internal configuration

8.10.2 Specifications
Channels, AS-B servers with 24 I/O points 4, DO1 to DO4

Channels, AS-B servers with 36 I/O points 4, DO1 to DO4

Contact rating 250 VAC/30 VDC, 2 A, Pilot Duty (C300)

Switch type Form A Relay

Single Pole Single Throw
Normally Open

Isolation contact to system ground 3000 VAC

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

256
 8 AS-B Servers
8.10 Relay Outputs

Cycle life (Resistive load) At least 100,000 cycles

Minimum pulse width 100 ms

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

257
8 AS-B Servers
8.11 Triac Outputs

8.11 Triac Outputs

The triac outputs can be used in many applications to switch 24 VAC on or off for
external loads such as actuators, relays, or indicators. Triacs are silent and do
not suffer from relay contact wear.
The outputs can be configured as one of the following types:
• Digital output
• Digital pulsed output
• Tristate output
• Tristate pulsed output

8.11.1 Outputs
The DO triac outputs are designed to switch 24 VAC. The common terminals
COM1 and COM2 can be connected to 24 VAC or to ground. DO5 and DO6
share common terminal COM1. DO7 and DO8 share common terminal COM2.
The terminals are opto-isolated from the controller.

Figure: Triac output internal configuration

RV1 and RV2 are varistors (95 V, 2 J) for protection of the triac.
R1 = 47 ohm
C1 = 22 nF

8.11.2 Specifications
Channels, AS-B servers with 24 I/O points 0

Channels, AS-B servers with 36 I/O points 4, DO5 to DO8

Output rating Max. 0.8 A

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

258
 8 AS-B Servers
8.11 Triac Outputs

Voltage 24 VAC +/-20 %

Commons COM1 for DO5 and DO6

COM2 for DO7 and DO8
The common terminals COM1 and COM2 can be connected to 24 VAC or to ground.

Common voltage, high side output 24 VAC

Common voltage, low side output 0 VAC (ground)

Minimum pulse width 100 ms

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

259
8 AS-B Servers
8.12 AS-B Server Device Installation

8.12 AS-B Server Device Installation

The AS-B servers are designed for installing on DIN rails in a cabinet.
A DIN rail is a common and convenient technique for installing an automation
server along with other associated control and monitoring devices. The most
efficient ventilation is achieved with the wall-mounted DIN rail oriented
horizontally and with adequate space provided between the automation server
rail and adjacent rails or other panel-mounted devices.
The AS-B server must be installed on a horizontal DIN rail (going from left to
right), with the device label text in the upright position reading left to right.

Figure: AS-B server installed on a horizontal DIN rail

NOTICE
Install the device on a horizontal DIN rail. This position provides sufficient
cooling air flow through the device. Installation on a vertical DIN rail can reduce
the life span of the device.

Install the AS-B servers horizontally in the cabinet with ample space between the
DIN rails and devices for sufficient cooling air flow through the devices.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

260
 8 AS-B Servers
8.12 AS-B Server Device Installation

Figure: AS-B servers installed on horizontal DIN rails in a cabinet

To prevent the modules from sliding sideways on the DIN rail, fix an end clamp
for DIN 35 (part number SXWDINEND10001) tightly against the rightmost device
on the rail. The end clamp is easily removed if you bend the snap lock open with
a screwdriver.

Figure: End clamp for DIN 35 fixed across the DIN rail

The terminal blocks are removable, which means that they can be wired before
the AS-B server is supplied. Replacing am AS-B server is done in seconds
because no terminal wiring is affected. The terminal blocks are delivered with the
device. Use only terminal blocks delivered with the device or ordered from
Schneider Electric. Spare terminal blocks can be ordered from Schneider Electric
using the part number SXWASBCON10001.
You can use the AS-B installer kit (part number SXWASBINS10001) to wire the
terminal blocks before the AS-B server is supplied. The kit consists of an AS-B
server enclosure without electronics inside.
Install only a wired terminal block that matches the labeling of the terminals on
the device. A mismatch can cause electric shock and damage the electronics in
the device.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

261
8 AS-B Servers
8.12 AS-B Server Device Installation

WARNING
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR DEVICE ELECTRONICS DAMAGE
Install only a wired terminal block that matches the labeling of the terminals on
the device.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

If the labels on the wires do not indicate the intended terminals, consult the
control panel documentation to determine the intended terminals.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

262
 8 AS-B Servers
8.13 Installing an AS-B Server on a DIN Rail

8.13 Installing an AS-B Server on a DIN Rail

You install an AS-B server on a horizontal DIN rail to ensure that the device is
securely fastened and to allow sufficient cooling air flow through the device.
For more information, see section 8.12 “AS-B Server Device Installation” on page
260.

To install an AS-B server on a DIN rail

1. Ensure that the DIN rail is horizontal.

NOTICE
Install the device on a horizontal DIN rail. This position provides sufficient
cooling air flow through the device. Installation on a vertical DIN rail can
reduce the life span of the device.

2. Pull down the DIN rail clips.

3. Hook the device onto the top of the DIN rail.

4. Push the device fully onto the DIN rail and release the DIN rail clips.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

263
8 AS-B Servers
8.14 Installing a Terminal Block on an AS-B Server

8.14 Installing a Terminal Block on an AS-B

Server
You install the terminal blocks on an AS-B server to add or enable wiring for the
device.
For more information, see section 8.12 “AS-B Server Device Installation” on page
260.

WARNING
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR DEVICE ELECTRONICS DAMAGE
Install only a wired terminal block that matches the labeling of the terminals on
the device.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Use only terminal blocks delivered with the device or ordered from Schneider
Electric using the part number SXWASBCON10001.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not push the terminal block straight down into the connector header as this
may crack the header.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

To install a terminal block on an AS-B server

1. Ensure that you have the correct terminal blocks.
2. If the terminal block is wired, ensure that the labels on the wires match the
labeling of the terminals on the device.
3. Insert the terminal block at an angle against the back wall of the connector
header.

4. Press and roll the terminal block into the connector header.

Continued on next page

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

264
 8 AS-B Servers
8.14 Installing a Terminal Block on an AS-B Server

5. Continue until you hear a click sound, which indicates that the terminal block
is fully engaged with the connector header.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

265
8 AS-B Servers
8.15 Removing a Terminal Block from an AS-B Server

8.15 Removing a Terminal Block from an AS-

B Server
You remove a terminal block from an AS-B server to replace the device.
For more information, see section 8.12 “AS-B Server Device Installation” on page
260.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
De-energize the high-voltage equipment connected to the relay outputs before
removing the terminal block. More than one disconnect switch may be required
to de-energize the equipment before servicing.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

To remove a terminal block from an AS-B server

1. Insert a small screwdriver in the slot between the terminal block and the
connector header.

2. Gently pry the terminal block at an angle away from the connector header.

3. Remove the terminal block from the connector header.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

266
 8 AS-B Servers
8.16 Wiring a Terminal Block on an AS-B Server

8.16 Wiring a Terminal Block on an AS-B

Server
You wire the terminal blocks installed on an AS-B server to connect I/O devices,
RS-485 network devices, and power.
For more information, see section 8.12 “AS-B Server Device Installation” on page
260.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
Disconnect the power supply and other high voltage equipment before wiring.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Always use the recommended cables (or wires with larger cross-sectional
area). For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

NOTE: You can use the AS-B installer kit (part number SXWASBINS10001)
to wire the terminal blocks before the AS-B server is supplied. The kit
consists of an AS-B server enclosure without electronics inside.

To wire a terminal block on an AS-B server

1. Disconnect the mains supply and other high voltage equipment.
2. Ensure that the correct terminal block is used and that it is properly installed
on the AS-B server. For more information, see section 8.14 “Installing a
Terminal Block on an AS-B Server” on page 264.
3. Loosen the screws of the terminal block.
4. Strip approximately 7 mm (0.3 inch) of the insulation from the end of each
wire.
5. Insert the stripped end of each wire fully into its intended terminal. Ensure
that no bare wire strands extend from the terminal.
6. Tigthen the screws using a small flat-blade screwdriver. Ensure that the
screws are fully tightened. Use the following recommended screw tightening
torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in).

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

267
8 AS-B Servers
8.17 Printing a Wiring List for the I/O Bus

8.17 Printing a Wiring List for the I/O Bus

You print an I/O wiring list for the I/O bus that describes which I/O points are
associated with each Central IO module. You use the printed copy of this list to
help wire the I/O bus network.
NOTE: If a Module ID is Null, you cannot print the wiring list. If a channel is
Null, the I/O point labels do not display in the wiring list.
For more information, see section 4.13 “I/O Bus Parts” on page 90.

To print a wiring list for the I/O bus

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, click the IO Bus on an
automation server.
2. On the Actions menu, click Print IO wiring list.

3. In the Print IO Wiring List dialog box, click the Printer icon .
4. To print a wiring list for a single Central IO module, right-click the selected
Central IO module.
5. Click Print IO wiring list.

6. Click the Printer icon .

Observe that the complete path to the Central IO module is displayed on the title
bar for the I/O wiring list.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

268
 8 AS-B Servers
8.18 Printing a Label to Identify I/O Channels

8.18 Printing a Label to Identify I/O Channels

You print labels to identify I/O channels on the placard of a Central IO module
much the same way you label circuits on an electrical panel. You accept the
default names for the I/O point labels or customize the I/O point names for your
own application.
NOTE: If a Module ID is Null, you cannot print the label. If a channel is Null,
the I/O point labels do not display in the Print IO Module Labels dialog box.

To print a label to identify I/O channels

1. In WorkStation, in the System Tree pane, expand the IO Bus on an
automation server.
2. In the List View, right-click the Central IO module, onboard IO module, the
entire IO Bus folder, or multiple Central IO modules.
3. Click Print IO module labels.
4. In the Print IO Module Labels dialog box, select Blank Label Text to print
labels with only the channel number with no additional label text.
NOTE: The label text prints in red if the text is too long to fit on the
label.
5. In the Paper Type box, select a paper type.
6. Click Print to print the Central IO module label or Save to save any changes
to the point’s label text property.
7. For an AS-B server onboard Central IO module, cut along the dotted lines
and fold the label along the fold edge to fit on the placard.
The label is properly sized to fit on the placard of the Central IO module.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

269
8 AS-B Servers
8.19 Powering Up an AS-B Server

8.19 Powering Up an AS-B Server

You perform the following steps to power up an AS-B server.
For more information, see section 8.12 “AS-B Server Device Installation” on page
260.

To power up an AS-B server

1. Check that all wiring is correct.
2. Ensure that 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24-30 VDC power is supplied to terminal
numbers 1 to 2.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not connect 230 VAC or 110 VAC to any terminal.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

3. Ensure that the ground cable is connected to terminal number 3.

4. After powering up, check that the Status LED changes to a constant green
light after about a minute.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

270
9 SpaceLogic Device General
Information

Topics
Status LEDs
Automation Server Reset Functions
Resetting a Automation Server to DFU Mode
 9 SpaceLogic Device General Information
9.1 Status LEDs

9.1 Status LEDs

The Status LED on the front of the automation devices changes color and flashes
to indicate the status of the device.

Figure: . Location of the Status LED on different SpaceLogic device models

The remaining LEDs on the front differ in number and meaning for the different
devices and are explained in the sections about the specific device.

9.1.1 Automation Server Status LED

The automation server Status LED indicates the condition of the device.

Table: Automation Server Status LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, constant Normal operation, status OK

Green, flashing (~1 Hz) Device restarting, wait

Red, constant Detected error, attention required

Red, flashing (~1 Hz) Device operates, but a problem needs

attention

Red/green, flashing (~1 Hz) Firmware being downloaded, wait

Red/green, vague Device firmware upgrade mode, wait

No light No input power

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

273
9 SpaceLogic Device General Information
9.1 Status LEDs

9.1.2 Central IO Module Status LED

The Central IO module Status LED indicates the condition of the device.

Table: Central IO Module Status LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, constant Online and configured (at least one

channel/point downloaded successfully)

Green, flashing (200 ms ON, 200 ms OFF) Online and unconfigured (physical module
that either matches/mismatches logical
module)

Green, slow flashing (approximately every Low power mode (saves energy)
3 s)

Red, constant Error requiring attention (for example, the

input voltage is too low)

Red, flashing (100 ms ON, 100 ms OFF) Offline with respect to the automation
server (both configured and unconfigured
modules)

Red/Green, flashing (green 100 ms, red Bootloader mode (downloading data)
100 ms)

No light No input power

9.1.3 PS-24V Power Supply Status LED

The PS-24V power supply Status LED indicates the condition of the device.

Table: Power Supply Status LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, constant Output voltage and load OK

Red/green, flashing Output slightly overloaded

Red, constant Output overloaded

No light No input power

9.1.4 MP Controller Status LED

The MP controller Status LED indicates the condition of the device.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

274
 9 SpaceLogic Device General Information
9.1 Status LEDs

Table: MP Controller Status LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, constant Normal operation, status OK

MP controller firmware application running

Green, flashing (~1 Hz) Device restarting, wait

MP controller firmware application running

Red, constant Detected error, attention required

Red, flashing (~1 Hz) Device operates, but a problem needs

attention

Red/green, flashing (~1 Hz) MP controller I/O board receiving software

upgrade, wait

Amber, constant MP controller firmware boot applet running

Amber, flash Device restarting, wait

MP controller firmware boot applet started

9.1.5 IP-IO Module Status LED

The IP-IO module Status LED indicates the condition of the device.

Table: IP-IO Module Status LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, constant Normal operation, status OK

IP-IO module firmware application running

Green, flashing (~1 Hz) Device restarting, wait

IP-IO module firmware application running

Red, constant Detected error, attention required

Red, flashing (~1 Hz) Device operates, but a problem needs

attention

Red/green, flashing (~1 Hz) IP-IO module I/O board receiving software
upgrade, wait

Amber, constant IP-IO module firmware boot applet running

Amber, flash Device restarting, wait

IP-IO module firmware boot applet started

9.1.6 RP Controller Status LED

The RP controller Status LED indicates the condition of the device.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

275
9 SpaceLogic Device General Information
9.1 Status LEDs

Table: RP Controller Status LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, constant Normal operation, status OK

RP controller firmware application running
No Bluetooth activity

Blue, constant Normal operation, status OK

RP controller firmware application running
Bluetooth connection is active

Green 3 seconds, blue 1 second Normal operation, status OK

RP controller firmware application running
Bluetooth advertising is active

Green, flashing (~1 Hz) Device restarting, wait

RP controller firmware application running

Red, constant Detected error, attention required

Red, flashing (~1 Hz) Device operates, but a problem needs

attention

Red/green, flashing (~1 Hz) RP I/O board receiving software upgrade,

wait

Amber, constant RP controller firmware boot applet running

Amber, flash Device restarting, wait

RP controller firmware boot applet started

White, transient Device starting, wait

White, constant RP controller firmware not running,

attention required (contact product support)

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

276
 9 SpaceLogic Device General Information
9.2 Automation Server Reset Functions

9.2 Automation Server Reset Functions

There are four different types of reset for the automation servers: warm start, cold
start, reset, and reset to DFU mode. Depending on the type of reset, the
automation server can be reset using the reset button or a command from
WorkStation.

Figure: . Location of reset button and USB device port on different server models

You can use a straigthened segment of a paper clip or a similar tool to press the
reset button.

Table: Automation Server Reset Functions

Type Triggered by Description Variable values Configuration, IP settings
Historic
database

Warm start Command from Stops the Affected Retained Retained

WorkStation automation according to the
server configured retain
application and levels for the
then restarts the variables
application.

Cold start Command from Stops the Affected Retained Retained

WorkStation automation according to the
server configured retain
application and levels for the
then restarts the variables
application.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

277
9 SpaceLogic Device General Information
9.2 Automation Server Reset Functions

Continued
Type Triggered by Description Variable values Configuration, IP settings
Historic
database

Reset Short push on Stops the Affected Retained Retained

Reset button automation according to the
server configured retain
Power return
application and levels for the
the operating variables
system and then
restarts the
operating system
and the
application.

Reset to DFU 3 pushes on Puts the Not applicable Not retained Not retained
mode Reset button automation
within 2 seconds server into DFU
mode, which
enables Device
Administrator to
communicate
with the server.

Parameters and variables that are used to define the system or contain important
data in the automation server can be retained in a permanent memory. These
parameters and variables are automatically saved in the event of power failure,
or request for restart and are reloaded after startup.
You can define what kind of events that retention for the parameters and
variables should apply.

9.2.1 Retain Levels for Variables

Variables have a configurable retain level, which controls if the value of the
variable is retained after a restart of the automation server. There are three retain
levels:
• No
• Warm start
• Cold start
The following table lists what is retained after a warm start, cold start, or reset
based on the configured retain level.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

278
 9 SpaceLogic Device General Information
9.2 Automation Server Reset Functions

Table: Retained Variable Values Depending on Reset Type and Retain Level
Reset type Retain level: Retain level: Retain level:
No Warm start Cold start

Warm start Default valuea Variable retains last Variable retains last
value configured by value configured by
Values configured a user. a user.
by a user or
application are lost. Values configured Values configured
by an application are by an application are
retained. retained.

Cold start Default valuea Variable retains last Variable retains last
value configured by value configured by
Values configured
a user. a user.
by a user or
application are lost. Values configured Values configured
by an application are by an application are
lost. retained.

Reset Default valuea Variable retains last Variable retains last

value configured by value configured by
Values configured
a user. a user.
by a user or
application are lost. Values configured Values configured
by an application are by an application are
retained. retained.

a) Default value is the value the variable gets when it is created.

For more information, see the Retain Level topic on WebHelp.

9.2.2 Configuration and Historic Database

A number of parameters describe the current configuration. The historic
database contains information collected from different sources. Parameters and
historic database are retained at both Warm and Cold start.

9.2.3 DFU Mode

The Device Firmware Upgrade mode can be used if the automation server does
not communicate in its normal operating mode. In the DFU mode, with a PC
connected to the USB device port on the automation server, the Device
Administrator can be used to update the firmware. For more information, see
section 9.3 “Resetting a Automation Server to DFU Mode” on page 280.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

279
9 SpaceLogic Device General Information
9.3 Resetting a Automation Server to DFU Mode

9.3 Resetting a Automation Server to DFU

Mode
If the automation server firmware is damaged, the automation server can be put
in DFU (Device Firmware Upgrade) mode to be able to communicate on the USB
device port.
After the reset operation and the initial boot process, the upgrade process can be
started, using the USB device port. It is also possible to retrieve debug
information from the device.
For more information, see section 9.2 “Automation Server Reset Functions” on
page 277.

To reset a Automation Server to DFU mode

1. Start the Device Administrator. For more information, see the Connecting to
an Automation Server Using the USB Device Port topic on WebHelp.
2. On the automation server, press the Reset button 3 times within 2 seconds.

3. Use a USB cable to connect the USB device port on the automation server
with a USB port on the PC.
4. Ensure that the automation server is displayed in the list and DFU mode is
displayed in the Device status column.
The automation server is now ready for the upgrade procedure. For more
information, see the Uploading and Upgrading a SmartX Server topic on
WebHelp.
Alternatively, the Device Administrator can now be used to fetch saved debug
data. For more information, see the Getting Automation Server Debug
Information topic on WebHelp.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

280
10 MP-C Controllers

Topics
MP-C Controllers
MP-C Models
MP-C Onboard I/O
MP-C Built-in Power Supply
MP-C Screw Terminals
MP-C-15A Screw Terminals
MP-C-18A Screw Terminals
MP-C-18B Screw Terminals
MP-C-24A Screw Terminals
MP-C-36A Screw Terminals
MP-C Device Installation
Installing MP-C on a DIN Rail
Installing MP-C on a Flat Surface
Installing MP-C Display
Installing a Terminal Block on MP-C
Removing a Terminal Block from MP-C
Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-C
Powering Up MP-C
Universal Inputs/Outputs
Relay Outputs
 High Power Relay Outputs
10 Triac Outputs
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.1 MP-C Controllers

10.1 MP-C Controllers

The MP-C controller is a multi-purpose, fully programmable, IP based field
controller. The MP-C models offer a flexible mix of I/O point types that suits a
wide range of HVAC applications. MP-C is a native SpaceLogic device, which
can either be used as a standalone BACnet/IP field controller or as part of an
EcoStruxure BMS with a AS-P or AS-B server, or an Enterprise Server, as the
parent server.
MP-C allows for flexible control solutions due to the dual Ethernet ports, the
interface to SpaceLogic Sensors, and the versatile mix of universal
inputs/outputs, triac outputs, relay outputs, and high power relay outputs.
When MP-Cs are part of an EcoStruxure BMS, you can take full advantage of the
existing EcoStruxure Building Operation engineering tools.
The MP-C can be installed on a DIN rail or other flat surface inside a cabinet.
All MP-C models can be equipped with MP-C Display, which is an optional add-
on module for output override. The MP-C Display can also be used to view and
locally configure inputs and outputs.

Figure: MP-C

10.1.1 MP-C Models

The MP-C comes in five models with different I/O point count and different I/O
point mix.
For more information, see section 10.2 “MP-C Models” on page 290.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

283
10 MP-C Controllers
10.1 MP-C Controllers

10.1.2 MP-C Onboard I/O

The MP-C models offer a versatile mix of I/O point types that match a wide
variety of applications. Most of the I/O points are universal inputs/outputs, which
are highly flexible and can be configured as either inputs or outputs.
For more information, see section 10.3 “MP-C Onboard I/O” on page 291.

10.1.3 Output Override Function (Optional)

The output override function allows you to manually override outputs. This
function can be used for testing, commissioning, and maintenance of equipment.
For more information, see section 13.1.7 “” on page 428.

10.1.4 MP-C Built-in Power Supply

The MP-C has a built-in power supply designed to accommodate 24 VAC at
50/60 Hz or 24 to 30 VDC input power.
For more information, see section 10.4 “MP-C Built-in Power Supply” on page
293.

10.1.5 BACnet/IP Device Memory

BACnet/IP devices have three types of memory:
• Flash memory: for boot loader, operating system, application software, and
configuration storage
• RAM: for runtime operation
• FRAM non-volatile memory: for data retention in the case of power outage
For more information, see section 16.5 “BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory” on
page 574.

10.1.6 BACnet/IP Controller Supported Building

Standards
One of the cornerstones of the EcoStruxure BMS is support for open standards.
As a result, the BACnet/IP controller complies with the BACnet open standard,
one of the most popular standards for buildings.
For more information, see section 16.6 “BACnet/IP controller Supported Building
Standards” on page 575.

10.1.7 MP Controller Communication Ports

The MP controller contains a combination of Ethernet, USB, and SpaceLogic
Sensor communication ports.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

284
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.1 MP-C Controllers

For more information, see section 12.3 “MP Controller Communication Ports” on
page 411.

10.1.8 BACnet/IP Controller Sensor Bus

The BACnet/IP controller provides a sensor bus, which allows SpaceLogic
Sensors to be connected to the controller.
For more information, see section 12.4 “MP Controller Sensor Bus” on page 412.

10.1.9 MP-C Screw Terminals

The MP-C is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device. The MP-C
uses pluggable terminal blocks, which are easy to install and remove from the
device.
For more information, see section 10.5 “MP-C Screw Terminals” on page 294.

10.1.10 MP Controller LEDs

There are five LEDs on the front panel of the MP controller.
For more information, see section 12.6 “MP Controller LEDs” on page 419.

10.1.11 MP Controller Reset Modes

You can reset and restart the MP controllers in different ways depending on how
long you press the reset button. The resets and restarts can affect the retention
of values after restart based on the retain levels configured for the variables.
For more information, see section 12.7 “MP Controller Reset Modes” on page
421.

10.1.12 MP-C Device Installation

The MP-C can be installed on a DIN rail or other flat surface inside a cabinet.
For more information, see section 10.11 “MP-C Device Installation” on page 315.

10.1.13 Wiring
The wiring recommendations provide guidance regarding wiring of the Central IO
modules, automation servers, BACnet/IP devices, RP controller expansion
modules, and Operator Display.
For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

285
10 MP-C Controllers
10.1 MP-C Controllers

10.1.14 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management

Using WorkStation, you can update the firmware of multiple BACnet/IP devices
and their attached SpaceLogic Sensor devices at the same time with minimum
downtime. In particular, the universal upgrade package simplifies the update
process and requires minimal user involvement and coordination.
TIP: SpaceLogic Sensor devices are supported by the BACnet/IP controllers
- MP and RP controllers.
For more information, see section 18.17 “BACnet/IP Device Firmware
Management” on page 882.

10.1.15 Specifications
AC input

Nominal voltage 24 VAC

Operating voltage range +/- 20 %

Frequency 50/60 Hz

Maximum power consumption (MP-C-15A, -18A, -18B) 22 VA

Maximum power consumption (MP-C-24A) 28 VA

Maximum power consumption (MP-C-36A) 33 VA

Power input protection MOV suppression and internal fuse

DC input

Nominal voltage 24 to 30 VDC

Operating voltage range 21 to 33 VDC

Maximum power consumption (MP-C-15A, -18A, -18B) 12 W

Maximum power consumption (MP-C-24A) 15 W

Maximum power consumption (MP-C-36A) 18 W

Power input protection MOV suppression and internal fuse

Environment

Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) at normal operationa

-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) for rooftop applications, horizontal installation onlya
a) MP-C Display has an operating temperature range of -30 to +60 °C (-22 to +140 °F).

Ambient temperature, storage -40 to +70 °C (-40 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

286
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.1 MP-C Controllers

Material

Plastic flame rating UL94-5V

Ingress protection rating IP 20

Mechanical

Dimensions (MP-C-15A, -18A, -18B) 153 W x 110 H x 64 D mm (6.0 W x 4.3 H x 2.5 D in.)

Dimensions (MP-C-24A, -36A) 234 W x 110 H x 64 D mm (9.2 W x 4.3 H x 2.5 D in.)

Weight, MP-C-15A
Including terminal blocks 0.358 kg (0.789 lb)

Weight, MP-C-18A
Including terminal blocks 0.371 kg (0.818 lb)

Weight, MP-C-18B
Including terminal blocks 0.361 kg (0.796 lb)

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

287
10 MP-C Controllers
10.1 MP-C Controllers

Weight, MP-C-24A
Including terminal blocks 0.495 kg (1.091 lb)

Weight, MP-C-36A
Including terminal blocks 0.547 kg (1.206 lb)

Installation DIN rail or other flat surface inside a cabinet

Terminal blocks Removable

Real-time clock

Accuracy, at 25 °C (77 °F) +/-1 minute per month

Backup time, at 25 °C (77 °F) 7 days minimum

Communication ports

Ethernet Dual 10/100BASE-TX (RJ45)

USB 1 USB 2.0 device port (mini-B)

1 USB 2.0 host port (type-A), 5 VDC, 2.5 W

Sensor bus 24 VDC, 2 W, RS-485 (RJ45)

Sensor bus protection Transient voltage suppressors on communication and power signals

Communications

BACnet BACnet/IP, port configurable, default 47808

BTL B-AAC (BACnet Advanced Application Controller)a
a) See the BTL Product Catalog for up-to-date details on BTL listed firmware revisions on BACnet
International's home page.

CPU

Frequency 500 MHz

Type ARM Cortex-A7 dual-core

DDR3 SDRAM 128 MB

NOR flash memory 32 MB

Memory backup 128 kB, FRAM, non-volatile

MP-C Display (Optional)

Removable No

Display size 36 W x 17 H mm (1.4 W x 0.7 H in.)

Display resolution 128 x 64 pixels

Display type FSTN monochrome LCD, white color transflective backlight

Power consumption max. 0.15 W (45 mA at 3.3 V)

Ambient temperature, operating -30 to +60 °C (-22 to +140 °F)

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

288
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.1 MP-C Controllers

Ambient temperature, storage -40 to +70 °C (-40 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Weight 0.035 kg (0.077 lb)

10.1.16 Internal Configuration

The MP-C internal configuration with regards to the signal ground is shown in the
following figure.

Figure: MP-C internal configuration

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

289
10 MP-C Controllers
10.2 MP-C Models

10.2 MP-C Models

The MP-C comes in five models with different I/O point count and different I/O
point mix.
For more information, see section 10.3 “MP-C Onboard I/O” on page 291.
Model I/O Points

MP-C-15A 15

MP-C-18A 18

MP-C-18B 18

MP-C-24A 24

MP-C-36A 36

MP-C-15A, MP-C-18A, and MP-C-18B have the same small footprint. MP-C-24A
and MP-C-36A have a slightly larger footprint.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

290
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.3 MP-C Onboard I/O

10.3 MP-C Onboard I/O

The MP-C models offer a versatile mix of I/O point types that match a wide
variety of applications. Most of the I/O points are universal inputs/outputs, which
are highly flexible and can be configured as either inputs or outputs.

Table: I/O Point Types by MP-C Models

I/O Point Types MP-C-15A MP-C-18A MP-C-18B MP-C-24A MP-C-36A

Universal I/O 8 10 10 16 20
Type Ub

Universal I/O - - - 4 8
Type Uc

Triac outputs 6 4 8 - -

Relay outputs - 3 - 4 8
Form A

High power relay 1 1 - - -

outputs
Form A

By utilizing its onboard I/O with connected field devices, such as sensors and
actuators, the MP-C controls and supervises equipment that can be used to suit a
wide range of HVAC applications.

10.3.1 Universal Inputs/Outputs

The universal inputs/outputs are ideal for any mix of temperature, pressure, flow,
status points, and similar point types in a building control system.
For more information, see section 10.19.3 “” on page 339.

10.3.2 Relay Outputs

The relay outputs support digital Form A point types. The Form A relays are
designed for direct load applications.
For more information, see section 10.20.2 “” on page 343.

10.3.3 High Power Relay Outputs

The main application of the high power relay output is to power an electrical
heating element directly.
For more information, see section 10.21.2 “” on page 345.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

291
10 MP-C Controllers
10.3 MP-C Onboard I/O

10.3.4 Triac Outputs

The triac outputs can be used in many applications to switch 24 VAC on or off for
external loads such as actuators, relays, or indicators. Triacs are silent and do
not suffer from relay contact wear.
For more information, see section 10.22.2 “” on page 348.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

292
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.4 MP-C Built-in Power Supply

10.4 MP-C Built-in Power Supply

The MP-C has a built-in power supply designed to accommodate 24 VAC at
50/60 Hz or 24 to 30 VDC input power.
The built-in power supply is based on a half-wave rectified, non-isolated design,
which is complemented with electronic protection components for transient
protection, overload protection, and EMC compliance.
To power the controller, you can use a transformer or a DC power supply:
• Class 2 (EN 60742) transformer supplying a nominal 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz
• DC power supply supplying a nominal 24 to 30 VDC with the required output
power
For more information, see section 10.1.15 “” on page 286.
A separate, local 24 VAC step-down transformer is recommended to power each
BACnet/IP device. The transformer with appropriate VA rating may also be used
to power the locally connected I/O devices. The separate transformer helps to
avoid problems with ground loops, 24 VAC induced EMI on LAN, low or distorted
AC voltage level at the controller, and excess transformer load due to the half-
wave power supply, which can result in intermittent equipment detected faults,
loss of communications, or equipment damage.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Use a separate, local 24 VAC step-down transformer to power each BACnet/IP
device.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

NOTICE
CONTROLLER DEVICE DAMAGE
Do not power the SpaceLogic device with a 24 VAC transformer that is used to
power devices that contain non-isolated full-wave rectifier power supplies.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

293
10 MP-C Controllers
10.5 MP-C Screw Terminals

10.5 MP-C Screw Terminals

The MP-C is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device. The MP-C
uses pluggable terminal blocks, which are easy to install and remove from the
device.
The only exception is the high power relay outputs on the MP-C-15A and MP-C-
18A models, which use a two-position fixed terminal block due to current
requirements.
Spare terminal blocks can be ordered separately using the part number
SXWMPCCON1.
The wiring recommendations are provided separately. For more information, see
section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.

10.5.1 MP-C-15A Screw Terminals

MP-C-15A has 15 I/O points and the controller is equipped with six pluggable
terminal blocks and one fixed terminal block.
For more information, see section 10.6 “MP-C-15A Screw Terminals” on page
296.

10.5.2 MP-C-18A Screw Terminals

MP-C-18A has 18 I/O points and the controller is equipped with seven pluggable
terminal blocks and one fixed terminal block.
For more information, see section 10.7 “MP-C-18A Screw Terminals” on page
299.

10.5.3 MP-C-18B Screw Terminals

MP-C-18B has 18 I/O points and the controller is equipped with seven pluggable
terminal blocks.
For more information, see section 10.8 “MP-C-18B Screw Terminals” on page
302.

10.5.4 MP-C-24A Screw Terminals

MP-C-24A has 24 I/O points and the controller is equipped with seven pluggable
terminal blocks.
For more information, see section 10.9 “MP-C-24A Screw Terminals” on page
306.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

294
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.5 MP-C Screw Terminals

10.5.5 MP-C-36A Screw Terminals

MP-C-36A has 36 I/O points and the controller is equipped with 10 pluggable
terminal blocks.
For more information, see section 10.10 “MP-C-36A Screw Terminals” on page
310.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

295
10 MP-C Controllers
10.6 MP-C-15A Screw Terminals

10.6 MP-C-15A Screw Terminals

MP-C-15A has 15 I/O points and the controller is equipped with six pluggable
terminal blocks and one fixed terminal block.
Recommended screw tightening torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in)

Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, MP-C-15A

The terminal blocks are used as follows:

• One 3-position pluggable terminal block for the power input
• Three 3-position pluggable terminal blocks for the six triac outputs
• One 2-position fixed terminal block for the high power relay output
• Two 6-position pluggable terminal blocks for the eight universal
inputs/outputs of type Ub

Table: Screw Terminals, MP-C-15A

Terminal number Designation Usage

Power input

1 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 22 VA

Positive lead (+) when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 12 W

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

296
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.6 MP-C-15A Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

2 /– Earth ground lead of 24

VAC transformer connects
to terminals 2 or 3.
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.
Negative (–) lead when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 12 W

3 Terminal 3 is provided for

convenience to connect to
protective earth ground
(optional).
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.

Triac outputs

4 DO1 Triac output

5 COM1 Common connection for

DO1 and DO2
The COM terminal can be
connected to 24 VAC for
high-side switching or to
ground for low-side
switching.

6 DO2 Triac output

7 DO3 Triac output

8 COM2 Common connection for

DO3 and DO4
The COM terminal can be
connected to 24 VAC for
high-side switching or to
ground for low-side
switching.

9 DO4 Triac output

10 DO5 Triac output

11 COM3 Common connection for

DO5 and DO6
The COM terminal can be
connected to 24 VAC for
high-side switching or to
ground for low-side
switching.

12 DO6 Triac output

High power relay outputs

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

297
10 MP-C Controllers
10.6 MP-C-15A Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

16 DO7 High power relay output,

type Form A

17 DO7 High power relay output,

type Form A

Universal inputs/outputs

18 Ub1 Universal input/output, type

Ub

19 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

20 Ub2 Universal input/output, type

Ub

21 Ub3 Universal input/output, type

Ub

22 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

23 Ub4 Universal input/output, type

Ub

24 Ub5 Universal input/output, type

Ub

25 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

26 Ub6 Universal input/output, type

Ub

27 Ub7 Universal input/output, type

Ub

28 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

29 Ub8 Universal input/output, type

Ub

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

298
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.7 MP-C-18A Screw Terminals

10.7 MP-C-18A Screw Terminals

MP-C-18A has 18 I/O points and the controller is equipped with seven pluggable
terminal blocks and one fixed terminal block.
Recommended screw tightening torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in)

Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, MP-C-18A

The terminal blocks are used as follows:

• One 3-position pluggable terminal block for the power input
• Two 3-position pluggable terminal blocks for the four triac outputs
• One 6-position pluggable terminal block for the three relay outputs
• One 2-position fixed terminal block for the high power relay output
• Two 6-position plus one 3-position pluggable terminal blocks for the 10
universal inputs/outputs of type Ub

Table: Screw Terminals, MP-C-18A

Terminal number Designation Usage

Power input

1 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 22 VA

Positive lead (+) when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 12 W

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

299
10 MP-C Controllers
10.7 MP-C-18A Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

2 /– Earth ground lead of 24

VAC transformer connects
to terminals 2 or 3.
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.
Negative (–) lead when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 12 W

3 Terminal 3 is provided for

convenience to connect to
protective earth ground
(optional).
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.

Triac outputs

4 DO1 Triac output

5 COM1 Common connection for

DO1 and DO2
The COM terminal can be
connected to 24 VAC for
high-side switching or to
ground for low-side
switching.

6 DO2 Triac output

7 DO3 Triac output

8 COM2 Common connection for

DO3 and DO4
The COM terminal can be
connected to 24 VAC for
high-side switching or to
ground for low-side
switching.

9 DO4 Triac output

Relay outputs

10 DO5 Relay output, type Form A

11 DO5 Relay output, type Form A

12 DO6 Relay output, type Form A

13 DO6 Relay output, type Form A

14 DO7 Relay output, type Form A

15 DO7 Relay output, type Form A

High power relay outputs

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

300
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.7 MP-C-18A Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

16 DO8 High power relay output,

type Form A

17 DO8 High power relay output,

type Form A

Universal inputs/outputs

18 Ub1 Universal input/output, type

Ub

19 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

20 Ub2 Universal input/output, type

Ub

21 Ub3 Universal input/output, type

Ub

22 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

23 Ub4 Universal input/output, type

Ub

24 Ub5 Universal input/output, type

Ub

25 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

26 Ub6 Universal input/output, type

Ub

27 Ub7 Universal input/output, type

Ub

28 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

29 Ub8 Universal input/output, type

Ub

30 Ub9 Universal input/output, type

Ub

31 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

32 Ub10 Universal input/output, type

Ub

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

301
10 MP-C Controllers
10.8 MP-C-18B Screw Terminals

10.8 MP-C-18B Screw Terminals

MP-C-18B has 18 I/O points and the controller is equipped with seven pluggable
terminal blocks.
Recommended screw tightening torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in)

Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, MP-C-18B

The terminal blocks are used as follows:

• One 3-position pluggable terminal block for the power input
• Two 3-position plus one 6-position pluggable terminal blocks for the eight
triac outputs
• Two 6-position plus one 3-position pluggable terminal blocks for the 10
universal inputs/outputs of type Ub

Table: Screw Terminals, MP-C-18B

Terminal number Designation Usage

Power input

1 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 22 VA

Positive lead (+) when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 12 W

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

302
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.8 MP-C-18B Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

2 /– Earth ground lead of 24

VAC transformer connects
to terminals 2 or 3.
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.
Negative (–) lead when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 12 W

3 Terminal 3 is provided for

convenience to connect to
protective earth ground
(optional).
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.

Triac outputs

4 DO1 Triac output

5 COM1 Common connection for

DO1 and DO2
The COM terminal can be
connected to 24 VAC for
high-side switching or to
ground for low-side
switching.

6 DO2 Triac output

7 DO3 Triac output

8 COM2 Common connection for

DO3 and DO4
The COM terminal can be
connected to 24 VAC for
high-side switching or to
ground for low-side
switching.

9 DO4 Triac output

10 DO5 Triac output

11 COM3 Common connection for

DO5 and DO6
The COM terminal can be
connected to 24 VAC for
high-side switching or to
ground for low-side
switching.

12 DO6 Triac output

13 DO7 Triac output

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

303
10 MP-C Controllers
10.8 MP-C-18B Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

14 COM4 Common connection for

DO7 and DO8
The COM terminal can be
connected to 24 VAC for
high-side switching or to
ground for low-side
switching.

15 DO8 Triac output

Universal inputs/outputs

18 Ub1 Universal input/output, type

Ub

19 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

20 Ub2 Universal input/output, type

Ub

21 Ub3 Universal input/output, type

Ub

22 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

23 Ub4 Universal input/output, type

Ub

24 Ub5 Universal input/output, type

Ub

25 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

26 Ub6 Universal input/output, type

Ub

27 Ub7 Universal input/output, type

Ub

28 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

29 Ub8 Universal input/output, type

Ub

30 Ub9 Universal input/output, type

Ub

31 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

304
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.8 MP-C-18B Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

32 Ub10 Universal input/output, type

Ub

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

305
10 MP-C Controllers
10.9 MP-C-24A Screw Terminals

10.9 MP-C-24A Screw Terminals

MP-C-24A has 24 I/O points and the controller is equipped with seven pluggable
terminal blocks.
Recommended screw tightening torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in)

Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, MP-C-24A

The terminal blocks are used as follows:

• One 3-position pluggable terminal block for the power input
• One 6-position pluggable terminal block for the four universal inputs/outputs
of type Uc
• One 8-position pluggable terminal block for the four relay outputs
• Four 6-position pluggable terminal blocks for the 16 universal inputs/outputs
of type Ub

Table: Screw Terminals, MP-C-24A

Terminal number Designation Usage

Power input

1 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 28 VA

Positive lead (+) when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 15 W

2 /– Earth ground lead of 24

VAC transformer connects
to terminals 2 or 3.
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.
Negative (–) lead when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 15 W

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

306
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.9 MP-C-24A Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

3 Terminal 3 is provided for

convenience to connect to
protective earth ground
(optional).
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.

Universal inputs/outputs

4 Uc1 Universal input/output, type

Uc

5 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

6 Uc2 Universal input/output, type

Uc

7 Uc3 Universal input/output, type

Uc

8 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

9 Uc4 Universal input/output, type

Uc

Relay outputs

16 DO1 Relay output, type Form A

17 DO1 Relay output, type Form A

18 DO2 Relay output, type Form A

19 DO2 Relay output, type Form A

20 DO3 Relay output, type Form A

21 DO3 Relay output, type Form A

22 DO4 Relay output, type Form A

23 DO4 Relay output, type Form A

Universal inputs/outputs

32 Ub1 Universal input/output, type

Ub

33 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

34 Ub2 Universal input/output, type

Ub

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

307
10 MP-C Controllers
10.9 MP-C-24A Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

35 Ub3 Universal input/output, type

Ub

36 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

37 Ub4 Universal input/output, type

Ub

38 Ub5 Universal input/output, type

Ub

39 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

40 Ub6 Universal input/output, type

Ub

41 Ub7 Universal input/output, type

Ub

42 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

43 Ub8 Universal input/output, type

Ub

44 Ub9 Universal input/output, type

Ub

45 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

46 Ub10 Universal input/output, type

Ub

47 Ub11 Universal input/output, type

Ub

48 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

49 Ub12 Universal input/output, type

Ub

50 Ub13 Universal input/output, type

Ub

51 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

52 Ub14 Universal input/output, type

Ub

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

308
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.9 MP-C-24A Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

53 Ub15 Universal input/output, type

Ub

54 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

55 Ub16 Universal input/output, type

Ub

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

309
10 MP-C Controllers
10.10 MP-C-36A Screw Terminals

10.10 MP-C-36A Screw Terminals

MP-C-36A has 36 I/O points and the controller is equipped with 10 pluggable
terminal blocks.
Recommended screw tightening torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in)

Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, MP-C-36A

The terminal blocks are used as follows:

• One 3-position pluggable terminal block for the power input
• Two 6-position pluggable terminal blocks for the eight universal
inputs/outputs of type Uc
• Two 8-position pluggable terminal blocks for the eight relay outputs
• Five 6-position pluggable terminal blocks for the 20 universal inputs/outputs
of type Ub

Table: Screw Terminals, MP-C-36A

Terminal number Designation Usage

Power input

1 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 33 VA

Positive lead (+) when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 18 W

2 /– Earth ground lead of 24

VAC transformer connects
to terminals 2 or 3.
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.
Negative (–) lead when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 18 W

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

310
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.10 MP-C-36A Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

3 Terminal 3 is provided for

convenience to connect to
protective earth ground
(optional).
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.

Universal inputs/outputs

4 Uc1 Universal input/output, type

Uc

5 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

6 Uc2 Universal input/output, type

Uc

7 Uc3 Universal input/output, type

Uc

8 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

9 Uc4 Universal input/output, type

Uc

10 Uc5 Universal input/output, type

Uc

11 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

12 Uc6 Universal input/output, type

Uc

13 Uc7 Universal input/output, type

Uc

14 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

15 Uc8 Universal input/output, type

Uc

Relay outputs

16 DO1 Relay output, type Form A

17 DO1 Relay output, type Form A

18 DO2 Relay output, type Form A

19 DO2 Relay output, type Form A

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

311
10 MP-C Controllers
10.10 MP-C-36A Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

20 DO3 Relay output, type Form A

21 DO3 Relay output, type Form A

22 DO4 Relay output, type Form A

23 DO4 Relay output, type Form A

24 DO5 Relay output, type Form A

25 DO5 Relay output, type Form A

26 DO6 Relay output, type Form A

27 DO6 Relay output, type Form A

28 DO7 Relay output, type Form A

29 DO7 Relay output, type Form A

30 DO8 Relay output, type Form A

31 DO8 Relay output, type Form A

Universal inputs/outputs

32 Ub1 Universal input/output, type

Ub

33 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

34 Ub2 Universal input/output, type

Ub

35 Ub3 Universal input/output, type

Ub

36 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

37 Ub4 Universal input/output, type

Ub

38 Ub5 Universal input/output, type

Ub

39 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

40 Ub6 Universal input/output, type

Ub

41 Ub7 Universal input/output, type

Ub

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

312
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.10 MP-C-36A Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

42 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

43 Ub8 Universal input/output, type

Ub

44 Ub9 Universal input/output, type

Ub

45 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

46 Ub10 Universal input/output, type

Ub

47 Ub11 Universal input/output, type

Ub

48 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

49 Ub12 Universal input/output, type

Ub

50 Ub13 Universal input/output, type

Ub

51 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

52 Ub14 Universal input/output, type

Ub

53 Ub15 Universal input/output, type

Ub

54 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

55 Ub16 Universal input/output, type

Ub

56 Ub17 Universal input/output, type

Ub

57 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

58 Ub18 Universal input/output, type

Ub

59 Ub19 Universal input/output, type

Ub

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

313
10 MP-C Controllers
10.10 MP-C-36A Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

60 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

61 Ub20 Universal input/output, type

Ub

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

314
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.11 MP-C Device Installation

10.11 MP-C Device Installation

The MP-C can be installed on a DIN rail or other flat surface inside a cabinet.
A DIN rail is a common and convenient technique for installing the MP-C along
with other associated control and monitoring devices. The most efficient
ventilation is achieved with the wall-mounted DIN rail oriented horizontally and
with adequate space provided between the MP-C rail and adjacent rails or other
devices.
The MP-C is typically installed horizontally (on a DIN rail going from left to right),
with the device label text in the upright position reading left to right.

Figure: MP-C installed on a horizontal DIN rail

The restrictions on installing the device in other orientations differ depending on

the operating conditions.

NOTICE
CONTROLLER DEVICE DAMAGE
Follow the installation orientation restrictions that apply to the specific
BACnet/IP device.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Under normal operating conditions of 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F), the MP-C can be
installed in the following orientations:
• Horizontally (on a DIN rail going from left to right), with the device label text
in the upright position reading left to right. See “a” in the following figure.
• Vertically (on a DIN rail going from top to bottom), which means that the
device is rotated +90 degrees or -90 degrees from the horizontal position.
See “b” and “c” in the following figure.
Installing the MP-C rotated 180 degrees from the horizontal position with device
label text up and down (“e” in the figure), face down from a ceiling (“d” in the
figure), or face up on a horizontal surface (“f” in the figure) is not supported.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

315
10 MP-C Controllers
10.11 MP-C Device Installation

Figure: Installation orientation restrictions for the MP-C operated in normal conditions, 0 to
50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

When the MP-C is used for rooftop applications, -40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F),
the device should be installed horizontally, with the device label text in the upright
position reading left to right. See “a” in the following figure. Any other installation
orientation (“b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, and “f” in the figure) may exceed the controller's
thermal specifications, which can damage the controller.

Figure: Installation orientation restrictions for the MP-C operated at -40 to +60 °C (-40 to
+140 °F)

The MP-C can be installed in a standard DIN enclosure.

When installing MP-Cs in a cabinet, it is recommended to provide ample space
between the DIN rails and controllers for sufficient ventilation.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

316
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.11 MP-C Device Installation

Figure: MP-Cs installed on horizontal DIN rails in a cabinet

To help prevent the device from sliding down or sideways on the DIN rail, install
an end clip for DIN 35 (part number SXWDINEND10001) tightly against the
bottom or rightmost device on the rail. The end clip is easily removed if you bend
the snap lock open with a screwdriver.

NOTICE
CONTROLLER DEVICE DAMAGE
Use an end clip (part number SXWDINEND10001) when you install the
BACnet/IP Controller device on a vertical DIN rail.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Figure: End clamp for DIN 35 fixed across the DIN rail

The MP-C is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device. Spare
terminal blocks can be ordered separately using the part number
SXWMPCCON10001.
The terminal blocks are removable. You can replace an MP-C in seconds
because no terminal wiring is affected. The only exception is the high power relay

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

317
10 MP-C Controllers
10.11 MP-C Device Installation

outputs on the MP-C-15A and MP-C-18A models, which use a two-position fixed
terminal block due to current requirements.
All MP-C models can be equipped with MP-C Display (part number
SXWMPCDSP10001), which is an add-on module that enables manual override
control of analog and digital outputs. The module consists of an LCD display and
keys. The module is designed for permanent installation.

Figure: MP-C Display installed on MP-C

Do not try to remove the MP-C Display module as it may damage the enclosure
and the module. Once installed, the MP-C Display module cannot be removed.

NOTICE
CONTROLLER DEVICE DAMAGE
Do not try to remove the MP-C Display module.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

318
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.12 Installing MP-C on a DIN Rail

10.12 Installing MP-C on a DIN Rail

You install MP-C on a DIN rail inside a cabinet to ensure that the device is
securely fastened and to allow for sufficient ventilation.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Use an end clip (part number SXWDINEND10001) when you install the device
on a vertical DIN rail.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

For more information, see section 10.11 “MP-C Device Installation” on page 315.

To install MP-C on a DIN rail

1. Push the DIN rail clip.

2. Hook the device onto the top of the DIN rail.

3. Push the device fully onto the DIN rail.
4. Release the DIN rail clip.
5. For a vertical DIN rail, install an end clamp below the device.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

319
10 MP-C Controllers
10.13 Installing MP-C on a Flat Surface

10.13 Installing MP-C on a Flat Surface

You install MP-C on a flat surface inside a cabinet to ensure that the device is
securely fastened and to allow for sufficient ventilation.
For more information, see section 10.11 “MP-C Device Installation” on page 315.

To install MP-C on a flat surface

1. Refer to the dimensional drawing before installing the MP-C.

2. Ensure that you have the proper mounting hardware and anchoring system.
3. Check the weight-bearing load before choosing your mounting hardware.
4. Find a suitable location and surface on which to mount the MP-C.
Continued on next page

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

320
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.13 Installing MP-C on a Flat Surface

5. Drill three mounting holes that fit number 8 or M4 screws (or anchors):
• Two holes for the top two screws on which you hang the MP-C
• One hole for the screw at the bottom that prevents the device from
being lifted off the top two screws
Use the following drawing to measure out the location of the three holes for
MP-C-15A, MP-18A, and MP-C-18B.

Use the following drawing for MP-C-24A and MP-C-36A.

NOTE: You can also use the 1:1 drill template in the installation sheet
that comes with each controller.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

321
10 MP-C Controllers
10.13 Installing MP-C on a Flat Surface

6. Install number 8 or M4 (4 mm) pan head self-tapping screws (or anchors) in

the two top holes, leaving approximately 5 mm (0.2 inch) space between the
head of the screw (or anchor) and the flat surface to accommodate the MP-
C material thickness.

7. Fit the two keyhole slots on the back of the MP-C enclosure to the heads of
the mounted screws (or anchors) and then slide the MP-C down in place on
the screws (or anchors).

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

322
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.13 Installing MP-C on a Flat Surface

8. Fit the bottom screw (or anchor) to the hole at the bottom of the MP-C and
tighten the screw (or anchor).

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

323
10 MP-C Controllers
10.14 Installing MP-C Display

10.14 Installing MP-C Display

You install an MP-C Display module on the MP-C or IP-IO module to enable
manual override control of the analog and digital outputs. The MP-C Display
module cannot be removed.

NOTICE
Take proper precautions before handling the display module to prevent
damage from electrostatic discharge.

NOTICE
Disconnect power to the MP-C or IP-IO module before installing the MP-C
Display module. Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment
damage.

For more information, see section 10.11 “MP-C Device Installation” on page 315.
For more information, see section 15.13 “IP-IO Module Device Installation” on
page 523.

To install MP-C Display

1. Disconnect power to the MP-C or IP-IO module.
2. Locate the blank face plate on the MP-C or IP-IO module.

Continued on next page

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

324
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.14 Installing MP-C Display

3. Push and hold the two tabs on the blank face plate.

4. Remove the blank face plate by pulling it straight out.

Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

325
10 MP-C Controllers
10.14 Installing MP-C Display

5. Install the MP-C Display module in place of the blank face plate.

NOTICE
CONTROLLER DEVICE DAMAGE
Do not try to remove the MP-C Display module.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

326
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.15 Installing a Terminal Block on MP-C

10.15 Installing a Terminal Block on MP-C

You install the terminal blocks on the MP-C to add or enable wiring for the device.
For more information, see section 10.11 “MP-C Device Installation” on page 315.

To install a terminal block on MP-C

1. Ensure that you have the correct terminal blocks.

NOTICE
Use only terminal blocks delivered with the MP-C or ordered from
Schneider Electric using the part number SXWMPCCON10001. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

2. If the terminal block is wired, ensure that the labels on the wires match the
labeling of the terminals on the device.

NOTICE
The terminal blocks must be plugged into the correct connector headers
on the device. Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment
damage.

3. Insert the terminal block at an angle against the back wall of the connector
header.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not push the terminal block straight down into the connector header as
this may crack the header.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

4. Press and roll the terminal block into the connector header.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

327
10 MP-C Controllers
10.15 Installing a Terminal Block on MP-C

5. Continue until you hear a click sound, which indicates that the terminal block
is fully engaged with the connector header.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

328
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.16 Removing a Terminal Block from MP-C

10.16 Removing a Terminal Block from MP-C

You remove a terminal block from MP-C in order to replace the controller.
For more information, see section 10.11 “MP-C Device Installation” on page 315.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
De-energize the high-voltage equipment connected to the relay outputs before
removing the terminal block. More than one disconnect switch may be required
to de-energize the equipment before servicing.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Disconnect the 24 VAC/DC power supply and other electrically powered
equipment before removing the terminal block.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

To remove a terminal block from MP-C

1. De-energize the high-voltage equipment connected to the relay outputs of
the controller.
This applies to all MP-C controllers except the MP-C-18B model, which
does not have relay outputs.
2. Disconnect the 24 VAC/DC power supply and other electrically powered
equipment that is connected to the controller.
3. Insert a small screwdriver in the slot between the terminal block and the
connector header.

4. Gently pry the terminal block at an angle away from the connector header.

5. Remove the terminal block from the connector header.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

329
10 MP-C Controllers
10.17 Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-C

10.17 Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-C

You wire the terminal blocks installed on the MP-C to connect I/O devices and
power.
For more information, see section 10.11 “MP-C Device Installation” on page 315.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
De-energize the high-voltage equipment connected to the relay outputs before
wiring. More than one disconnect switch may be required to de-energize the
equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Disconnect the 24 VAC/DC power supply and other electrically powered
equipment before wiring.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Always use the recommended cables (or wires with larger cross-sectional
area). For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

To wire a terminal block on MP-C

1. De-energize the high-voltage equipment connected to the relay outputs of
the controller.
This applies to all MP-C controllers except the MP-C-18B model, which
does not have relay outputs.
2. Disconnect the 24 VAC/DC power supply and other electrically powered
equipment that is connected to the controller.
3. Ensure that the correct terminal block is used and that it is properly installed
on the MP-C. For more information, see section 10.15 “Installing a Terminal
Block on MP-C” on page 327.
4. Loosen the screws of the terminal block.
5. Strip approximately 7 mm (0.3 inch) of the insulation from the end of each
wire.
6. Insert the stripped end of each wire fully into its intended terminal. Ensure
that no bare wire strands extend from the terminal.
7. Tighten the screws using a small flat-blade screwdriver. Ensure that the
screws are fully tightened. Use the following recommended screw tightening
torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in).

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

330
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.18 Powering Up MP-C

10.18 Powering Up MP-C

You perform the following steps to power up an MP-C.
For more information, see section 10.11 “MP-C Device Installation” on page 315.
For more information, see section 10.4 “MP-C Built-in Power Supply” on page
293.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Use a separate, local 24 VAC step-down transformer to power each BACnet/IP
device.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

To power up MP-C
1. Check that all wiring is correct.
2. Ensure that the 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24-30 VDC power is supplied to
terminals 1 and 2.

NOTICE
The controller input power polarity and voltage level must be strictly
observed. Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment
damage.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not connect 230 VAC or 110 VAC to any terminal.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

331
10 MP-C Controllers
10.18 Powering Up MP-C

3. Ensure that the ground cable is connected to terminal number 3.

NOTICE
Earth ground must be properly connected to avoid damage to the device
and to ensure proper operation of the device.

4. After powering up, check that the Status LED changes to a constant green
light after about a minute.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

332
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.19 Universal Inputs/Outputs

10.19 Universal Inputs/Outputs

The universal inputs/outputs are ideal for any mix of temperature, pressure, flow,
status points, and similar point types in a building control system.
As counter inputs, the universal inputs/outputs are commonly used in energy
metering applications. As RTD inputs, they are ideal for temperature points in a
building control system. As supervised inputs, they are used for security
applications where it is critical to know whether or not a wire has been cut or
shorted. These events provide a separate indication of alarms and events in the
system.
The universal inputs/outputs are capable of supporting analog outputs of type
voltage outputs. Therefore, the universal inputs/outputs support a wide range of
devices, such as actuators.
The MP-C universal inputs/outputs consist of two types: Ub and Uc. The
difference between the two types of universal inputs/outputs is that the Uc type
can also be configured as current outputs.

10.19.1 Inputs
The universal inputs/outputs can be configured to read several different types of
inputs:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current
• Temperature
• Resistive
• 2-Wire RTD temperature

Digital inputs
The external connection of a digital input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Digital input external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

333
10 MP-C Controllers
10.19 Universal Inputs/Outputs

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm

Counter inputs
A counter input uses the same hardware configuration as the digital input that is
shown in the figure above.

Supervised inputs
Supervised inputs are contact closing inputs supplemented with the supervision
of the field wiring integrity. This supervision is a required feature in many security
system applications. The supervised inputs provide the ability to detect specific
forms of tampering or trouble with the wire connections to the field contacts. The
supervision is achieved with a combination of 1 or 2 resistors attached to the
contact in the field. The resistor combination creates continuous current flow
through the field contact loop and presents a defined set of expected resistance
values for each of the defined conditions. If someone is attempting to defeat the
monitoring of the field contact by short circuiting the wire with a jumper or cutting
the wire, the objective is to detect and indicate such a condition. The resistors
need to be located at the end of the cable close to the field contact, so that the
point where there is a risk that the circuit is defeated is between the resistors and
the I/O.
Three different types of supervised input connections are supported:
• Series only
• Parallel only
• Series and parallel
Each type of supervised input connection provides a different capability in
regards to what form of tamper/trouble can be detected regardless of switch
contact open or closed condition.
Series only: A single resistor, which is connected in series with the switch, can
only detect tamper/trouble in the form of a short circuit across the wire pair. A
single series resistor supervision is frequently configured with a normally closed
field contact. This provides for the short circuit to be detected and a cut wire will
show as an alarm condition. The external connection of a series only supervised
input connection is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Series only external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RS = 1 to 10 kohm

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

334
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.19 Universal Inputs/Outputs

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Parallel only: A single resistor, which is connected in parallel with the switch,
can only detect tamper/trouble in the form of an open circuit in the field wiring
loop. With single parallel resistor supervision and use of a normally open switch
in the field, the opened wiring shows as a fault and the shorted wiring shows as
an alarm condition. The external connection of a parallel only supervised input
connection is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Parallel only external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Series and parallel: Two resistors, where one is connected in series with the
switch and one is connected in parallel with the switch, can detect tamper/trouble
conditions in the form of both an open and a shorted circuit. The external
connection of a series and parallel supervised input connection is shown in the
following figure.

Figure: Series and parallel external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

335
10 MP-C Controllers
10.19 Universal Inputs/Outputs

Voltage inputs
The external connection of a voltage input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Voltage input external connection

VG is the monitored external voltage (0 to 10 VDC).

RIN = 100 kohm

Current inputs
The external connection of a current input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Current input external connection

IG is the monitored external current (0 to 20 mA).

RSH = 47 ohm
In the internal configuration of the current input, there is a current limit circuit in
order to protect the shunt resistor from over load. The input current is limited to
40 mA with a serial connected FET transistor. If this limit is reached for 0.5
seconds, the transistor is turned off. When 5 seconds have elapsed, the
transistor is turned on again to make a new start attempt.

Temperature inputs
The external connection of a temperature input is shown in the following figure.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

336
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.19 Universal Inputs/Outputs

Figure: Temperature input external connection

RT is the monitored external thermistor.

When a universal input is used as a temperature input, VS and RPU in the internal
configuration of the universal input are used according to the following table.
Thermistor type VS RPU

20 kohm 5V 10 kohm

10 kohm 5V 10 kohm

2.2 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

1.8 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

The resulting voltage across the thermistor is measured and a temperature is

calculated dependent on the selected thermistor type.

Resistive inputs
The external connection of a resistive input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Resistive input external connection

RM is the monitored external resistance.

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

337
10 MP-C Controllers
10.19 Universal Inputs/Outputs

2-wire RTD temperature inputs

The external connection of a 2-wire RTD temperature input is shown in the
following figure.

Figure: 2-wire temperature input external connection

RT is the monitored external RTD.

RW is the wiring resistance.
VS = 1 V
RPU = 1.5 kohm
When an input is used as a 2-wire RTD temperature input, you need to specify
the wiring resistance in the software.
The input is measuring the total resulting voltage and the voltage across the RTD
is calculated. The voltage across the RTD is then converted to a raw resistance
value.

10.19.2 Outputs
Voltage outputs
The universal inputs/outputs can be configured as voltage outputs.

Figure: Voltage output internal configuration and connection of external resistive load

ROUT is approximately equal to 10 ohm.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

338
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.19 Universal Inputs/Outputs

VOUT range is 0 to 10 VDC.

RLOAD minimum is 5 kohm.

Current outputs
The universal inputs/outputs of type Uc can also be configured as current
outputs.

Figure: Current output internal configuration and connection of external resistive load

IOUT range is 0 to 20 mA.

RLOAD maximum is 650 ohm.

10.19.3 Specifications
Channels, MP-C-15A 8 Ub, Ub1 to Ub8

Channels, MP-C-18A 10 Ub, Ub1 to Ub10

Channels, MP-C-18B 10 Ub, Ub1 to Ub10

Channels, MP-C-24A 16 Ub, Ub1 to Ub16

4 Uc, Uc1 to Uc4

Channels, MP-C-36A 20 Ub, Ub1 to Ub20

8 Uc, Uc1 to Uc8

Absolute maximum ratings -0.5 to +24 VDC

A/D converter resolution 16 bits

Universal input/output protection Transient voltage suppressor on each universal input/output

Digital inputs

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, typical wetting current 2.4
mA

Minimum pulse width 150 ms

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

339
10 MP-C Controllers
10.19 Universal Inputs/Outputs

Counter inputs

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, typical wetting current 2.4
mA

Minimum pulse width 20 ms

Maximum frequency 25 Hz

Supervised inputs

5 V circuit, 1 or 2 resistors
Monitored switch combinations Series only, parallel only, and series and parallel

Resistor range 1 to 10 kohm

For a 2-resistor configuration, each resistor must have the same value +/- 5 %

Voltage inputs

Range 0 to 10 VDC

Accuracy +/-(7 mV + 0.2 % of reading)

Resolution 1.0 mV

Impedance 100 kohm

Current inputs

Range 0 to 20 mA

Accuracy +/-(0.01 mA + 0.4 % of reading)

Resolution 1 μA

Impedance 47 ohm

Resistive inputs

10 ohm to 10 kohm accuracy +/-(7 + 4 x 10-3 x R) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm

10 kohm to 60 kohm accuracy +/-(4 x 10-3 x R + 7 x 10-8 x R2) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm

Temperature inputs (thermistors)

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Supported thermistors

Honeywell 20 kohm

Type I (Continuum) 10 kohm

Type II (I/NET) 10 kohm

Type III (Satchwell) 10 kohm

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

340
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.19 Universal Inputs/Outputs

Type IV (FD) 10 kohm

Type V (FD w/ 11k shunt) Linearized 10 kohm

Satchwell D?T Linearized 10 kohm

Johnson Controls 2.2 kohm

Xenta 1.8 kohm

Balco 1 kohm

Measurement accuracy

20 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)

10 kohm, 2.2 kohm, and 1.8 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-0.75 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-1.35 °F)
-30 to +100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (-22 to +212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)

Linearized 10 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-2.0 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-3.6 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.75 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.35 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)

1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-1.8 °F)

RTD temperature inputs

Supported RTDs Pt1000, Ni1000, and LG-Ni1000

Pt1000

Sensor range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

BACnet/IP device environment Sensor range Measurement accuracy

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +70 °C (-58 to +158 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) 70 to 150 °C (158 to 302 °F) +/-0.7 °C (+/-1.3 °F)

-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-1.0 °C (+/-1.8 °F)

Ni1000

Sensor range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

BACnet/IP device environment Sensor range Measurement accuracy

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

341
10 MP-C Controllers
10.19 Universal Inputs/Outputs

LG-Ni1000

Sensor range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

BACnet/IP device environment Sensor range Measurement accuracy

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

RTD temperature wiring

Maximum wire resistance 20 ohm/wire (40 ohm total)

Maximum wire capacitance 60 nF

The wire resistance and capacitance typically corresponds to a 200 m wire.

Voltage outputs

Range 0 to 10 VDC

Accuracy +/-60 mV

Resolution 10 mV

Minimum load resistance 5 kohm

Load range -1 to +2 mA

Current outputs (Uc only)

Range 0 to 20 mA

Accuracy +/-0.2 mA

Resolution 21 µA

Load range 0 to 650 ohm

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

342
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.20 Relay Outputs

10.20 Relay Outputs

The relay outputs support digital Form A point types. The Form A relays are
designed for direct load applications.
The outputs can be configured as one of the following types:
• Digital output
• Digital pulsed output
• Pulse width modulated output
• Tristate output
• Tristate pulsed output
Consider the expected number of operation cycles specified for the relay output
(cycle life rating) when configuring the period for a pulse width modulated (PWM)
output point.

10.20.1 Outputs
The DO relay outputs are Form A digital outputs, which means the outputs are
normally open contacts with one common terminal (C) and one normally open
terminal (NO). The terminals are isolated from other circuits of the device and
from signal ground.

Figure: Form A digital output internal configuration

10.20.2 Specifications
Channels, MP-C-15A 0

Channels, MP-C-18A 3, DO5 to DO7

Channels, MP-C-18B 0

Channels, MP-C-24A 4, DO1 to DO4

Channels, MP-C-36A 8, DO1 to DO8

Contact rating 250 VAC/30 VDC, 2 A, Pilot Duty (C300)

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

343
10 MP-C Controllers
10.20 Relay Outputs

Switch type Form A Relay

Single Pole Single Throw
Normally Open

Isolation contact to system ground 3000 VAC

Cycle life (Resistive load) At least 100,000 cycles

Minimum pulse width 100 ms

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

344
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.21 High Power Relay Outputs

10.21 High Power Relay Outputs

The main application of the high power relay output is to power an electrical
heating element directly.
The outputs can be configured as one of the following types:
• Digital output
• Digital pulsed output
• Pulse width modulated output
Consider the expected number of operation cycles specified for the relay output
(cycle life rating) when configuring the period for a pulse width modulated (PWM)
output point.

10.21.1 Outputs
The DO high power relay outputs are Form A digital outputs, which means the
outputs are normally open contacts with one common terminal (C) and one
normally open terminal (NO). The terminals are isolated from signal ground.

Figure: Form A digital output internal configuration

10.21.2 Specifications
Channels, MP-C-15A 1, DO7

Channels, MP-C-18A 1, DO8

Channels, MP-C-18B 0

Channels, MP-C-24A 0

Channels, MP-C-36A 0

Contact rating 250 VAC/24 VDC, 12 A, Pilot Duty (B300)

Switch type Form A Relay

Single Pole Single Throw
Normally Open

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

345
10 MP-C Controllers
10.21 High Power Relay Outputs

Isolation contact to system ground 5000 VAC

Cycle life (Resistive load) At least 100,000 cycles

Minimum pulse width 100 ms

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

346
 10 MP-C Controllers
10.22 Triac Outputs

10.22 Triac Outputs

The triac outputs can be used in many applications to switch 24 VAC on or off for
external loads such as actuators, relays, or indicators. Triacs are silent and do
not suffer from relay contact wear.
The outputs can be configured as one of the following types:
• Digital output
• Digital pulsed output
• Pulse width modulated output
• Tristate output
• Tristate pulsed output

10.22.1 Outputs
The DO triac outputs are designed to switch 24 VAC. The common terminals can
be connected to 24 VAC or to ground. The DO triac outputs share common
terminals as follows:
• DO1 and DO2 share common terminal COM1 (on MP-C-15A, -18A, and
-18B).
• DO3 and DO4 share common terminal COM2 (on MP-C-15A, -18A, and
-18B).
• DO5 and DO6 share common terminal COM3 (on MP-C-15A and -18B).
• DO7 and DO8 share common terminal COM4 (on MP-C-18B).
The terminals are opto-isolated from the controller.

Figure: Triac output internal configuration

RV1 and RV2 are varistors (95 V, 2 J) for protection of the triac.
R1 = 47 ohm
C1 = 22 nF

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

347
10 MP-C Controllers
10.22 Triac Outputs

NOTE: Optionally, to protect the triac outputs from damage in the event of
external wiring short circuit, you can connect an in-line fuse (3 A) in series
with the COM terminal.

10.22.2 Specifications
Channels, MP-C-15A 6, DO1 to DO6

Channels, MP-C-18A 4, DO1 to DO4

Channels, MP-C-18B 8, DO1 to DO8

Channels, MP-C-24A 0

Channels, MP-C-36A 0

Output rating (for each triac output) Max. 0.5 A

Voltage 24 VAC +/-20 %

Commons COM1 for DO1 and DO2 (on MP-C-15A, -18A, -18B)
COM2 for DO3 and DO4 (on MP-C-15A, -18A, -18B)
COM3 for DO5 and DO6 (on MP-C-15A, -18B)
COM4 for DO7 and DO8 (on MP-C-18B only)
The common terminals can be connected to 24 VAC or to ground.

Common voltage, high side output 24 VAC

Common voltage, low side output 0 VAC (ground)

Minimum pulse width 100 ms

Triac output protection MOV and snubber across each triac output
MOV from triac COM to ground

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

348
11 MP-V Controllers

Topics
MP-V Controllers
MP-V Models
MP-V Onboard I/O
MP-V Damper Actuator
MP-V Air Flow Sensor
MP-V Built-in Power Supply
MP-V Screw Terminals
MP-V-7A Screw Terminals
MP-V-9A Screw Terminals
MP-V Device Installation
Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Clockwise (CW) to
Open
Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Counter-
Clockwise (CCW) to Open
Moving the Damper Shaft Mounting Screws to the
Alternative Positions
Installing an AM-135 Shaft Adapter on a 9.5 mm (0.375 inch)
Diameter Damper Shaft
Connecting an Air Velocity Probe to the MP-V Air Flow
Sensor
Installing a Terminal Block on MP-V
 Removing a Terminal Block from MP-V
11 Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-V
Powering Up MP-V
Universal Inputs
Triac Outputs
Analog Outputs
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.1 MP-V Controllers

11.1 MP-V Controllers

The MP-V controller is a multi-purpose, fully programmable, IP based field
controller dedicated for VAV applications. MP-V integrates a controller, a damper
actuator, and an air flow sensor in a single package for ease of installation. MP-V
is a native SpaceLogic device, which can either be used as a standalone
BACnet/IP field controller or as part of an EcoStruxure BMS with a AS-P or AS-B
server, or an Enterprise Server, as the parent server.
MP-V allows for flexible control solutions due to the dual Ethernet ports, the
interface to SpaceLogic Sensors, and the mix of universal inputs, triac outputs,
and analog outputs.
When MP-Vs are part of an EcoStruxure BMS, you can take full advantage of the
existing EcoStruxure Building Operation engineering tools.

Figure: MP-V

11.1.1 MP-V Models

The MP-V comes in two models with a different I/O point count and different I/O
point mix.
For more information, see section 11.2 “MP-V Models” on page 358.

11.1.2 MP-V Onboard I/O

The MP-V models offer a versatile mix of I/O point types that match a wide variety
of VAV applications.
For more information, see section 11.3 “MP-V Onboard I/O” on page 359.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

351
11 MP-V Controllers
11.1 MP-V Controllers

11.1.3 MP-V Damper Actuator

The MP-V has an integrated damper actuator, which allows for simplified
installation of MP-V directly over the damper shaft.
For more information, see section 11.4 “MP-V Damper Actuator” on page 360.

11.1.4 MP-V Air Flow Sensor

The MP-V uses a digital pressure sensor to measure the air velocity pressure
signal from the velocity probe in the inlet of the VAV box. The measured value is
used by the controller to position the VAV damper actuator for the required air
flow.
For more information, see section 11.5 “MP-V Air Flow Sensor” on page 361.

11.1.5 MP-V Built-in Power Supply

The MP-V has a built-in power supply designed to accommodate 24 VAC at
50/60 Hz input power.
For more information, see section 11.6 “MP-V Built-in Power Supply” on page
362.

11.1.6 BACnet/IP Device Memory

BACnet/IP devices have three types of memory:
• Flash memory: for boot loader, operating system, application software, and
configuration storage
• RAM: for runtime operation
• FRAM non-volatile memory: for data retention in the case of power outage
For more information, see section 16.5 “BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory” on
page 574.

11.1.7 BACnet/IP Controller Supported Building

Standards
One of the cornerstones of the EcoStruxure BMS is support for open standards.
As a result, the BACnet/IP controller complies with the BACnet open standard,
one of the most popular standards for buildings.
For more information, see section 16.6 “BACnet/IP controller Supported Building
Standards” on page 575.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

352
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.1 MP-V Controllers

11.1.8 MP Controller Communication Ports

The MP controller contains a combination of Ethernet, USB, and SpaceLogic
Sensor communication ports.
For more information, see section 12.3 “MP Controller Communication Ports” on
page 411.

11.1.9 BACnet/IP Controller Sensor Bus

The BACnet/IP controller provides a sensor bus, which allows SpaceLogic
Sensors to be connected to the controller.
For more information, see section 12.4 “MP Controller Sensor Bus” on page 412.

11.1.10 MP-V Screw Terminals

The MP-V is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device. The MP-V
uses pluggable terminal blocks, which are easy to install and remove from the
device.
For more information, see section 11.7 “MP-V Screw Terminals” on page 363.

11.1.11 MP Controller LEDs

There are five LEDs on the front panel of the MP controller.
For more information, see section 12.6 “MP Controller LEDs” on page 419.

11.1.12 MP Controller Reset Modes

You can reset and restart the MP controllers in different ways depending on how
long you press the reset button. The resets and restarts can affect the retention
of values after restart based on the retain levels configured for the variables.
For more information, see section 12.7 “MP Controller Reset Modes” on page
421.

11.1.13 MP-V Device Installation

The MP-V incorporates an integral actuator and the device is designed for over-
the-shaft damper installation.
For more information, see section 11.10 “MP-V Device Installation” on page 368.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

353
11 MP-V Controllers
11.1 MP-V Controllers

11.1.14 Wiring
The wiring recommendations provide guidance regarding wiring of the Central IO
modules, automation servers, BACnet/IP devices, RP controller expansion
modules, and Operator Display.
For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.

11.1.15 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management

Using WorkStation, you can update the firmware of multiple BACnet/IP devices
and their attached SpaceLogic Sensor devices at the same time with minimum
downtime. In particular, the universal upgrade package simplifies the update
process and requires minimal user involvement and coordination.
TIP: SpaceLogic Sensor devices are supported by the BACnet/IP controllers
- MP and RP controllers.
For more information, see section 18.17 “BACnet/IP Device Firmware
Management” on page 882.

11.1.16 Specifications
AC input

Nominal voltage 24 VAC

Operating voltage range +/- 20 %

Frequency 50/60 Hz

Maximum power consumption (MP-V-7A) 21 VA

Maximum power consumption (MP-V-9A) 22 VA

Power input protection MOV suppression and internal fuse

Environment

Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

Ambient temperature, storage -40 to +70 °C (-40 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Material

Plastic flame rating UL94 V-0

Ingress protection rating IP 20

Mechanical

Dimensions 161 W x 198 H x 63 D mm (6.3 W x 7.8 H x 2.5 D in.)

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

354
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.1 MP-V Controllers

Weight 1.13 kg (2.5 lb)

Installation Over the damper shaft

Terminal blocks Removable

Real-time clock

Accuracy, at 25 °C (77 °F) +/-1 minute per month

Backup time, at 25 °C (77 °F) 7 days minimum

Communication ports

Ethernet Dual 10/100BASE-TX (RJ45)

USB 1 USB 2.0 device port (mini-B)

1 USB 2.0 host port (type-A), 5 VDC, 2.5 W

Sensor bus 24 VDC, 2 W, RS-485 (RJ45)

Sensor bus protection Transient voltage suppressors on communication and power signals

Communications

BACnet BACnet/IP, port configurable, default 47808

BTL B-AAC (BACnet Advanced Application Controller)a
a) See the BTL Product Catalog for up-to-date details on BTL listed firmware revisions on BACnet
International's home page.

CPU

Frequency 500 MHz

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

355
11 MP-V Controllers
11.1 MP-V Controllers

Type ARM Cortex-A7 dual-core

DDR3 SDRAM 128 MB

NOR flash memory 32 MB

Memory backup 128 kB, FRAM, non-volatile

Damper actuator

Torque rating 6 Nm (53 lbf.in)

Stroke 0° to 90°, fully adjustable

Timing Approximately 2 seconds/degree at 60 Hz and 2.4 seconds/degree at 50 Hz for 90° rotation

at 24 VAC

Position indication Visual indication

Damper position feedback Yes

Manual override Push-button clutch release

Damper shaft diameter 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) or 9.5 mm (0.375 inch)

Adapter kit AM-135 is required for 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) diameter shafts.

Damper shaft minimum length (from VAV box) 22.2 mm (0.875 inch)

Air flow sensor

Range 0 to 249 Pa (0 to 1 inH2O)

Resolution 0.33 Pa (0.001 inH2O) at 25°C (77°F)

Accuracy ±5% of 249 Pa (1.00 inH2O) span at 25°C (77°F)

11.1.17 Internal Configuration

The MP-V internal configuration with regards to the signal ground is shown in the
following figure.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

356
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.1 MP-V Controllers

Figure: MP-V internal configuration

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

357
11 MP-V Controllers
11.2 MP-V Models

11.2 MP-V Models

The MP-V comes in two models with a different I/O point count and different I/O
point mix.
For more information, see section 11.3 “MP-V Onboard I/O” on page 359.
Model I/O Points

MP-V-7A 7

MP-V-9A 9

The MP-V-7A and MP-V-9A have the same compact design and dimensions as a
majority of the Schneider Electric VAV controller models from Andover
Continuum, TAC Vista, TAC I/A Series, and TAC I/NET product lines. You can
use the MP-V-7A and MP-V-9A for both cooling and heating applications.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

358
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.3 MP-V Onboard I/O

11.3 MP-V Onboard I/O

The MP-V models offer a versatile mix of I/O point types that match a wide variety
of VAV applications.

Table: I/O Point Types by MP-V Models

I/O Point Types MP-V-7A MP-V-9A

Universal inputs 3 4

Triac outputs 3 3

Analog outputs 1 2

11.3.1 Universal Inputs

The universal inputs are ideal for any mix of temperature, pressure, flow, status
points, and similar point types in a building control system.
For more information, see section 11.20.2 “” on page 400.

11.3.2 Triac Outputs

The triac outputs can be used in many applications to switch 24 VAC on or off for
external loads such as actuators, relays, or indicators. Triacs are silent and do
not suffer from relay contact wear.
For more information, see section 11.21.2 “” on page 404.

11.3.3 Analog Outputs

The analog outputs are capable of supporting analog voltage or current point
types. Therefore, analog outputs support a wide range of devices, such as
actuators.
For more information, see section 11.22.2 “” on page 406.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

359
11 MP-V Controllers
11.4 MP-V Damper Actuator

11.4 MP-V Damper Actuator

The MP-V has an integrated damper actuator, which allows for simplified
installation of MP-V directly over the damper shaft.
The integrated damper actuator eliminates the need for separate installation,
wiring, and positioning of the damper motor.
MP-V uses the same actuator mechanics as many Schneider Electric VAV
controller models from Andover Continuum, TAC Vista, TAC I/A Series, and TAC
I/NET product lines.
The feedback signal from the actuator makes it possible to determine the exact
position of the damper.
The actuator also features a push button for manual positioning of the damper
during commissioning and two stop screws for adjustment of the travel range.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

360
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.5 MP-V Air Flow Sensor

11.5 MP-V Air Flow Sensor

The MP-V uses a digital pressure sensor to measure the air velocity pressure
signal from the velocity probe in the inlet of the VAV box. The measured value is
used by the controller to position the VAV damper actuator for the required air
flow.
The sensor is an integrated diaphragm-based pressure sensor, which means that
it requires no air flow from the velocity probe.
As there is no air flow through the sensor, the sensor is not susceptible to
maintenance and performance issues caused by accumulation of dust and
particles in the sensor and tubing, and the error (reduction) of the actual pressure
level seen on the test/balance taps of the velocity probe. The sensor does not
require maintenance.
The pressure sensor also offers the ability to connect a local digital manometer to
the same probe when you want to obtain accurate measurements that can be
used for cross-check verifications.
The sensor is factory-calibrated and requires a minimum of field adjustments.
Field air balance calibration is typically only needed when adjusting for anomalies
and inaccuracies introduced from the local duct and air flow situations.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

361
11 MP-V Controllers
11.6 MP-V Built-in Power Supply

11.6 MP-V Built-in Power Supply

The MP-V has a built-in power supply designed to accommodate 24 VAC at
50/60 Hz input power.
The built-in power supply is based on a half-wave rectified, non-isolated design,
which is complemented with electronic protection components for transient
protection, overload protection, and EMC compliance.
To power the controller, use a Class 2 (EN 60742) transformer supplying a
nominal 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz. For more information, see section 11.1.16 “” on
page 354.
A separate, local 24 VAC step-down transformer is recommended to power each
BACnet/IP device. The transformer with appropriate VA rating may also be used
to power the locally connected I/O devices. The separate transformer helps to
avoid problems with ground loops, 24 VAC induced EMI on LAN, low or distorted
AC voltage level at the controller, and excess transformer load due to the half-
wave power supply, which can result in intermittent equipment detected faults,
loss of communications, or equipment damage.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Use a separate, local 24 VAC step-down transformer to power each BACnet/IP
device.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

NOTICE
CONTROLLER DEVICE DAMAGE
Do not power the SpaceLogic device with a 24 VAC transformer that is used to
power devices that contain non-isolated full-wave rectifier power supplies.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

362
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.7 MP-V Screw Terminals

11.7 MP-V Screw Terminals

The MP-V is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device. The MP-V
uses pluggable terminal blocks, which are easy to install and remove from the
device.
Spare terminal blocks can be ordered separately using the part number
SXWMPVCON10001.
The wiring recommendations are provided separately. For more information, see
section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.

11.7.1 MP-V-7A Screw Terminals

MP-V-7A has seven I/O points and the controller is equipped with four pluggable
terminal blocks.
For more information, see section 11.8 “MP-V-7A Screw Terminals” on page 364.

11.7.2 MP-V-9A Screw Terminals

MP-V-9A has nine I/O points and the controller is equipped with four pluggable
terminal blocks.
For more information, see section 11.9 “MP-V-9A Screw Terminals” on page 366.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

363
11 MP-V Controllers
11.8 MP-V-7A Screw Terminals

11.8 MP-V-7A Screw Terminals

MP-V-7A has seven I/O points and the controller is equipped with four pluggable
terminal blocks.
Recommended screw tightening torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in)

Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, MP-V-7A

The terminal blocks are used as follows:

• One 2-position pluggable terminal block for the power input
• One 4-position pluggable terminal block for the three universal inputs
• One 4-position pluggable terminal block for the three digital (triac) outputs
• One 3-position pluggable terminal block for the analog (voltage or current)
output

Table: Screw Terminals, MP-V-7A

Terminal number Designation Usage

Power input

1 24 VAC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 21 VA

2 Earth ground lead of 24

VAC transformer connects
to terminal 2.

Universal inputs

3 UI1 Universal input

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

364
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.8 MP-V-7A Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

4 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

5 UI2 Universal input

6 UI3 Universal input

Analog outputs

11 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

12 CO1 Current output

13 VO1 Voltage output

Digital (Triac) outputs

15 DO3 Triac output

16 DO2 Triac output

17 DO1 Triac output

18 COM Common connection for

DO1, DO2, and DO3
The COM terminal can be
connected to 24 VAC for
high-side switching or to
ground for low-side
switching.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

365
11 MP-V Controllers
11.9 MP-V-9A Screw Terminals

11.9 MP-V-9A Screw Terminals

MP-V-9A has nine I/O points and the controller is equipped with four pluggable
terminal blocks.
Recommended screw tightening torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in)

Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, MP-V-9A

The terminal blocks are used as follows:

• One 2-position pluggable terminal block for the power input
• One 6-position pluggable terminal block for the four universal inputs
• One 4-position pluggable terminal block for the three digital (triac) outputs
• One 5-position pluggable terminal block for the two analog (voltage or
current) outputs

Table: Screw Terminals, MP-V-9A

Terminal number Designation Usage

Power input

1 24 VAC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 22 VA

2 Earth ground lead of 24

VAC transformer connects
to terminal 2.

Universal inputs

3 UI1 Universal input

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

366
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.9 MP-V-9A Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

4 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

5 UI2 Universal input

6 UI3 Universal input

7 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

8 UI4 Universal input

Analog outputs

9 CO2 Current output

10 VO2 Voltage output

11 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

12 CO1 Current output

13 VO1 Voltage output

Digital (Triac) outputs

15 DO3 Triac output

16 DO2 Triac output

17 DO1 Triac output

18 COM Common connection for

DO1, DO2, and DO3
The COM terminal can be
connected to 24 VAC for
high-side switching or to
ground for low-side
switching.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

367
11 MP-V Controllers
11.10 MP-V Device Installation

11.10 MP-V Device Installation

The MP-V incorporates an integral actuator and the device is designed for over-
the-shaft damper installation.

Figure: MP-V installed over the damper shaft

The MP-V can be used with dampers that are opened in clockwise (CW) position
as well as dampers opened in counter-clockwise (CCW) position. You use
WorkStation or the Commission mobile application to configure the MP-V
actuator direction of rotation accordingly.

Figure: MP-V components

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

368
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.10 MP-V Device Installation

The MP-V is typically installed with the air flow sensor barbed fittings pointing
down (orientation B in the figure below). The MP-V can also be installed with the
barbed fittings pointing left (A), right (C), or up (D).

Figure: Supported installation orientations

With a downward extension, the available area around the damper shaft must
measure:
• 160 mm (6 inches) down from the lower edge of the shaft,
• 120 mm (4.5 inches) to the right,
• 45 mm (1.75 inches) to the left, and
• 45 mm (1.75 inches) above the shaft.
Ensure that the location allows enough clearance for servicing.
The MP-V actuator is designed to be installed over a 12.7 mm (0.5 inch) diameter
round damper shaft with a minimum of 54 mm (2.125 inches) exposed damper
shaft length.
When the damper shaft diameter is less than 12.7 mm (0.5 inch), an adapter is
required. An adapter with part number AM-135 can be ordered from Schneider
Electric to enable installation on a 9.5 mm (0.375 inches) diameter damper shaft.

Figure: AM-135 damper shaft adapter

IMPORTANT: The cutout section of the shaft adapter must be positioned

such that the damper shaft mounting screws are tightened against the
damper shaft and not the adapter cylinder.
When the exposed damper shaft length is less than 54 mm (2.125 inches) but
greater than 22.2 mm (0.875 inch), you move the damper shaft mounting screws
from the actuator collar to the alternative screw holes on the MP-V actuator.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

369
11 MP-V Controllers
11.10 MP-V Device Installation

Figure: Alternative position of the mounting screws for shorter damper shaft lengths

The MP-V also has two mounting brackets, which allow you to choose the
mounting bracket that best accomodates the available access space in the VAV
mounting area. You position the anti-rotation clip in the desired mounting bracket.

Figure: Two mounting brackets

The MP-V onboard air flow sensor is connected to an air velocity probe in the
VAV box using two tubes. A dip in the tubing helps prevent moisture from
entering the MP-V and damaging the air flow sensor. The dip should extend
below the elevation of the barbed fittings. This applies to all MP-V orientations,
but especially C and D.

Figure: Tubing dip

The MP-V is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device. Spare
terminal blocks can be ordered separately using the part number
SXWMPVCON10001.
The terminal blocks are removable. You can quickly and easily replace an MP-V
because no terminal wiring is affected.
When the MP-V is powered up for the first time, the MP-V software automatically
performs an actuator travel and damper position calibration. The calibration

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

370
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.10 MP-V Device Installation

operation drives the damper actuator in the close direction and registers the
position when the actuator encounters the stop. The software then drives the
actuator in the open direction and registers the position when the stop is
encountered. The software uses that information to scale the 0 to 100% span.
Mechanical obstructions hindering the damper actuator rotation during the
calibration process can adversely affect the calibration results and thus the VAV
damper operation. In that case, you can manually run a recalibration. For more
information, see the Configuring an MP-V Damper Command topic on WebHelp.
IMPORTANT: Initial calibration of actuator travel and damper position is
performed automatically when the MP-V is powered up for the first time. If
you subsequently press the manual override button, you must recalibrate the
MP-V manually. For more information, see the Configuring an MP-V Damper
Command topic on WebHelp.

NOTICE
VAV DAMPER NOT PROPERLY CONTROLLED
• Ensure that the MP-V is properly installed and secured prior to application of
the 24 VAC power.
• Ensure that the MP-V damper actuator can rotate freely between the fully
open and fully closed positions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in the VAV damper not being
properly controlled by the MP-V.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

371
11 MP-V Controllers
11.11 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Clockwise (CW) to Open

11.11 Installing MP-V on a Damper that

Rotates Clockwise (CW) to Open
You install the MP-V directly over the VAV damper shaft for damper positioning
control and air flow sensing. When you install the MP-V on a damper that rotates
clockwise (CW) to open, use WorkStation or the Commission mobile application
to ensure that the configured direction of the actuator rotation matches the
damper type.
For more information, see section 11.10 “MP-V Device Installation” on page 368.

To install MP-V on a damper that rotates clockwise (CW) to

open
1. Refer to the dimensional drawing before installing the MP-V.

2. Ensure that the damper is of the type that opens by turning the damper shaft
clockwise (CW).

Continued on next page

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

372
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.11 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Clockwise (CW) to Open

3. Determine the damper shaft length (L) and diameter (D).

4. When the exposed damper shaft length (L) is less than 54 mm (2.125
inches) but greater than 22.2 mm (0.875 inch), move the two damper shaft
mounting screws to the alternative screw holes for shorter damper shaft
lengths.
For more information, see section 11.13 “Moving the Damper Shaft
Mounting Screws to the Alternative Positions” on page 384.
5. When the damper shaft diameter (D) is equal to 9.5 mm (0.375 inch), install
an AM-135 shaft adapter on the damper shaft.
For more information, see section 11.14 “Installing an AM-135 Shaft
Adapter on a 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) Diameter Damper Shaft” on page 386.
6. Rotate the damper shaft to fully closed (CCW) position.

7. Press and hold the manual override button and rotate the actuator collar to
fully closed (CCW) position.

8. Release the manual override button. If necessary, rotate the actuator collar
slightly to make the button return to the fully extended position.
Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

373
11 MP-V Controllers
11.11 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Clockwise (CW) to Open

9. Loosen the two damper shaft mounting screws using a 1/8-inch hex key and
slide the controller over the damper shaft until the anti-rotation clip comes in
close contact with the mounting area on the VAV box.
IMPORTANT: When necessary due to mounting area restrictions or
obstacles, the anti-rotation clip can be moved from the mounting
bracket at the bottom of the controller (factory delivered location) to the
mounting bracket on the side of the controller (alternative location).

10. To preload the damper for closed position, rotate the controller clockwise
(CW) about three degrees or 10 mm (0.4 inch) off centerline of the damper.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

374
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.11 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Clockwise (CW) to Open

11. Tighten the two damper shaft mounting screws to the recommended torque
using a torque wrench. For steel damper shafts, 6.8 to 7.9 Nm (60 to 70
lbf.in) is recommended. For aluminum damper shafts, 4.0 to 5.1 Nm (35 to
45 lbf.in) is recommended.
IMPORTANT: When using the alternative positions for shorter damper
shaft lengths, tighten the damper shaft mounting screws to the following
recommended torque:
• Steel damper shafts: 4.5 to 5.6 Nm (40 to 50 lbf.in)
• Aluminum damper shafts: 4.0 to 5.1 Nm (35 to 45 lbf.in)
IMPORTANT: When using an AM-135 shaft adapter, position the
cutout section of the adapter cylinder to match the damper shaft
mounting screw positions, before you tighten the screws against the
damper shaft through the cutout section. Do not tighten the screws
against the adapter cylinder.

12. Rotate the controller counter-clockwise (CCW) back into alignment with the
centerline of the damper. The damper should now be tightly closed.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

375
11 MP-V Controllers
11.11 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Clockwise (CW) to Open

13. Using the controller's anti-rotation clip as a template, mark and drill a pilot
hole in the VAV box.
14. Ensure the mounting hole position does not affect the performance of the
VAV terminal unit. If the damper movement is affected, install the anti-
rotation clip in the mounting bracket on the side of the controller (alternative
location).
15. Secure the anti-rotation clip to the VAV box using a #10 self-tapping sheet
metal screw.

16. Press and hold the manual override button and rotate the damper clockwise
(CW) to fully open position by rotating the damper shaft.

17. Release the manual override button. If necessary, rotate the actuator collar
slightly to make the button return to the fully extended position.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

376
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.11 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Clockwise (CW) to Open

18. Loosen the CW travel adjustment screw using a 1/4-inch hex key, slide the
screw to the damper position indicator, and tighten the screw to 1.4 to 2.0
Nm (12 to 18 lbf.in) using a torque wrench.

19. Verify that damper can rotate freely between the fully open and fully closed
positions. There must be no binding between the actuator and damper, or
obstructions hindering the damper operation.

20. In WorkStation, ensure that Clockwise to open is the chosen direction of

the actuator rotation to open the damper.
For more information, see the Configuring Flow Balance Data topic on
WebHelp.
NOTE: In the Commission mobile application, ensure that CW is the
chosen direction of rotation to open the damper. For more information,
see the Manually Verifying the Direction of Damper Rotation topic on
WebHelp.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

377
11 MP-V Controllers
11.12 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Counter-Clockwise (CCW) to Open

11.12 Installing MP-V on a Damper that

Rotates Counter-Clockwise (CCW) to
Open
You install the MP-V directly over the VAV damper shaft for damper positioning
control and air flow sensing. When you install the MP-V on a damper that rotates
counter-clockwise (CCW) to open, use WorkStation or the Commission mobile
application to ensure that the configured direction of the actuator rotation
matches the damper type.
For more information, see section 11.10 “MP-V Device Installation” on page 368.

To install MP-V on a damper that rotates counter-clockwise

(CCW) to open
1. Refer to the dimensional drawing before installing the MP-V.

2. Ensure that the damper is of the type that opens by turning the damper shaft
counter-clockwise (CCW).

Continued on next page

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

378
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.12 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Counter-Clockwise (CCW) to Open

3. Determine the damper shaft length (L) and diameter (D).

4. When the exposed damper shaft length (L) is less than 54 mm (2.125
inches) but greater than 22.2 mm (0.875 inch), move the two damper shaft
mounting screws to the alternative screw holes for shorter damper shaft
lengths.
For more information, see section 11.13 “Moving the Damper Shaft
Mounting Screws to the Alternative Positions” on page 384.
5. When the damper shaft diameter (D) is equal to 9.5 mm (0.375 inch), install
an AM-135 shaft adapter on the damper shaft.
For more information, see section 11.14 “Installing an AM-135 Shaft
Adapter on a 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) Diameter Damper Shaft” on page 386.
6. Rotate the damper shaft to fully closed (CW) position.

7. Press and hold the manual override button and rotate the actuator collar to
fully closed (CW) position.

8. Release the manual override button. If necessary, rotate the actuator collar
slightly to make the button return to the fully extended position.
Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

379
11 MP-V Controllers
11.12 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Counter-Clockwise (CCW) to Open

9. Loosen the two damper shaft mounting screws using a 1/8-inch hex key and
slide the controller over the damper shaft until the anti-rotation clip comes in
close contact with the mounting area on the VAV box.
IMPORTANT: When necessary due to mounting area restrictions or
obstacles, the anti-rotation clip can be moved from the mounting
bracket at the bottom of the controller (factory delivered location) to the
mounting bracket on the side of the controller (alternative location).

10. To preload the damper for closed position, rotate the controller counter-
clockwise (CCW) about three degrees or 10 mm (0.4 inch) off centerline of
the damper.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

380
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.12 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Counter-Clockwise (CCW) to Open

11. Tighten the two damper shaft mounting screws to the recommended torque
using a torque wrench. For steel damper shafts, 6.8 to 7.9 Nm (60 to 70
lbf.in) is recommended. For aluminum damper shafts, 4.0 to 5.1 Nm (35 to
45 lbf.in) is recommended.
IMPORTANT: When using the alternative positions for shorter damper
shaft lengths, tighten the damper shaft mounting screws to the following
recommended torque:
• Steel damper shafts: 4.5 to 5.6 Nm (40 to 50 lbf.in)
• Aluminum damper shafts: 4.0 to 5.1 Nm (35 to 45 lbf.in)
IMPORTANT: When using an AM-135 shaft adapter, position the
cutout section of the adapter cylinder to match the damper shaft
mounting screw positions, before you tighten the screws against the
damper shaft through the cutout section. Do not tighten the screws
against the adapter cylinder.

12. Rotate the controller clockwise (CW) back into alignment with the centerline
of the damper. The damper should now be tightly closed.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

381
11 MP-V Controllers
11.12 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Counter-Clockwise (CCW) to Open

13. Using the controller's anti-rotation clip as a template, mark and drill a pilot
hole in the VAV box.
14. Ensure the mounting hole position does not affect the performance of the
VAV terminal unit. If the damper movement is affected, install the anti-
rotation clip in the mounting bracket on the side of the controller (alternative
location).
15. Secure the anti-rotation clip to the VAV box using a #10 self-tapping sheet
metal screw.

16. Press and hold the manual override button and rotate the damper counter-
clockwise (CCW) to fully open position by rotating the damper shaft.

17. Release the manual override button. If necessary, rotate the actuator collar
slightly to make the button return to the fully extended position.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

382
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.12 Installing MP-V on a Damper that Rotates Counter-Clockwise (CCW) to Open

18. Loosen the CCW travel adjustment screw using a 1/4-inch hex key, slide the
screw to the damper position indicator, and tighten the screw to 1.4 to 2.0
Nm (12 to 18 lbf.in) using a torque wrench.

19. Verify that damper can rotate freely between the fully open and fully closed
positions. There must be no binding between the actuator and damper, or
obstructions hindering the damper operation.

20. In WorkStation, ensure that Counterclockwise to open is the chosen

direction of the actuator rotation to open the damper.
For more information, see the Configuring Flow Balance Data topic on
WebHelp.
NOTE: In the Commission mobile application, ensure that CCW is the
chosen direction of rotation to open the damper. For more information,
see the Manually Verifying the Direction of Damper Rotation topic on
WebHelp.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

383
11 MP-V Controllers
11.13 Moving the Damper Shaft Mounting Screws to the Alternative Positions

11.13 Moving the Damper Shaft Mounting

Screws to the Alternative Positions
You move the two damper shaft mounting screws to the alternative positions to
be able to install the MP-V over a damper shaft with an exposed length that is
less than 54 mm (2.125 inches) but greater than 22.2 mm (0.875 inch).
For more information, see section 11.10 “MP-V Device Installation” on page 368.

To move the damper shaft mounting screws to the alternative

positions
1. Remove the two damper shaft mounting screws from the MP-V actuator
collar using a 1/8-inch hex key.

2. Remove the actuator collar.

Continued on next page

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

384
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.13 Moving the Damper Shaft Mounting Screws to the Alternative Positions

3. Press and hold the manual override button and rotate the actuator counter-
clockwise (CCW) until the two screw holes for short damper shafts
(alternative positions) become accessible.

4. Install the damper shaft mounting screws in the two screw holes for short
damper shafts.

You can now install MP-V.

IMPORTANT: When using the alternative positions for shorter damper shaft
lengths, tighten the damper shaft mounting screws to the following
recommended torque:
• Steel damper shafts: 4.5 to 5.6 Nm (40 to 50 lbf.in)
• Aluminum damper shafts: 4.0 to 5.1 Nm (35 to 45 lbf.in)

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

385
11 MP-V Controllers
11.14 Installing an AM-135 Shaft Adapter on a 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) Diameter Damper Shaft

11.14 Installing an AM-135 Shaft Adapter on a

9.5 mm (0.375 inch) Diameter Damper
Shaft
You install an AM-135 shaft adapter on a 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) diameter damper
shaft to be able the use the MP-V for a damper with that shaft diameter.
For more information, see section 11.10 “MP-V Device Installation” on page 368.

To install an AM-135 shaft adapter on a 9.5 mm (0.375 inch)

diameter damper shaft
1. Slide the AM-135 shaft adapter onto the 9.5 mm (0.375 inch) diameter
damper shaft with the cutout section pointing away from the VAV box.
IMPORTANT: When using the alternative positions for shorter damper
shaft lengths, slide the AM-135 shaft adapter onto the damper shaft
with the cutout section facing the VAV box.

You can now install MP-V.

IMPORTANT: When using an AM-135 shaft adapter, position the cutout
section of the adapter cylinder to match the damper shaft mounting screw
positions, before you tighten the screws against the damper shaft through
the cutout section. Do not tighten the screws against the adapter cylinder.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

386
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.15 Connecting an Air Velocity Probe to the MP-V Air Flow Sensor

11.15 Connecting an Air Velocity Probe to the

MP-V Air Flow Sensor
You connect an air velocity probe installed in the duct inlet to the MP-V onboard
air flow sensor (differential velocity pressure sensor) to measure the air flow in
the VAV terminal unit.

NOTICE
Do not expose the MP-V air flow sensor inputs to moisture during installation or
operation. Moisture in the sensor can cause measurement errors.

For more information, see section 11.10 “MP-V Device Installation” on page 368.

To connect an air velocity probe to the MP-V air flow sensor

1. Connect tubing to the air velocity probe in the inlet section of the VAV box.
NOTE: A maximum length of 1.2 m (4 ft) FRPE polyethylene tubing
with 6.4 mm (0.25 inches) outside diameter and 4.3 mm (0.17 inches)
inside diameter is recommended for the typical plenum applications.
The MP-V air flow sensor input also supports flexible Tygon tubing
(when plenum rating is not required), using tubes with size of 6.4 mm
(0.25 inches) outside diameter and 4.8 mm (0.19 inches) inside
diameter.
2. Connect the tube from the low pressure side of the air velocity probe to the
barbed fitting labeled (Low) on the MP-V air flow sensor input.
3. Connect the tube from the high pressure side of the air velocity probe to the
barbed fitting labeled (High) on the MP-V air flow sensor input.
IMPORTANT: Ensure you connect the correct tube from the air velocity
probe to the correct air flow sensor input on the MP-V, to avoid
incorrect control of the VAV terminal unit.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

387
11 MP-V Controllers
11.15 Connecting an Air Velocity Probe to the MP-V Air Flow Sensor

4. Create a tubing dip that extends at least 75 mm (3 inches) below the barbed
fittings.

NOTICE
Create a tubing dip to help prevent moisture from entering the MP-V. This
applies to all MP-V orientations, but especially orientations with the
barbed fittings pointing right or up. Failure to follow these instructions can
damage the air flow sensor.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

388
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.16 Installing a Terminal Block on MP-V

11.16 Installing a Terminal Block on MP-V

You install the terminal blocks on the MP-V to add or enable wiring for the device.
For more information, see section 11.10 “MP-V Device Installation” on page 368.

To install a terminal block on MP-V

1. Ensure that you have the correct terminal blocks.

NOTICE
Use only terminal blocks delivered with the MP-V or ordered from
Schneider Electric using the part number SXWMPVCON10001. Failure to
follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

2. If the terminal block is wired, ensure that the labels on the wires match the
labeling of the terminals on the device.

NOTICE
The terminal blocks must be plugged into the correct connector headers
on the device. Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment
damage.

3. Insert the terminal block at an angle against the back wall of the connector
header.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not push the terminal block straight down into the connector header as
this may crack the header.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

4. Press and roll the terminal block into the connector header.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

389
11 MP-V Controllers
11.16 Installing a Terminal Block on MP-V

5. Continue until you hear a click sound, which indicates that the terminal block
is fully engaged with the connector header.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

390
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.17 Removing a Terminal Block from MP-V

11.17 Removing a Terminal Block from MP-V

You remove a terminal block from MP-V in order to replace the controller.
For more information, see section 11.10 “MP-V Device Installation” on page 368.

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Disconnect the 24 VAC power supply and other electrically powered equipment
before removing the terminal block.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

To remove a terminal block from MP-V

1. Disconnect the 24 VAC power supply and other electrically powered
equipment that is connected to the controller.
2. Insert a small screwdriver in the slot between the terminal block and the
connector header.

3. Gently pry the terminal block at an angle away from the connector header.

4. Remove the terminal block from the connector header.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

391
11 MP-V Controllers
11.18 Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-V

11.18 Wiring a Terminal Block on MP-V

You wire the terminal blocks installed on the MP-V to connect I/O devices and
power.
For more information, see section 11.10 “MP-V Device Installation” on page 368.

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Disconnect the 24 VAC power supply and other electrically powered equipment
before wiring.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Always use the recommended cables (or wires with larger cross-sectional
area). For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

To wire a terminal block on MP-V

1. Disconnect the 24 VAC power supply and other electrically powered
equipment that is connected to the controller.
2. Ensure that the correct terminal block is used and that it is properly installed
on the MP-V. For more information, see section 11.16 “Installing a Terminal
Block on MP-V” on page 389.
3. Loosen the screws of the terminal block.
4. Strip approximately 7 mm (0.3 inch) of the insulation from the end of each
wire.
5. Insert the stripped end of each wire fully into its intended terminal. Ensure
that no bare wire strands extend from the terminal.
6. Tighten the screws using a small flat-blade screwdriver. Ensure that the
screws are fully tightened. Use the following recommended screw tightening
torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in).

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

392
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.19 Powering Up MP-V

11.19 Powering Up MP-V

You perform the following steps to power up MP-V.
For more information, see section 11.10 “MP-V Device Installation” on page 368.
For more information, see section 11.6 “MP-V Built-in Power Supply” on page
362.

NOTICE
The MP-V must be properly installed and secured prior to application of the 24
VAC power. Failure to follow these instructions adversely affects the damper
position calibration that the controller automatically runs after the first
application of power.
The user may request a Recalibrate function later from the properties of the
VAV damper object in the MP-V device using EcoStruxure Building Operation
WorkStation (after communication is set up). For more information, see the
Configuring an MP-V Damper Command topic on WebHelp.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Use a separate, local 24 VAC step-down transformer to power each BACnet/IP
device.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

To power up MP-V
1. Ensure that the MP-V is properly installed and secured.
2. Check that all wiring is correct.
Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

393
11 MP-V Controllers
11.19 Powering Up MP-V

3. Ensure that terminal number 1 is connected to the 24 VAC input lead from a
separate, isolated 24 VAC transformer.

NOTICE
The controller input power polarity and voltage level must be strictly
observed. Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment
damage.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not connect 230 VAC or 110 VAC to any terminal.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

4. Ensure that terminal number 2 is connected to the same earth ground

connection as the common (low/ground) lead from the 24 VAC transformer
secondary.

NOTICE
Earth ground must be connected to avoid damage to the MP-V and to
ensure proper operation of the controller. The earth ground wire must be
connected to the equipment chassis, the 24 VAC transformer secondary
lead, and the MP-V terminal number 2.

5. After powering up, check that the Status LED changes to a constant green
light after about a minute.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

394
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.20 Universal Inputs

11.20 Universal Inputs

The universal inputs are ideal for any mix of temperature, pressure, flow, status
points, and similar point types in a building control system.
As counter inputs, they are commonly used in energy metering applications. As
RTD inputs, they are ideal for temperature points in a building control system. As
supervised inputs, they are used for security applications where it is critical to
know whether or not a wire has been cut or shorted. These events provide a
separate indication of alarms and events in the system.

11.20.1 Inputs
The universal inputs can be configured to read several different types of inputs:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current
• Temperature
• Resistive
• 2-Wire RTD temperature

Digital inputs
The external connection of a digital input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Digital input external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm

Counter inputs
A counter input uses the same hardware configuration as the digital input that is
shown in the figure above.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

395
11 MP-V Controllers
11.20 Universal Inputs

Supervised inputs
Supervised inputs are contact closing inputs supplemented with the supervision
of the field wiring integrity. This supervision is a required feature in many security
system applications. The supervised inputs provide the ability to detect specific
forms of tampering or trouble with the wire connections to the field contacts. The
supervision is achieved with a combination of 1 or 2 resistors attached to the
contact in the field. The resistor combination creates continuous current flow
through the field contact loop and presents a defined set of expected resistance
values for each of the defined conditions. If someone is attempting to defeat the
monitoring of the field contact by short circuiting the wire with a jumper or cutting
the wire, the objective is to detect and indicate such a condition. The resistors
need to be located at the end of the cable close to the field contact, so that the
point where there is a risk that the circuit is defeated is between the resistors and
the I/O.
Three different types of supervised input connections are supported:
• Series only
• Parallel only
• Series and parallel
Each type of supervised input connection provides a different capability in
regards to what form of tamper/trouble can be detected regardless of switch
contact open or closed condition.
Series only: A single resistor, which is connected in series with the switch, can
only detect tamper/trouble in the form of a short circuit across the wire pair. A
single series resistor supervision is frequently configured with a normally closed
field contact. This provides for the short circuit to be detected and a cut wire will
show as an alarm condition. The external connection of a series only supervised
input connection is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Series only external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RS = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Parallel only: A single resistor, which is connected in parallel with the switch,
can only detect tamper/trouble in the form of an open circuit in the field wiring
loop. With single parallel resistor supervision and use of a normally open switch
in the field, the opened wiring shows as a fault and the shorted wiring shows as

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

396
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.20 Universal Inputs

an alarm condition. The external connection of a parallel only supervised input

connection is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Parallel only external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Series and parallel: Two resistors, where one is connected in series with the
switch and one is connected in parallel with the switch, can detect tamper/trouble
conditions in the form of both an open and a shorted circuit. The external
connection of a series and parallel supervised input connection is shown in the
following figure.

Figure: Series and parallel external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

Voltage inputs
The external connection of a voltage input is shown in the following figure.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

397
11 MP-V Controllers
11.20 Universal Inputs

Figure: Voltage input external connection

VG is the monitored external voltage (0 to 10 VDC).

RIN = 100 kohm

Current inputs
The external connection of a current input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Current input external connection

IG is the monitored external current (0 to 20 mA).

RSH = 47 ohm
In the internal configuration of the current input, there is a current limit circuit in
order to protect the shunt resistor from over load. The input current is limited to
40 mA with a serial connected FET transistor. If this limit is reached for 0.5
seconds, the transistor is turned off. When 5 seconds have elapsed, the
transistor is turned on again to make a new start attempt.

Temperature inputs
The external connection of a temperature input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Temperature input external connection

RT is the monitored external thermistor.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

398
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.20 Universal Inputs

When a universal input is used as a temperature input, VS and RPU in the internal
configuration of the universal input are used according to the following table.
Thermistor type VS RPU

20 kohm 5V 10 kohm

10 kohm 5V 10 kohm

2.2 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

1.8 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

The resulting voltage across the thermistor is measured and a temperature is

calculated dependent on the selected thermistor type.

Resistive inputs
The external connection of a resistive input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Resistive input external connection

RM is the monitored external resistance.

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

2-wire RTD temperature inputs

The external connection of a 2-wire RTD temperature input is shown in the
following figure.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

399
11 MP-V Controllers
11.20 Universal Inputs

Figure: 2-wire temperature input external connection

RT is the monitored external RTD.

RW is the wiring resistance.
VS = 1 V
RPU = 1.5 kohm
When an input is used as a 2-wire RTD temperature input, you need to specify
the wiring resistance in the software.
The input is measuring the total resulting voltage and the voltage across the RTD
is calculated. The voltage across the RTD is then converted to a raw resistance
value.

11.20.2 Specifications
Channels, MP-V-7A 3, UI1 to UI3

Channels, MP-V-9A 4, UI1 to UI4

Absolute maximum ratings -0.5 to +24 VDC

A/D converter resolution 16 bits

Universal input protection Transient voltage suppressor on each input

Digital inputs

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, typical wetting current 2.4
mA

Minimum pulse width 150 ms

Counter inputs

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, typical wetting current 2.4
mA

Minimum pulse width 20 ms

Maximum frequency 25 Hz

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

400
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.20 Universal Inputs

Supervised inputs

5 V circuit, 1 or 2 resistors
Monitored switch combinations Series only, parallel only, and series and parallel

Resistor range 1 to 10 kohm

For a 2-resistor configuration, each resistor must have the same value +/- 5 %

Voltage inputs

Range 0 to 10 VDC

Accuracy +/-(7 mV + 0.2 % of reading)

Resolution 1.0 mV

Impedance 100 kohm

Current inputs

Range 0 to 20 mA

Accuracy +/-(0.01 mA + 0.4 % of reading)

Resolution 1 μA

Impedance 47 ohm

Resistive inputs

10 ohm to 10 kohm accuracy +/-(7 + 4 x 10-3 x R) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm

10 kohm to 60 kohm accuracy +/-(4 x 10-3 x R + 7 x 10-8 x R2) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm

Temperature inputs (thermistors)

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Supported thermistors

Honeywell 20 kohm

Type I (Continuum) 10 kohm

Type II (I/NET) 10 kohm

Type III (Satchwell) 10 kohm

Type IV (FD) 10 kohm

Type V (FD w/ 11k shunt) Linearized 10 kohm

Satchwell D?T Linearized 10 kohm

Johnson Controls 2.2 kohm

Xenta 1.8 kohm

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

401
11 MP-V Controllers
11.20 Universal Inputs

Balco 1 kohm

Measurement accuracy

20 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)

10 kohm, 2.2 kohm, and 1.8 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-0.75 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-1.35 °F)
-30 to +100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (-22 to +212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)

Linearized 10 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-2.0 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-3.6 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.75 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.35 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)

1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-1.8 °F)

RTD temperature inputs

Supported RTDs Pt1000, Ni1000, and LG-Ni1000

Pt1000

Sensor range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

BACnet/IP Controller device Sensor range Measurement accuracy
environment

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +70 °C (-58 to +158 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) 70 to 150 °C (158 to 302 °F) +/-0.7 °C (+/-1.3 °F)

Ni1000

Sensor range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

BACnet/IP Controller device Sensor range Measurement accuracy
environment

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

LG-Ni1000

Sensor range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

BACnet/IP Controller device Sensor range Measurement accuracy
environment

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

RTD temperature wiring

Maximum wire resistance 20 ohm/wire (40 ohm total)

Maximum wire capacitance 60 nF

The wire resistance and capacitance typically corresponds to a 200 m wire.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

402
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.21 Triac Outputs

11.21 Triac Outputs

The triac outputs can be used in many applications to switch 24 VAC on or off for
external loads such as actuators, relays, or indicators. Triacs are silent and do
not suffer from relay contact wear.
The outputs can be configured as one of the following types:
• Digital output
• Digital pulsed output
• Pulse width modulated output
• Tristate output
• Tristate pulsed output

11.21.1 Outputs
The DO triac outputs are designed to switch 24 VAC. The common terminal COM
can be connected to 24 VAC or to ground. DO1, DO2, and DO3 share the
common terminal COM. The terminals are opto-isolated from the controller.

Figure: Triac output internal configuration

RV1 and RV2 are varistors (95 V, 2 J) for protection of the triac.
R1 = 47 ohm
C1 = 22 nF
NOTE: Optionally, to protect the triac outputs from damage in the event of
external wiring short circuit, you can connect an in-line fuse (3 A) in series
with the COM terminal.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

403
11 MP-V Controllers
11.21 Triac Outputs

11.21.2 Specifications
Channels, MP-V-7A 3, DO1 to DO3

Channels, MP-V-9A 3, DO1 to DO3

Output rating (for each triac output) Max. 0.5 A

Voltage 24 VAC +/-20 %

Commons COM (terminal number 18)

The common terminal COM can be connected to 24 VAC or to ground.

Common voltage, high side output 24 VAC

Common voltage, low side output 0 VAC (ground)

Minimum pulse width 100 ms

Triac output protection MOV and snubber across each triac output
MOV from triac COM to ground

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

404
 11 MP-V Controllers
11.22 Analog Outputs

11.22 Analog Outputs

The analog outputs are capable of supporting analog voltage or current point
types. Therefore, analog outputs support a wide range of devices, such as
actuators.

11.22.1 Outputs
Voltage outputs
The analog outputs can be configured as voltage outputs.

Figure: Voltage output internal configuration and connection of external resistive load

ROUT is approximately equal to 10 ohm.

VOUT range is 0 to 10 VDC.
RLOAD minimum is 5 kohm.

Current outputs
The analog outputs can also be configured as current outputs.

Figure: Current output internal configuration and connection of external resistive load

IOUT range is 0 to 20 mA.

RLOAD maximum is 650 ohm.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

405
11 MP-V Controllers
11.22 Analog Outputs

11.22.2 Specifications
Channels, MP-V-7A 1, VO1/CO1

Channels, MP-V-9A 2, VO1/CO1 and VO2/CO2

Analog output protection Transient voltage suppressor on each output

Voltage outputs

Range 0 to 10 VDC

Accuracy +/-60 mV

Resolution 10 mV

Minimum load resistance 5 kohm to ground

Load range 0 to +2 mA

Terminals Voltage Output (VO), Return (RET)

Current outputs

Range 0 to 20 mA

Accuracy +/-0.2 mA

Resolution 21 µA

Load range 0 to 650 ohm

Terminals Current Output (CO), Return (RET)

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

406
12 MP Controller General
Information

Topics
BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory
BACnet/IP controller Supported Building Standards
MP Controller Communication Ports
MP Controller Sensor Bus
Connecting SpaceLogic Sensors to an MP Controller
MP Controller LEDs
MP Controller Reset Modes
 12 MP Controller General Information
12.1 BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory

12.1 BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory

BACnet/IP devices have three types of memory:
• Flash memory: for boot loader, operating system, application software, and
configuration storage
• RAM: for runtime operation
• FRAM non-volatile memory: for data retention in the case of power outage
You can manually back up or restore BACnet/IP controller devices to a storage
location on a PC or network. For more information, see the BACnet Backup and
Restore topic on WebHelp.
When BACnet/IP controller devices are part of an EcoStruxure BMS, the
configuration data automatically resides in the parent EcoStruxure BMS server.
The EcoStruxure Building Operation database and the BACnet/IP controller
device database are synchronized to help ensure there is always one backup
available that can be used to restore the BACnet/IP controller device memory.
Scheduled backups can provide additional protection against application and
data loss. In addition, device-specific values (for example, AHU or heat pump
data) are duplicated in the parent server to facilitate device replacement
scenarios.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

409
12 MP Controller General Information
12.2 BACnet/IP controller Supported Building Standards

12.2 BACnet/IP controller Supported Building

Standards
One of the cornerstones of the EcoStruxure BMS is support for open standards.
As a result, the BACnet/IP controller complies with the BACnet open standard,
one of the most popular standards for buildings.
The BACnet/IP controller can natively communicate with BACnet/IP networks.
When the BACnet/IP controller is part of an EcoStruxure BMS, the BACnet
protocol is used for communication between the device and its parent
EcoStruxure BMS server and other BACnet devices on the IP network, including
BACnet/IP controllers. As a native BACnet/IP device, the BACnet/IP controller
supports BACnet services such as trends, schedules, and alarms, and the
controller can communicate with other BACnet devices on a BACnet/IP network.
BACnet/IP controller controller conforms to the BACnet Advanced Application
Controller (B-AAC) device profile.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

410
 12 MP Controller General Information
12.3 MP Controller Communication Ports

12.3 MP Controller Communication Ports

The MP controller contains a combination of Ethernet, USB, and SpaceLogic
Sensor communication ports.
This combination includes the following ports:
• Two 10/100 Ethernet ports
• One USB host port
• One USB device port
• One sensor bus port
When both Ethernet ports are enabled, they function as an onboard Ethernet
switch. Disabling the second Ethernet port disables the switching function. The
switching function enables flexible network topologies. For more information, see
the BACnet/IP Controller Network Topologies topic on WebHelp. The second
port also provides a connection point for a laptop running the Commission mobile
application.
The two USB ports are reserved for future use.
The sensor bus port is designed for connection of SpaceLogic Sensor devices.
For more information, see section 12.4 “MP Controller Sensor Bus” on page 412.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

411
12 MP Controller General Information
12.4 MP Controller Sensor Bus

12.4 MP Controller Sensor Bus

The MP controller sensor bus allows SpaceLogic Sensor devices to be
connected to the controller.
The sensor bus is a proprietary RS-485 bus, which provides both 24 VDC power
supply (2 W) and communications for the sensors.
The maximum total length of the sensor bus is 61 m (200 ft). The sensor bus
uses a Cat 5 (or higher) unshielded, straight-through wired cable with eight
conductors (four twisted pairs) and RJ45 connectors. The wire size (cross-
sectional area) should be 22 to 26 AWG (0.34 to 0.14 mm²). When the MP
controller is installed in a space that handles conditioned air or return air, the
sensor bus cables and IP network cables frequently must be plenum-rated to
meet applicable building codes. For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring”
on page 1129.

NOTICE
LOSS OF COMMUNICATION
• Ensure that the total length of the sensor bus does not exceed 61 m (200 ft).
• Use a Cat 5 or higher unshielded twisted pair cable with eight conductors
(four twisted pairs), a cross-sectional area of 22 to 26 AWG (0.34 to 0.14
mm2), and a rating that meets the requirements of the target environment.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in loss of communication.

Figure: Location of the Sensor Bus port on different MP controllers

You can connect a single SpaceLogic Sensor to the sensor bus, or you can
connect two to four SpaceLogic Sensor devices in a daisy-chain configuration.
NOTE: When connecting SpaceLogic Sensor devices to the sensor bus
through a daisy-chain configuration, it does not matter if the incoming and

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

412
 12 MP Controller General Information
12.4 MP Controller Sensor Bus

outgoing cables are connected to one or the other sensor bus port on the
SpaceLogic Sensor.
The maximum number of SpaceLogic Sensor devices that can be connected to
the sensor bus is variable depending on the power consumption for the selected
SpaceLogic Sensor model and the combination of cover and sensor base type.
When calculating the power consumption to validate your sensor bus
configuration, ensure that you add the power consumption (mW) for all
SpaceLogic Sensor models, sensor bases, and covers used on the sensor bus to
determine the total power consumption. The sensor bus can supply maximum
2000 mW. SpaceLogic Sensor combinations totalling more than 2000 mW are
not supported. The following table can be used for calculating the total power
consumption.

Description Model Number Power (mW)

Sensor base with temperature SXWSBTXXXSXX 90

sensor

Sensor base with temperature and SXWSBTHXXSXX 90

humidity sensors

Sensor base with temperature and SXWSBTXCXSXX 490

CO2 sensors

Sensor base with temperature, SXWSBTHCXSXX 490

humidity, and CO2 sensors

Blank cover SXWSCBXSELXna 0

Blank cover with occupancy sensor SXWSCBPSELXna 20

3-button cover (buttons for override SXWSC3XSELXna 190

and setpoint control)

3-button cover (buttons for override SXWSC3PSELXna 210

and setpoint control) with occupancy
sensor

Touchscreen display cover SXWSCDXSELXna 190

Touchscreen display cover with SXWSCDPSELXna 210

occupancy sensor

Touchscreen display cover with light SXWSC2XSELXna 190

control buttons

Touchscreen display cover with light SXWSC2PSELXna 210

control buttons and occupancy
sensor

Touchscreen display cover with light SXWSC4XSELXna 190

and blind control buttons

Touchscreen display cover with light SXWSC4PSELXna 210

and blind control buttons and
occupancy sensor

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

413
12 MP Controller General Information
12.4 MP Controller Sensor Bus

Continued
Description Model Number Power (mW)

Complete SpaceLogic Sensor model SXWSATXXXSLna 80

with temperature sensor, buttons for
override and setpoint control, and
LCD display cover

Complete non-communicatingb SLAnXXXc 0

SpaceLogic Sensor model with
resistive temperature sensor (10 SXWSATXXXRXXd
kohm type 3 thermistor) and blank
cover

SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adaptere SXWBTAECXX10001 300

a) The last character (“n”) of this model number indicates the housing: X (Medium matte white), W (Optimum glass white), or B
(Optimum glass black).
b) The SpaceLogic resistive temperature sensor is not designed to be connected to the sensor bus, but instead is connected to
I/O points/terminals on the BACnet/IP controller using a two-wire connection.
c) The fourth character (“n”) of this model number indicates the housing: S (Medium matte white), W (Optimum glass white), or B
(Optimum glass black).
d) The model number SXWSATXXXRXX is replaced by SLASXXX.
e) Connect the SpaceLogic Bluetooth Adapter to the SpaceLogic Sensor for temporary commissioning and servicing only.

To summarize the power conditions, the sensor bus supports the following key
SpaceLogic Sensor combinations:
• Blank covers: Up to four sensors of any combination of sensor base types
• 3-button and touchscreen covers:
– Up to two sensor bases with CO2 option
– Up to four sensor bases without CO2 option
• SpaceLogic LCD temperature sensors: Up to four sensors are supported

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

414
 12 MP Controller General Information
12.4 MP Controller Sensor Bus

Figure: Examples with one SpaceLogic Sensor and four SpaceLogic Sensor devices
connected to an MP controller in a daisy-chain configuration

Each SpaceLogic Sensor has two 2-position DIP switches, which are used to
give the sensor a unique address on the sensor bus. An incorrectly configured or
improper DIP switch can cause two sensors to have the same address on the
sensor bus, which means that both sensors will be offline. For more information,
see section 21.1 “SpaceLogic Sensors” on page 935.

NOTICE
LOSS OF COMMUNICATION
Ensure that the address DIP switches on the SpaceLogic Sensor are
configured to give the sensor a unique address on the sensor bus.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in loss of communication.

NOTE: SpaceLogic Sensor devices connected to the sensor bus through a

daisy-chain configuration can be assigned addresses regardless of the order
in which the sensors appear in the daisy chain. For example, sensor number

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

415
12 MP Controller General Information
12.4 MP Controller Sensor Bus

1 can have the address 6, sensor number 2 can have the address 4, and so
on.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

416
 12 MP Controller General Information
12.5 Connecting SpaceLogic Sensors to an MP Controller

12.5 Connecting SpaceLogic Sensors to an

MP Controller
You connect SpaceLogic Sensors to an MP controller to provide the sensors with
power and communication from the controller.
For more information, see section 12.4 “MP Controller Sensor Bus” on page 412.

NOTICE
LOSS OF COMMUNICATION
Locate the sensor bus wiring away from external electromagnetic noise
sources such as high voltage cables and Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) for
AC motors.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in loss of communication.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not connect an Ethernet cable from the controller's Sensor Bus port directly
to an external Ethernet switch or router.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

To connect SpaceLogic Sensors to an MP controller

1. Install the SpaceLogic Sensor and connect a Cat 5 (or higher) unshielded,
straight-through wired cable with eight conductors (four twisted pairs) to one
of the two RJ45 receptacles on the sensor. Use a cable with the wire size
(cross-sectional area) 22 to 26 AWG (0.34 to 0.14 mm²).
For more information, see SpaceLogic Sensors - SXWS Sensor Base -
Installation Instructions
For more information, see SpaceLogic Sensors - SXWS LCD Temperature
Sensors - Installation Instructions
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the Sensor Bus port on the MP
controller.

Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

417
12 MP Controller General Information
12.5 Connecting SpaceLogic Sensors to an MP Controller

3. When an additional SpaceLogic Sensor is needed, install the sensor and

connect the other end of the cable to the unused RJ45 receptacle on the
previous sensor.
NOTE: When connecting SpaceLogic Sensors to the MP controller's
sensor bus through a daisy-chain configuration, it does not matter if the
incoming and outgoing cables are connected to one or the other sensor
bus port on the SpaceLogic Sensor.

4. Repeat step 3 to install a third and fourth SpaceLogic Sensor, if the power
constraints of the sensor bus allow this for the selected combination of cover
and sensor base type.
5. Ensure that the two 2-position address DIP switches on each SpaceLogic
Sensor are configured to give the sensor a unique address on the sensor
bus.
For more information, see SpaceLogic Sensors - SXWS Sensor Base -
Installation Instructions
For more information, see SpaceLogic Sensors - SXWS LCD Temperature
Sensors - Installation Instructions
For more information, see the Configuring a SmartX Sensor topic on
WebHelp.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

418
 12 MP Controller General Information
12.6 MP Controller LEDs

12.6 MP Controller LEDs

There are five LEDs on the front panel of the MP controller.

Figure: MP controller LEDs

Table: MP Controller LEDs

Function Color

Status (MP controller) Green/Red

Sensor Bus Tx Yellow

Sensor Bus Rx Green

Ethernet 1 Green/Yellow

Ethernet 2 Green/Yellow

NOTE: The MP controller Ethernet and Status indicators comprise two

LEDs (green/yellow and green/red respectively) in one structure.
The LEDs indicate status of the MP controller and the ongoing communication.

12.6.1 Status LED

The MP controller Status LED indicates the condition of the device.

Table: MP Controller Status LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, constant Normal operation, status OK

MP controller firmware application running

Green, flashing (~1 Hz) Device restarting, wait

MP controller firmware application running

Red, constant Detected error, attention required

Red, flashing (~1 Hz) Device operates, but a problem needs

attention

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

419
12 MP Controller General Information
12.6 MP Controller LEDs

Continued
LED Patterns Condition

Red/green, flashing (~1 Hz) MP controller I/O board receiving software

upgrade, wait

Amber, constant MP controller firmware boot applet running

Amber, flash Device restarting, wait

MP controller firmware boot applet started

12.6.2 Sensor Bus LEDs

The Sensor Bus LEDs indicate the condition of the sensor bus data
communication.

Table: Sensor Bus LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Yellow, flashing (Tx) Transmit data

Green, flashing (Rx) Receive data

12.6.3 Ethernet LEDs

The Ethernet (1 and 2) LEDs indicate the condition of the Ethernet
communication.

Table: Ethernet LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, flashing 10 Mbit communication

Yellow, flashing 100 Mbit communication

Green/yellow, constant 10/100 Mbit link connected, no activity

No light No link, no activity

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

420
 12 MP Controller General Information
12.7 MP Controller Reset Modes

12.7 MP Controller Reset Modes

You can reset and restart the MP controllers in different ways depending on how
long you press the reset button. The resets and restarts can affect the retention
of values after restart based on the retain levels configured for the variables.

Figure: Location of the reset button on different MP controller models

You can use a straightened segment of a paper clip or a similar tool to press the
reset button.

Table: Reset Modes

Mode Description

Warm start Press and release the reset button in less

than 5 seconds.
Performing a power cycle in a BACnet/IP
controller is analogous to a hardware warm
start.

Cold start Press and hold the reset button for more
than 5 seconds but less than 9 seconds.

Network reset Press and hold the reset button for 10 to 19

seconds.
Perform a network reset in WorkStation in
order to reset the IP address settings to
DHCP with a failover to Auto-IP.

Factory reset Press and hold the reset button for 20 to 29

seconds.
Consult the following Factory Reset
subsection for more details.

Erase database Press and hold the reset button for 30 to 39

seconds.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

421
12 MP Controller General Information
12.7 MP Controller Reset Modes

Continued
Mode Description

Cancel reset action Press and hold the reset button for more
than 40 seconds and then release the
button.
Performing this action cancels the reset
request that would be initiated by any of the
shorter button press durations.

TIP: If the MP-C is equipped with the MP-C Display add-on module, a count-
up timer and progress bar are displayed to assist in reset selection. There is
also a reset mode indicator that lets you know which reset occurs if you
release at that time.

12.7.1 Factory Reset

In WorkStation, if your BACnet/IP controller device seems completely
unresponsive, perform a factory reset to restore the device to a state where it can
be successfully commissioned. After you release the reset button, a factory reset
may take up to 30 seconds to process. All diagnostic logs and the database are
erased during a factory reset. By contrast, controller firmware does not revert and
remains at the same active level.
TIP: After a physical reset in a BACnet/IP controller, any controller proxy
object in the EcoStruxure BMS database that carries the serial number of
that controller may trigger an automatic association. This association occurs
between the reset physical controller and the controller proxy object in the
EcoStruxure BMS database.
For more information, see the Automatic Association after a Factory Reset in
a SmartX IP Controller topic on WebHelp.

12.7.2 Retain Levels for Variables

Variables have a configurable retain level, which controls if the value of the
variable is retained after a restart of the MP controller. There are three retain
levels:
• No
• Warm start
• Cold start
The following table lists what is retained after a warm start or cold start based on
the configured retain level.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

422
 12 MP Controller General Information
12.7 MP Controller Reset Modes

Table: Retained Variable Values Depending on Restart Mode and Retain Level
Restart mode Retain level: Retain level: Retain level:
No Warm start Cold start

Warm start Default valuea Variable retains last Variable retains last
value configured by value configured by
Values configured
a user. a user.
by a user or
application are lost. Values configured Values configured
by an application are by an application are
retained. retained.

Cold start Default valuea Variable loses last Variable retains last
value configured by value configured by
Values configured
a user. a user.
by a user or
application are lost. Values configured Values configured
by an application are by an application are
lost. retained.

a
Default value is the value the variable gets when it is created.
For more information, see the Retain Level topic on WebHelp.
TIP: Although variable values in BACnet/IP controllers are retained in
accordance with this matrix, automation server retention behaves differently.
As a result, variable values retained in the server that are not retained in the
controller may be restored to the controller during a download command. For
more information, see the Retain Level topic on WebHelp.

12.7.3 Value Retention on Restarts Using

Command Priority Levels
When you configure the restart retain level for an object with command priority
levels, it is recommended that you base retention exclusively on either of the
following:

• The value property configured by using the Configure button for that
property in the Basic tab of the object.

• The command priorities configured by the Configure button for the

appropriate command priority levels in the Command tab of the object.
Do not configure retention for both the value property on the Basic tab and the
command priorities of the object because doing so may result in unexpected
behavior following a controller restart. For example, if the value property is
configured to retain during a restart, then that value is written to priority 16
following the restart, regardless of the retain level of priority 16.
For more information, see the Binding Value and Priority Properties in a SmartX
IP Controller topic on WebHelp.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

423
13 Output Override

Topics
Output Override Function
User Experience
Keys
Basic Operation
Override Outputs
Overriding an Analog Output
Overriding a Digital Output
Overriding a Digital Pulsed Output
Overriding Tristate Outputs
Overriding Tristate Pulsed Outputs
Removing an Override for an Output
View Inputs and Outputs
Viewing Inputs and Outputs
Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use
Configuring a Universal Input/Output of Ua or Ub Type as an
Analog Output
Configuring a Universal Input/Output of Uc Type as an
Analog Output
Configuring a Universal Input/Output as an Input
Configuring a Digital Output
 Configuring a Digital Input
13 Removing a Configuration for an Input or Output
Exiting Configuration Mode
 13 Output Override
13.1 Output Override Function

13.1 Output Override Function

The output override function allows you to manually override outputs. This
function can be used for testing, commissioning, and maintenance of equipment.
An override display unit consisting of an LCD display and five keys is provided for
override control of the output channels.

Figure: Override display unit

The override display also enables you to perform the following actions:
• View inputs and outputs
• Configure inputs and outputs

13.1.1 User Experience

The override display has a menu-driven user interface, which facilitates
overriding of the outputs, local configuration of inputs and outputs, and other
tasks.
For more information, see section 13.2 “User Experience” on page 429.

13.1.2 Keys
You use the keys on the override display to navigate the screens of the user
interface and to select options on menus and lists.
For more information, see section 13.3 “Keys” on page 431.

13.1.3 Basic Operation

The basic operation of the user interface includes the following actions:
• Highlight an option on a menu or list
• Select an option on a menu or list
• Change a value

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

427
13 Output Override
13.1 Output Override Function

For more information, see section 13.4 “Basic Operation” on page 432.

13.1.4 Override Outputs

You use the override display to manually override digital outputs as well as
analog outputs.
For more information, see section 13.5 “Override Outputs” on page 435.

13.1.5 View Inputs and Outputs

Using the override display, you can view the configuration and the present values
for inputs and outputs, and for outputs you can also view the override status.
For more information, see section 13.12 “View Inputs and Outputs” on page 452.

13.1.6 Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary

Use
In configuration mode, you can locally configure inputs and outputs for temporary
use during commissioning of the device. You can configure inputs and outputs
that have not been configured through WorkStation.
For more information, see section 13.14 “Configure Inputs and Outputs for
Temporary Use” on page 454.

13.1.7 Specifications
Display

Display resolution 128 x 64 pixels

Display size 36 W x 17 H mm (1.4 W x 0.7 H in.)

Display type FSTN monochrome LCD, white color transflective backlight

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

428
 13 Output Override
13.2 User Experience

13.2 User Experience

The override display has a menu-driven user interface, which facilitates
overriding of the outputs, local configuration of inputs and outputs, and other
tasks.
The main screens of the user interface are briefly described below.

Home screen
The Home screen is displayed when the device is powered on. To go to the next

screen, press the Enter key .

Figure: Home screen (AS-B server example)

For more information, see section 14.2 “Home Screen on AS-B Servers” on page
477.
For more information, see section 14.3 “Home Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module”
on page 478.

I/O Filter screen

The I/O Filter screen provides an overview of the number of I/O points and
enables you to filter the I/O List screen on inputs, outputs, and overriden outputs.

Figure: I/O Filter screen

For more information, see section 14.4 “I/O Filter Screen” on page 479.

I/O List screen

The I/O List screen presents the I/O points in a list. You use the screen to view an
I/O point, to select an output that you want to override, or to select an I/O point to
be locally configured.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

429
13 Output Override
13.2 User Experience

Figure: I/O List screen

For more information, see section 14.5 “I/O List Screen” on page 480.

Output Override screen

The Output Override screen enables you to manually override an output and to
remove an override for an output. The screen looks similar for the different types
of outputs.

Figure: Output Override screen

For more information, see section 14.6 “Output Override Screen” on page 481.

I/O Configuration screen

The I/O Configuration screen is the starting point to locally configure inputs and

outputs. To make this screen appear, press and hold down Home key for
three seconds.

Figure: I/O Configuration screen (AS-B server example)

For more information, see section 14.7 “I/O Configuration Screen” on page 482.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

430
 13 Output Override
13.3 Keys

13.3 Keys
You use the keys on the override display to navigate the screens of the user
interface and to select options on menus and lists.

Table: Keys
Key Description

Home
Press to go to the Home screen.
Press and hold down for three seconds to
enter the configuration mode and go to the
I/O Configuration screen. For more
information, see section 14.7 “I/O
Configuration Screen” on page 482.

Back
Press to return to the previous screen.

Up/previous
Press to scroll in a menu or list and to
highlight an option.
Press to increase a value.

Down/next
Press to scroll in a menu or list and to
highlight an option.
Press to decrease a value.

Enter
Press to go to from the Home screen to the
I/O Filter screen. For more information, see
section 14.4 “I/O Filter Screen” on page
479.
Press to select an option in a menu or list
and go to the next screen.

TIP: Press and hold down the Up/previous key or Down/next key
to speed up scrolling in the override display menus and lists.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

431
13 Output Override
13.4 Basic Operation

13.4 Basic Operation

The basic operation of the user interface includes the following actions:
• Highlight an option on a menu or list
• Select an option on a menu or list
• Change a value

13.4.1 Highlight an Option

You highlight an option on a menu or list using the Up/previous key or

Down/next key .

Figure: Highlighted menu option

13.4.2 Select an Option

You select a highlighted option by pressing the Enter key . A small dot in a
radio button indicates the selected or active menu option.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

432
 13 Output Override
13.4 Basic Operation

Figure: Radio button indicates the selected menu option

13.4.3 Change a Value

To change a value you first need to get the value in edit mode. To do this you

highlight the present value and then press the Enter key . A value within
angle brackets indicates that the value is in edit mode. You select a new value

using the Up/previous key or Down/next key and then press the Enter

key to leave the edit mode.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

433
13 Output Override
13.4 Basic Operation

Figure: Angle brackets indicate a value in edit mode

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

434
 13 Output Override
13.5 Override Outputs

13.5 Override Outputs

You use the override display to manually override digital outputs as well as
analog outputs.
There are basically two control modes:
• Hand mode
• Auto mode
You place an output in Hand mode when you want to manually override the
output. Programs have no effect on the output in this mode. The meaning of the
Hand mode for the different output types are described below.
You switch back to Auto mode when you want to remove the manual override. In
Auto mode, programs control the output.
The Output Override screen is similar for the different output types. For more
information, see section 14.6 “Output Override Screen” on page 481.

Figure: Output override screen for a digital pulsed output

The Hand icon indicates that an output point is manually overridden. For
more information, see section 14.1 “Icons” on page 475.

13.5.1 Override Analog Outputs

In Hand mode, you can manually adjust the analog value of an analog output.

13.5.2 Override Digital Outputs

In Hand mode, you can manually activate or deactivate a digital output by
selecting one of the following options:
• Hand On makes the output activated (on).
• Hand Off makes the output manually deactivated (off).

13.5.3 Override Digital Pulsed Outputs

In Hand mode, you can manually adjust the duty cycle value of a digital pulsed
output.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

435
13 Output Override
13.5 Override Outputs

13.5.4 Override Tristate Outputs

In Hand mode, you can manually control a pair of tristate outputs by selecting
one of the following override values:
• On makes the first output active (on).
• Off makes both outputs inactive (off).
• -On makes the second output active (on).

Figure: I/O list screen showing override value -On for tristate output points DO1 and DO2

13.5.5 Override Tristate Pulsed Outputs

In Hand mode, you can manually adjust the duty cycle value of a pair of tristate
pulsed outputs by selecting one of the following override values:
• [Value] percent makes the first output active (on) in [Value] percent of the
pulse period.
• 0 percent makes both outputs inactive (off).
• -[Value] percent makes the second output active (on) in [Value] percent of
the pulse period.
For example, if you select 10 percent, the first output is active (on) in 10 percent
of the pulse period. If you select -10 percent, the second output is active (on) in
10 percent of the pulse period.

Figure: I/O list screen showing override value 10 percent for tristate pulsed output points
DO1 and DO2

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

436
 13 Output Override
13.6 Overriding an Analog Output

13.6 Overriding an Analog Output

You override an analog output to manually control the analog value of the output.
For more information, see section 13.5 “Override Outputs” on page 435.

To override an analog output

1. With the Home screen displayed, press the Enter key .

2. Highlight OUT.

3. Press the Enter key .

4. Highlight the analog output point.

5. Press the Enter key .

6. Highlight the override value (Hand value).

7. Press the Enter key .

Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

437
13 Output Override
13.6 Overriding an Analog Output

8. Select the override value that you want to use initially when switching to the
override mode (Hand mode).

9. Press the Enter key .

10. Highlight HAND.

11. Press the Enter key to switch to the override mode (Hand mode).
12. Highlight the override value (Hand value).

13. Press the Enter key .

Continued on next page

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

438
 13 Output Override
13.6 Overriding an Analog Output

14. Adjust the override value.

15. Press the Enter key .

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

439
13 Output Override
13.7 Overriding a Digital Output

13.7 Overriding a Digital Output

You override a digital output to manually control the digital value of the output.
For more information, see section 13.5 “Override Outputs” on page 435.

To override a digital output

1. With the Home screen displayed, press the Enter key .

2. Highlight OUT.

3. Press the Enter key .

4. Highlight the digital output point.

5. Press the Enter key .

6. Highlight one of the following override options:
• Highlight HAND ON to turn on the output.
• Highlight HAND OFF to turn off the output.

Continued on next page

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

440
 13 Output Override
13.7 Overriding a Digital Output

7. Press the Enter key .

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

441
13 Output Override
13.8 Overriding a Digital Pulsed Output

13.8 Overriding a Digital Pulsed Output

You override a digital pulsed output to manually control the duty cycle of the
output.
For more information, see section 13.5 “Override Outputs” on page 435.

To override a digital pulsed output

1. With the Home screen displayed, press the Enter key .

2. Highlight OUT.

3. Press the Enter key .

4. Highlight the digital pulsed output point.

5. Press the Enter key .

6. Highlight the override value (Hand value).

7. Press the Enter key .

Continued on next page

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

442
 13 Output Override
13.8 Overriding a Digital Pulsed Output

8. Select the duty cycle value that you want to use initially when switching to
the override mode (Hand mode).

9. Press the Enter key .

10. Highlight HAND.

11. Press the Enter key to switch to the override mode (Hand mode).
12. Highlight the override value (Hand value).

13. Press the Enter key .

Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

443
13 Output Override
13.8 Overriding a Digital Pulsed Output

14. Adjust the duty cycle value.

15. Press the Enter key .

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

444
 13 Output Override
13.9 Overriding Tristate Outputs

13.9 Overriding Tristate Outputs

You override a pair of tristate output points to manually control the value of the
outputs.
For more information, see section 13.5 “Override Outputs” on page 435.

To override tristate outputs

1. With the Home screen displayed, press the Enter key .

2. Highlight OUT.

3. Press the Enter key .

4. Highlight the first tristate output point, which has an icon with a plus sign

( or ).

5. Press the Enter key .

6. Highlight the current override value (Hand value).

Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

445
13 Output Override
13.9 Overriding Tristate Outputs

7. Press the Enter key .

8. Select one of the following override options:
• Select On to make the first tristate output point active (on).
• Select Off to make both tristate output points inactive (off).
• Select -On to make the second tristate output point active (on).

9. Press the Enter key .

10. Highlight HAND.

11. Press the Enter key to switch to the override mode (Hand mode).

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

446
 13 Output Override
13.10 Overriding Tristate Pulsed Outputs

13.10 Overriding Tristate Pulsed Outputs

You override a pair of tristate pulsed output points to manually control the duty
cycle of the outputs.
For more information, see section 13.5 “Override Outputs” on page 435.

To override tristate pulsed outputs

1. With the Home screen displayed, press the Enter key .

2. Highlight OUT.

3. Press the Enter key .

4. Highlight the first tristate pulsed output point, which has an icon with a plus

sign ( ).

5. Press the Enter key .

6. Highlight the override value (Hand value).

Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

447
13 Output Override
13.10 Overriding Tristate Pulsed Outputs

7. Press the Enter key .

8. Select the duty cycle value that you want to use initially when switching to
the override mode (Hand mode):
• Select [Value] percent to make the first tristate pulsed output point
active (on) in [Value] percent of the pulse period.
• Select 0 percent to make both tristate pulsed output points inactive
(off).
• Select -[Value] percent to make the second tristate pulsed output point
active (on) in [Value] percent of the pulse period.

9. Press the Enter key .

10. Highlight HAND.

11. Press the Enter key to switch to the override mode (Hand mode).
12. Highlight the override value (Hand value).

13. Press the Enter key .

Continued on next page

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

448
 13 Output Override
13.10 Overriding Tristate Pulsed Outputs

14. Adjust the duty cycle value.

15. Press the Enter key .

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

449
13 Output Override
13.11 Removing an Override for an Output

13.11 Removing an Override for an Output

You remove an override for an output when you no longer want to manually
control the value of the output.
For more information, see section 13.5 “Override Outputs” on page 435.

To remove an override for an output

1. With the Home screen displayed, press the Enter key .

2. Highlight HAND.

3. Press the Enter key .

4. Highlight the output point for which you want to remove the override.

5. Press the Enter key .

6. Highlight AUTO.

Continued on next page

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

450
 13 Output Override
13.11 Removing an Override for an Output

7. Press the Enter key .

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

451
13 Output Override
13.12 View Inputs and Outputs

13.12 View Inputs and Outputs

Using the override display, you can view the configuration and the present values
for inputs and outputs, and for outputs you can also view the override status.
Icons on the screens indicate the configuration and override status for the inputs
and outputs. For more information, see section 14.1 “Icons” on page 475.
The value presented for an input or output equals the value transferred in or out
to/from the physical device. So even if WorkStation is configured to invert a value
from a counter input, digital input, digital output, or digital pulsed output, the
override display presents the not inverted value.

Figure: I/O List screen showing configuration, values, and override status for digital
outputs

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

452
 13 Output Override
13.13 Viewing Inputs and Outputs

13.13 Viewing Inputs and Outputs

You view inputs and outputs to get information on their configuration or their
present values, or to check whether an output is overridden.
For more information, see section 13.12 “View Inputs and Outputs” on page 452.

To view inputs and outputs

1. With the Home screen displayed, press the Enter key .

2. Highlight ALL.

3. Press the Enter key .

4. Scroll up/down to the input or output point that you want to view.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

453
13 Output Override
13.14 Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use

13.14 Configure Inputs and Outputs for

Temporary Use
In configuration mode, you can locally configure inputs and outputs for temporary
use during commissioning of the device. You can configure inputs and outputs
that have not been configured through WorkStation.
You can reconfigure, unconfigure, and override a locally configured I/O point
using the override display. The I/O configuration is locally stored in the device.
The local I/O configuration is not uploaded to the Enterprise Server database and
the local I/O configuration does not appear in WorkStation. You can change the
I/O configuration using WorkStation. The final I/O configuration must always be
done in WorkStation.

To enter the configuration mode, you press and hold down the Home key for
three seconds.
The icons on the I/O List screen indicate which I/O points you can configure,
reconfigure, or unconfigure. For more information, see section 14.1 “Icons” on
page 475. The highlighted I/O point is flashing to indicate that you are in
configuration mode.

The Unconfigured icon indicates an I/O point that you can configure locally.

The Input locally configured icon and Output locally configured icon
indicate locally configured I/O points, which you can reconfigure or unconfigure.

Figure: I/O list screen showing two unconfigured outputs and two locally configured
outputs

13.14.1 Configure a Universal Input/Output

There are three universal input/output types: Ua, Ub, and Uc. Depending on
which of these three types you have, you can locally configure different types of
inputs and analog outputs.

Analog output types

Table: Analog Output Types Supported by Ua, Ub, and Uc Universal I/O Types
Analog Output Ua Ub Uc
Type

Voltage output X X X

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

454
 13 Output Override
13.14 Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use

Continued
Analog Output Ua Ub Uc
Type

Current output - - X

Input types

Table: Input Types Supported by Ua, Ub, and Uc Universal I/O Types
Input Type Ua Ub Uc

Digital input X X X

Counter input X X X

Voltage input X X X

Temperature input X X X

Resistive input X X X

2-Wire RTD input X X X

Supervised input X X X

Current input - X X

Thermistor types for temperature inputs

You can configure a temperature input for use with one of the following thermistor
types:
• 10K ACC: 10 kohm Type I (Continuum) thermistor or SpaceLogic Resistive
Temperature Sensor
• 1.8K TAC: 1.8 kohm Xenta thermistor
• 10K CSI: 10 kohm Type II (I/NET) thermistor
• 10K Satchwell: 10 kohm Type III (Satchwell) thermistor
• 10K S-well linear: 10 kohm linearized (Satchwell D?T) thermistor
• 10K Invensys: 10 kohm Type IV (FD) thermistor
• 10K I-sys: 10 kohm linearized Type V (FD with 11 kohm shunt) thermistor
• 1K Balco: 1 kohm Balco thermistor
• 20K Honeywell: 20 kohm Honeywell thermistor
• 2.2K J Controls: 2.2 kohm Johnson Controls thermistor

Circuit types and resistors for supervised inputs

You can configure a supervised input for use with one of the following supervised
circuit types:
• NO Series: Normally Open (NO) circuit with a resistor connected in series
with the switch

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

455
13 Output Override
13.14 Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use

• NC Series: Normally Closed (NC) circuit with a resistor connected in series

with the switch
• NO Parallel: Normally Open (NO) circuit with a resistor connected in parallel
with the switch
• NC Parallel: Normally Closed (NC) circuit with a resistor connected in
parallel with the switch
• NO Series/Parallel: Normally Open (NO) circuit with one resistor connected
in series with the switch and one resistor connected in parallel with the
switch
• NC Series/Parallel: Normally Closed (NC) circuit with one resistor connected
in series with the switch and one resistor connected in parallel with the
switch
You also configure the resistor value for the supervised circuit.

13.14.2 Configure a Digital Output

There are three digital output types: relay output, triac output, and high power
relay output. Depending on which of these three types you have, you have
different options for locally configuring the digital output.

Table: Digital Output Types Supported by Relay, Triac, and High Power Relay
Outputs
Digital Output Type Relay Output Triac Output High Power Relay
Output

Digital Output X X X

Digital Pulsed X X X
Output

Tristate Output X X -

Tristate Pulsed X X -
Output

When you configure a digital output as a tristate output, the selected output point
and the next output point form a pair.

Figure: A pair of tristate output points

Similarly, when you configure a digital output as a tristate pulsed output, the
selected output point and the next output point form a pair.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

456
 13 Output Override
13.14 Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use

Figure: A pair of tristate pulsed output points

13.14.3 Configure a Digital Input

A digital input can be locally configured as one of the following types:
• Digital input
• Counter input

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

457
13 Output Override
13.15 Configuring a Universal Input/Output of Ua or Ub Type as an Analog Output

13.15 Configuring a Universal Input/Output of

Ua or Ub Type as an Analog Output
You use the override display to locally configure a universal input/output point of
Ua or Ub type as an analog output when the I/O point has not been configured
through WorkStation.
For more information, see section 13.14 “Configure Inputs and Outputs for
Temporary Use” on page 454.

To configure a universal input/output of Ua or Ub type as an

analog output

1. Press and hold down the Home key for three seconds.
2. Highlight IO Configuration.

3. Press the Enter key .

4. Highlight the universal input/output point of Ua or Ub type that you want to
configure.

5. Press the Enter key .

Continued on next page

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

458
 13 Output Override
13.15 Configuring a Universal Input/Output of Ua or Ub Type as an Analog Output

6. Highlight OUT.

7. Press the Enter key .

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

459
13 Output Override
13.16 Configuring a Universal Input/Output of Uc Type as an Analog Output

13.16 Configuring a Universal Input/Output of

Uc Type as an Analog Output
You use the override display to locally configure a universal input/output point of
Uc type as an analog output when the I/O point has not been configured through
WorkStation.
For more information, see section 13.14 “Configure Inputs and Outputs for
Temporary Use” on page 454.

To configure a universal input/output of Uc type as an analog

output

1. Press and hold down the Home key for three seconds.
2. Highlight IO Configuration.

3. Press the Enter key .

4. Highlight the universal input/output point of Uc type that you want to
configure.

5. Press the Enter key .

Continued on next page

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

460
 13 Output Override
13.16 Configuring a Universal Input/Output of Uc Type as an Analog Output

6. Highlight OUT.

7. Press the Enter key .

8. Highlight an analog output type. For more information, see section 13.14
“Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use” on page 454.

9. Press the Enter key .

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

461
13 Output Override
13.17 Configuring a Universal Input/Output as an Input

13.17 Configuring a Universal Input/Output as

an Input
You use the override display to locally configure a universal input/output point as
an input when the I/O point has not been configured through WorkStation.
For more information, see section 13.14 “Configure Inputs and Outputs for
Temporary Use” on page 454.

To configure a universal input/output as an input

1. Press and hold down the Home key for three seconds.
2. Highlight IO Configuration.

3. Press the Enter key .

4. Highlight the universal input/output point that you want to configure.

5. Press the Enter key .

6. Highlight IN.

Continued on next page

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

462
 13 Output Override
13.17 Configuring a Universal Input/Output as an Input

7. Press the Enter key .

8. Highlight an input type. For more information, see section 13.14 “Configure
Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use” on page 454.

9. Press the Enter key .

10. If you select Temp Sensor, highlight a thermistor type. For more
information, see section 13.14 “Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary
Use” on page 454.

11. Press the Enter key .

12. If you select Supervised, highlight a supervised circuit type. For more
information, see section 13.14 “Configure Inputs and Outputs for Temporary
Use” on page 454.

13. Press the Enter key .

Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

463
13 Output Override
13.17 Configuring a Universal Input/Output as an Input

14. If you select Supervised, select also the resistor value.

15. Press the Enter key .

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

464
 13 Output Override
13.18 Configuring a Digital Output

13.18 Configuring a Digital Output

You use the override display to locally configure a digital output when the output
has not been configured through WorkStation.
For more information, see section 13.14 “Configure Inputs and Outputs for
Temporary Use” on page 454.

To configure a digital output

1. Press and hold down the Home key for three seconds.
2. Highlight IO Configuration.

3. Press the Enter key .

4. Highlight the digital output point that you want to configure.

5. Press the Enter key .

6. Highlight OUT.

7. Press the Enter key .

Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

465
13 Output Override
13.18 Configuring a Digital Output

8. Highlight an output type. For more information, see section 13.14 “Configure
Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use” on page 454.

9. Press the Enter key .

10. If you select Digital Pulsed or Tristate Pulsed, select the pulse period
value.

11. Press the Enter key .

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

466
 13 Output Override
13.19 Configuring a Digital Input

13.19 Configuring a Digital Input

You use the override display to locally configure a digital input when the input has
not been configured through WorkStation.
For more information, see section 13.14 “Configure Inputs and Outputs for
Temporary Use” on page 454.

To configure a digital input

1. Press and hold down the Home key for three seconds.
2. Highlight IO Configuration.

3. Press the Enter key .

4. Highlight the digital input point that you want to configure.

5. Press the Enter key .

6. Highlight IN.

7. Press the Enter key .

Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

467
13 Output Override
13.19 Configuring a Digital Input

8. Highlight an input type. For more information, see section 13.14 “Configure
Inputs and Outputs for Temporary Use” on page 454.

9. Press the Enter key .

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

468
 13 Output Override
13.20 Removing a Configuration for an Input or Output

13.20 Removing a Configuration for an Input

or Output
You use the override display to remove a local configuration for an input or output
when you no longer need the configuration.
For more information, see section 13.14 “Configure Inputs and Outputs for
Temporary Use” on page 454.

To remove a configuration for an input or output

1. Press and hold down the Home key for three seconds.
2. Highlight IO Configuration.

3. Press the Enter key .

4. Highlight the locally configured input or output point for which you want to
remove the configuration.

5. Press the Enter key .

Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

469
13 Output Override
13.20 Removing a Configuration for an Input or Output

6. Highlight Unconfigured.

7. Press the Enter key .

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

470
 13 Output Override
13.21 Exiting Configuration Mode

13.21 Exiting Configuration Mode

You exit the configuration mode when you do not want to configure any more
inputs or outputs.
For more information, see section 13.14 “Configure Inputs and Outputs for
Temporary Use” on page 454.

To exit configuration mode

1. Press the Back key until the I/O Configuration screen appears.

2. Highlight Exit.

3. Press the Enter key .

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

471
14 Output Override User
Interface

Topics
Icons
Home Screen on AS-B Servers
Home Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module
I/O Filter Screen
I/O List Screen
Output Override Screen
I/O Configuration Screen
I/O Selection Screen
Digital Output Configuration Screen
Pulse Period Configuration Screen
Digital Input Configuration Screen
Analog Output Configuration Screen
Universal Input/Output Configuration Screen
Temperature Input Configuration Screen
Supervised Input Configuration Screen
Supervised Resistor Configuration Screen
Status Screen on AS-B Servers
About Screen on AS-B Servers_Display
 About Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module
14
 14 Output Override User Interface
14.1 Icons

14.1 Icons
Use the icons on the override display screens to view the configuration and the
present values of the I/O points.

Table: Icons
Icon Description

Input
Indicates that an I/O point is configured as
an input point.

Output
Indicates that an I/O point is configured as
an output point.

Unconfigured
Indicates that an I/O point is unconfigured.

Input locally configured

Indicates that an input point is locally
configured through the override display.

Output locally configured

Indicates that an output point is locally
configured through the override display.

Open
Indicates that a digital input point or digital
output point is inactive (off).

Closed
Indicates that a digital input point or digital
output point is active (on).

Short-circuit
Indicates a short-circuit for a universal
input/output that is configured as a
supervised input point.

Open circuit
Indicates an open circuit for a universal
input/output that is configured as a
supervised input point.

Digital pulsed output

Indicates that a digital output is configured
as a digital pulsed output point.

Tristate outputs: On
Indicates that a pair of digital outputs is
configured as tristate output points and that
the first output point is active (on) and the
second output point is inactive (off).

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

475
14 Output Override User Interface
14.1 Icons

Continued
Icon Description

Tristate outputs: Off

Indicates that a pair of digital outputs is
configured as tristate output points and that
both the first and second output point are
inactive (off).

Tristate outputs: -On

Indicates that a pair of digital outputs is
configured as tristate output points and that
the first output point is inactive (off) and the
second output point is active (on).

Tristate pulsed outputs

Indicates that a pair of digital outputs is
configured as tristate pulsed output points.

Hand
Indicates that an output point is manually
overridden.

Edit
Indicates that an output point's control
mode and override value can be changed.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

476
 14 Output Override User Interface
14.2 Home Screen on AS-B Servers

14.2 Home Screen on AS-B Servers

Use the Home screen to get information on the AS-B server host name and IP
address.

Figure: Home screen on AS-B servers

Table: Home screen on AS-B Servers

Component Description

[Host name] Displays the AS-B server host name.

eth1:[IP address] Displays the AS-B server IP address.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

477
14 Output Override User Interface
14.3 Home Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module

14.3 Home Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module

Use the Home screen to get information on the MP-C or IP-IO module model
name, BACnet ID, and TCP/IP configuration settings.

Figure: Home screen on MP-C or IP-IO module

Table: Home screen on MP-C or IP-IO module

Component Description

[Model name] Displays the MP-C or IP-IO module model

name.

BACnet ID: [BACnet ID] Displays the MP-C or IP-IO module BACnet
ID.

IP Assign: [Assignment method] Displays the IP address assignment

method used for assigning an IP address to
the MP-C or IP-IO module. For more
information, see the IP Address
Assignment for SmartX IP Controllers topic
on WebHelp.

IP: [IP address] Displays the MP-C or IP-IO module IP

address.

SM: [Subnet mask] Displays the subnet mask, which is used to

determine what subnet the MP-C or IP-IO
module belongs to.

GW: [Default gateway] Displays the default gateway (router)

address.

MAC: [MAC address] Displays the MP-C or IP-IO module MAC

address.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

478
 14 Output Override User Interface
14.4 I/O Filter Screen

14.4 I/O Filter Screen

Use the I/O Filter screen to get information on the number of inputs, outputs, and
manually overridden outputs, and to filter the I/O List screen on inputs, outputs,
and manually overridden outputs.

Figure: I/O filter screen

Table: I/O Filter Screen

Component Description

IN Select to filter the I/O List screen on inputs.

OUT Select to filter the I/O List screen on

outputs.

HAND Select to filter the I/O List screen on

manually overridden outputs.

ALL Select to display all inputs and outputs on

the I/O List screen.

Count Displays the following numbers:

• IN: The number of I/O points that are
configured as inputs.
• OUT: The number of I/O points that
are configured as outputs.
• HAND: The portion of the outputs that
are manually overriden.
• ALL: The total number of I/O points,
including unconfigured I/O points.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

479
14 Output Override User Interface
14.5 I/O List Screen

14.5 I/O List Screen

Use the I/O List screen to navigate through the list of I/O points, identify their
configuration, view their present values, and identify if an I/O point has a manual
override or not.

Figure: I/O list screen

Table: I/O List Screen

Component Description

I/O point Displays the I/O points in a list.

Displays a flashing highlighted I/O point
when you are in configuration mode.

Configuration Indicates if and how the I/O point is

configured. For more information, see
section 14.1 “Icons” on page 475.

Active value Displays the present value of the I/O point.

Manual override Indicates if an output has a manual

override or not.

Scroll bar Indicates where on the I/O list you are

located.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

480
 14 Output Override User Interface
14.6 Output Override Screen

14.6 Output Override Screen

Use the Output Override screen to manually override an output or to remove an
override for an output.

Figure: Output override screen

Table: Output Override Screen

Component Description

I/O point Displays the selected I/O point.

Active value Displays the present value of the I/O point.

Configuration Indicates that the I/O point is an output.

Edit Indicates that the control mode and

override value can be changed.

Active mode Indicates what control mode the I/O point is

in.

Mode Displays the available control modes.

Manual override Indicates if an output has a manual

override or not.

Hand value Select the manual override value.

Auto value Displays the program controlled value.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

481
14 Output Override User Interface
14.7 I/O Configuration Screen

14.7 I/O Configuration Screen

Use the I/O Configuration screen to locally configure inputs and outputs, to go to
the About screen or Status screen, and to exit the configuration mode.

Figure: I/O configuration screen

Table: I/O Configuration Screen

Component Description

IO Configuration Select to locally configure inputs and

outputs.

About Select to go to the About screen.

For more information, see section 14.18
“About Screen on AS-B Servers_Display”
on page 493.
For more information, see section 14.19
“About Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module”
on page 494.

Status Select to go to the Status screen (on AS-B

servers). For more information, see section
14.17 “Status Screen on AS-B Servers” on
page 492.

Exit Select to exit the configuration mode and

return to the Home screen.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

482
 14 Output Override User Interface
14.8 I/O Selection Screen

14.8 I/O Selection Screen

Use the I/O Selection screen to locally configure an input or output or to remove
a local configuration for an input or output.

Figure: I/O selection screen

Table: I/O Selection Screen

Component Description

Unconfigured Select to remove a local configuration for

an input or output.

IN Select to locally configure an input.

OUT Select to locally configure an output.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

483
14 Output Override User Interface
14.9 Digital Output Configuration Screen

14.9 Digital Output Configuration Screen

Use the Digital Output Configuration screen to configure a digital output point,
a digital pulsed output point, a pair of tristate output points, or a pair of tristate
pulsed output points.

Figure: Digital output configuration screen

Table: Digital Output Configuration Screen

Component Description

Digital Select to configure a digital output point.

Digital Pulsed Select to configure a digital pulsed output

point.

Tristate Select to configure the selected output

point and the next output point as a pair of
tristate output points.

Tristate Pulsed Select to configure the selected output

point and the next output point as a pair of
tristate pulsed output points.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

484
 14 Output Override User Interface
14.10 Pulse Period Configuration Screen

14.10 Pulse Period Configuration Screen

Use the Pulse Period Configuration screen to configure a pulse period for a
digital pulsed output or tristate pulsed output.

Figure: Pulse period configuration screen

Table: Pulse Period Configuration Screen

Component Description

Period Select a pulse period in seconds to use for

the digital pulsed output or tristate pulsed
output.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

485
14 Output Override User Interface
14.11 Digital Input Configuration Screen

14.11 Digital Input Configuration Screen

Use the Digital Input Configuration screen to configure a digital input or
counter input.

Figure: Digital input configuration screen

Table: Digital Input Configuration Screen

Component Description

Digital Select to configure a digital input.

Counter Select to configure a counter input.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

486
 14 Output Override User Interface
14.12 Analog Output Configuration Screen

14.12 Analog Output Configuration Screen

Use the Analog Output Configuration screen to configure a voltage output or
current output.

Figure: Analog output configuration screen

Table: Analog Output Configuration Screen

Component Description

Voltage Select to configure a voltage output.

Current Select to configure a current output.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

487
14 Output Override User Interface
14.13 Universal Input/Output Configuration Screen

14.13 Universal Input/Output Configuration

Screen
Use the Universal Input/Output Configuration screen to locally configure a
digital input, counter input, voltage input, temperature input, resistive input, 2-wire
RTD input, supervised input, or current input.

Figure: Universal input/output configuration screen

Table: Universal Input/Output Configuration Screen

Component Description

Digital Select to configure a digital input.

Counter Select to configure a counter input.

Voltage Select to configure a voltage input.

Temp Sensor Select to configure a temperature input.

Resistance Select to configure a resistive input.

2-Wire RTD Select to configure a 2-wire RTD input.

Supervised Select to configure a supervised input.

Current Select to configure a current input.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

488
 14 Output Override User Interface
14.14 Temperature Input Configuration Screen

14.14 Temperature Input Configuration Screen

Use the Temperature Input Configuration screen to configure a thermistor type
to use for a temperature input.

Figure: Temperature input configuration screen

Table: Temperature Input Configuration Screen

Component Description

10K ACC Select to use a 10 kohm Type I

(Continuum) thermistor or SpaceLogic
Resistive Temperature Sensor
(SLAnXXXa).

1.8K TAC Select to use a 1.8 kohm Xenta thermistor.

10K CSI Select to use a 10 kohm Type II (I/NET)

thermistor.

10K Satchwell Select to use a 10 kohm Type III

(Satchwell) thermistor.

10K S-well linear Select to use a 10 kohm linearized

(Satchwell D?T) thermistor.

10K Invensys Select to use a 10 kohm Type IV (FD)

thermistor.

10K I-sys linear Select to use a 10 kohm linearized Type V

(FD with 11 kohm shunt) thermistor.

1K Balco Select to use a 1 kohm Balco thermistor.

20K Honeywell Select to use a 20 kohm Honeywell

thermistor.

2.2K J Controls Select to use a 2.2 kohm Johnson Controls

thermistor.

a) The fourth character (“n”) of this model number indicates the housing: S (Medium matte white), W
(Optimum glass white), or B (Optimum glass black). The model number SXWSATXXXRXX is
replaced by SLASXXX

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

489
14 Output Override User Interface
14.15 Supervised Input Configuration Screen

14.15 Supervised Input Configuration Screen

Use the Supervised Input Configuration screen to configure a supervised
circuit type to use for a supervised input.

Figure: Supervised input configuration screen

Table: Supervised Input Configuration Screen

Component Description

NO Series Select to use a Normally Open (NO) circuit

with a resistor connected in series with the
switch.

NC Series Select to use a Normally Closed (NC)

circuit with a resistor connected in series
with the switch.

NO Parallel Select to use a Normally Open (NO) circuit

with a resistor connected in parallel with the
switch.

NC Parallel Select to use a Normally Closed (NC)

circuit with a resistor connected in parallel
with the switch.

NO Series/Parallel Select to use a Normally Open (NO) circuit

with one resistor connected in series with
the switch and one resistor connected in
parallel with the switch.

NC Series/Parallel Select to use a Normally Closed (NC)

circuit with one resistor connected in series
with the switch and one resistor connected
in parallel with the switch.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

490
 14 Output Override User Interface
14.16 Supervised Resistor Configuration Screen

14.16 Supervised Resistor Configuration

Screen
Use the Supervised Resistor Configuration screen to configure a resistor
value of a supervised circuit for use with a supervised input.

Figure: Supervised resistor configuration screen

Table: Supervised Resistor Configuration Screen

Component Description

Resistor Select a resistor value in ohm to use for the

supervised input.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

491
14 Output Override User Interface
14.17 Status Screen on AS-B Servers

14.17 Status Screen on AS-B Servers

The Status screen on AS-B servers displays deep technical information that is
useful for R&D and debug purposes only. The displayed information is not
intended to be used for operation, maintenance, and troubleshooting of the
system.

Figure: Status screen on AS-B servers

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

492
 14 Output Override User Interface
14.18 About Screen on AS-B Servers_Display

14.18 About Screen on AS-B Servers_Display

Use the About screen to get information on the firmware for the AS-B server I/O
CPU.

Figure: About screen on AS-B servers

Table: About Screen on AS-B Servers

Component Description

IOCPU Firmware: [Version] Displays the firmware version for the AS-B
server I/O CPU.

[Date and time] Displays the date and time when the
firmware version was created.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

493
14 Output Override User Interface
14.19 About Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module

14.19 About Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module

Use the About screen to get information on the firmware for the MP-C or IP-IO
module I/O CPU and main CPU.

Figure: About screen on MP-C or IP-IO module

Table: About Screen on MP-C or IP-IO Module

Component Description

IO Firmware: Displays the firmware version for the MP-C

or IP-IO module I/O CPU.
[Version]

CPU Firmware: Displays the firmware version for the MP-C

or IP-IO module main CPU.
[Version]

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

494
15 IP-IO Modules

Topics
IP-IO Modules
IP-IO Module Models and I/O Point Types
IP-IO Module Built-in Power Supply
BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory
IP-IO Module Supported Building Standards
IP-IO Module Communication Ports
IP-IO Module Screw Terminals
IP-IO-DI10 Screw Terminals
IP-IO-UIO10 Screw Terminals
IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 Screw Terminals
IP-IO Module LEDs
IP-IO Module Reset Modes
IP-IO Module Device Installation
Installing an IP-IO Module on a DIN Rail
Installing an IP-IO Module on a Flat Surface
Installing MP-C Display
Installing a Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module
Removing a Terminal Block from an IP-IO Module
Wiring a Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module
Powering Up an IP-IO Module
 Digital Inputs
15 Universal Inputs/Outputs
Relay Outputs
High Power Relay Outputs
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.1 IP-IO Modules

15.1 IP-IO Modules

The IP-IO module provides I/O expansion to your HVAC application over
BACnet/IP and can share their I/O resources across applications running in
automation servers, BACnet/IP controllers, or third-party systems. The IP-IO
module can be installed near facilities in the field, away from the automation
server or the BACnet/IP controller.
The IP-IO module allows for flexible control options due to the dual Ethernet ports
and the versatile mix of digital inputs, universal inputs/outputs, relay outputs, and
high power relay outputs.
When IP-IO modules are part of an EcoStruxure BMS, you can take full
advantage of the existing EcoStruxure Building Operation engineering tools.
The IP-IO module device can be installed on a DIN rail or other flat surface inside
a cabinet.
All IP-IO models can be equipped with MP-C Display, which is an optional add-on
module for output override. The MP-C Display can also be used to view and
locally configure inputs and outputs.

Figure: IP-IO module

15.1.1 IP-IO Module Models and I/O Point Types

The IP-IO module comes in three models with different I/O point count and
different I/O point types.
For more information, see section 15.2 “IP-IO Module Models and I/O Point
Types” on page 503.

15.1.2 Output Override Function (Optional)

The output override function allows you to manually override outputs. This
function can be used for testing, commissioning, and maintenance of equipment.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

497
15 IP-IO Modules
15.1 IP-IO Modules

For more information, see section 13.1.7 “” on page 428.

15.1.3 IP-IO Module Built-in Power Supply

The IP-IO module has a built-in power supply designed to accommodate 24 VAC
at 50/60 Hz or 24 to 30 VDC input power.
For more information, see section 15.3 “IP-IO Module Built-in Power Supply” on
page 505.

15.1.4 BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory

BACnet/IP devices have three types of memory:
• Flash memory: for boot loader, operating system, application software, and
configuration storage
• RAM: for runtime operation
• FRAM non-volatile memory: for data retention in the case of power outage
For more information, see section 16.5 “BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory” on
page 574.

15.1.5 IP-IO Module Supported Building Standards

One of the cornerstones of the EcoStruxure BMS is support for open standards.
As a result, the IP-IO module complies with the BACnet open standard, one of
the most popular standards for buildings.
For more information, see section 15.5 “IP-IO Module Supported Building
Standards” on page 507.

15.1.6 IP-IO Module Communication Ports

The IP-IO module contains a combination of Ethernet and USB communication
ports.
For more information, see section 15.6 “IP-IO Module Communication Ports” on
page 508.

15.1.7 IP-IO Module Screw Terminals

The IP-IO module is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device. The
IP-IO module uses pluggable terminal blocks, which are easy to install and
remove from the device.
For more information, see section 15.7 “IP-IO Module Screw Terminals” on page
509.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

498
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.1 IP-IO Modules

15.1.8 IP-IO Module LEDs

There are three LEDs on the front panel of the IP-IO module.
For more information, see section 15.11 “IP-IO Module LEDs” on page 518.

15.1.9 IP-IO Module Reset Modes

You can reset and restart the IP-IO modules in different ways depending on how
long you press the reset button. The resets and restarts can affect the retention
of values after restart based on the retain levels configured for the variables.
For more information, see section 15.12 “IP-IO Module Reset Modes” on page
520.

15.1.10 IP-IO Module Device Installation

The IP-IO module device can be installed on a DIN rail or other flat surface inside
a cabinet.
For more information, see section 15.13 “IP-IO Module Device Installation” on
page 523.

15.1.11 Wiring
The wiring recommendations provide guidance regarding wiring of the Central IO
modules, automation servers, BACnet/IP devices, RP controller expansion
modules, and Operator Display.
For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.

15.1.12 BACnet/IP Device Firmware Management

Using WorkStation, you can update the firmware of multiple BACnet/IP devices
and their attached SpaceLogic Sensor devices at the same time with minimum
downtime. In particular, the universal upgrade package simplifies the update
process and requires minimal user involvement and coordination.
TIP: SpaceLogic Sensor devices are supported by the BACnet/IP controllers
- MP and RP controllers.
For more information, see section 18.17 “BACnet/IP Device Firmware
Management” on page 882.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

499
15 IP-IO Modules
15.1 IP-IO Modules

15.1.13 Specifications
AC input

Nominal voltage 24 VAC

Operating voltage range +/- 20 %

Frequency 50/60 Hz

Maximum power consumption 17 VA

Power input protection MOV suppression and internal fuse

DC input

Nominal voltage 24 to 30 VDC

Operating voltage range 21 to 33 VDC

Maximum power consumption 9W

Power input protection MOV suppression and internal fuse

Environment

Ambient temperature, operating 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) at normal operationa

-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) for rooftop applications, horizontal installation onlya
a) MP-C Display has an operating temperature range of -30 to +60 °C (-22 to +140 °F).

Ambient temperature, storage -40 to +70 °C (-40 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Material

Plastic flame rating UL94-5V

Ingress protection rating IP 20

Mechanical

Dimensions 153 W x 110 H x 64 D mm (6.0 W x 4.3 H x 2.5 D in.)

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

500
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.1 IP-IO Modules

Weight, IP-IO-DI10
Including terminal blocks 0.337 kg (0.742 lb)

Weight, IP-IO-UIO10
Including terminal blocks 0.336 kg (0.740 lb)

Weight, IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4
Including terminal blocks 0.357 kg (0.787 lb)

Installation DIN rail or other flat surface inside a cabinet

Terminal blocks Removable

Real-time clock

Accuracy, at 25 °C (77 °F) +/-1 minute per month

Backup time, at 25 °C (77 °F) 7 days minimum

Communication ports

Ethernet Dual 10/100BASE-TX (RJ45)

USB 1 USB 2.0 device port (mini-B)

1 USB 2.0 host port (type-A), 5 VDC, 2.5 W

Communications

BACnet BACnet/IP, port configurable, default 47808

BTL B-ASC (BACnet Application Specific Controller)a
a) See the BTL Product Catalog for up-to-date details on BTL listed firmware revisions on BACnet
International's home page.

CPU

Frequency 500 MHz

Type ARM Cortex-A7 dual-core

DDR3 SDRAM 128 MB

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

501
15 IP-IO Modules
15.1 IP-IO Modules

NOR flash memory 32 MB

Memory backup 128 kB, FRAM, non-volatile

MP-C Display (Optional)

Removable No

Display size 36 W x 17 H mm (1.4 W x 0.7 H in.)

Display resolution 128 x 64 pixels

Display type FSTN monochrome LCD, white color transflective backlight

Power consumption max. 0.15 W (45 mA at 3.3 V)

Ambient temperature, operating -30 to +60 °C (-22 to +140 °F)

Ambient temperature, storage -40 to +70 °C (-40 to +158 °F)

Maximum humidity 95 % RH non-condensing

Weight 0.035 kg (0.077 lb)

15.1.14 Internal Configuration

The IP-IO module internal configuration with regards to the signal ground is
shown in the following figure.

Figure: IP-IO module internal configuration

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

502
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.2 IP-IO Module Models and I/O Point Types

15.2 IP-IO Module Models and I/O Point

Types
The IP-IO module comes in three models with different I/O point count and
different I/O point types.
Model I/O Points

IP-IO-DI10 10

IP-IO-UIO10 10

IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 9

All IP-IO module models have the same small footprint.

The versatile mix of I/O point types match a wide variety of applications. The
universal inputs/outputs are highly flexible and can be configured as either inputs
or outputs.

Table: I/O Point Types by IP-IO Models

I/O Point Types IP-IO-DI10 IP-IO-UIO10 IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4

Digital inputs 10 - -

Universal I/O - 10 5
Type Ub

Relay outputs - - 3
Form A

High power relay outputs - - 1

Form A

15.2.1 Digital Inputs

The digital inputs can be used for sensing of multiple dry contact digital inputs in
applications, such as equipment status monitoring or alarm point monitoring.
For more information, see section 15.21.2 “” on page 543.

15.2.2 Universal Inputs/Outputs

The universal inputs/outputs are ideal for any mix of temperature, pressure, flow,
status points, and similar point types in a building control system.
For more information, see section 15.22.3 “” on page 551.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

503
15 IP-IO Modules
15.2 IP-IO Module Models and I/O Point Types

15.2.3 Relay Outputs

The relay outputs support digital Form A point types. The Form A relays are
designed for direct load applications.
For more information, see section 15.23.2 “” on page 554.

15.2.4 High Power Relay Outputs

The main application of the high power relay output is to power an electrical
heating element directly.
For more information, see section 15.24.2 “” on page 556.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

504
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.3 IP-IO Module Built-in Power Supply

15.3 IP-IO Module Built-in Power Supply

The IP-IO module has a built-in power supply designed to accommodate 24 VAC
at 50/60 Hz or 24 to 30 VDC input power.
The built-in power supply is based on a half-wave rectified, non-isolated design,
which is complemented with electronic protection components for transient
protection, overload protection, and EMC compliance.
To power the IP-IO module, you can use a transformer or a DC power supply:
• Class 2 (EN 60742) transformer supplying a nominal 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz
• DC power supply supplying a nominal 24 to 30 VDC with the required output
power
For more information, see the SmartX IP Controller - IP-IO Modules topic on
WebHelp.
A separate, local 24 VAC step-down transformer is recommended to power each
BACnet/IP device. The transformer with appropriate VA rating may also be used
to power the locally connected I/O devices. The separate transformer helps to
avoid problems with ground loops, 24 VAC induced EMI on LAN, low or distorted
AC voltage level at the controller, and excess transformer load due to the half-
wave power supply, which can result in intermittent equipment detected faults,
loss of communications, or equipment damage.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Use a separate, local 24 VAC step-down transformer to power each BACnet/IP
device.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

NOTICE
CONTROLLER DEVICE DAMAGE
Do not power the SpaceLogic device with a 24 VAC transformer that is used to
power devices that contain non-isolated full-wave rectifier power supplies.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

505
15 IP-IO Modules
15.4 BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory

15.4 BACnet/IP Controller Device Memory

BACnet/IP devices have three types of memory:
• Flash memory: for boot loader, operating system, application software, and
configuration storage
• RAM: for runtime operation
• FRAM non-volatile memory: for data retention in the case of power outage
You can manually back up or restore BACnet/IP controller devices to a storage
location on a PC or network. For more information, see the BACnet Backup and
Restore topic on WebHelp.
When BACnet/IP controller devices are part of an EcoStruxure BMS, the
configuration data automatically resides in the parent EcoStruxure BMS server.
The EcoStruxure Building Operation database and the BACnet/IP controller
device database are synchronized to help ensure there is always one backup
available that can be used to restore the BACnet/IP controller device memory.
Scheduled backups can provide additional protection against application and
data loss. In addition, device-specific values (for example, AHU or heat pump
data) are duplicated in the parent server to facilitate device replacement
scenarios.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

506
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.5 IP-IO Module Supported Building Standards

15.5 IP-IO Module Supported Building

Standards
One of the cornerstones of the EcoStruxure BMS is support for open standards.
As a result, the IP-IO module complies with the BACnet open standard, one of
the most popular standards for buildings.
The IP-IO module can natively communicate with BACnet/IP networks. When the
IP-IO module is part of an EcoStruxure BMS, the BACnet protocol is used for
communication between the device and its parent EcoStruxure BMS server and
other BACnet devices on the IP network, including BACnet/IP controllers. As a
native BACnet/IP device, the IP-IO module supports BACnet services such as
trends and alarms, and the IP-IO module can communicate with other BACnet
devices on a BACnet/IP network. The IP-IO module conforms to the BACnet
Application Specific Controller (B-ASC) device profile.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

507
15 IP-IO Modules
15.6 IP-IO Module Communication Ports

15.6 IP-IO Module Communication Ports

The IP-IO module contains a combination of Ethernet and USB communication
ports.
This combination includes the following ports:
• Two 10/100 Ethernet ports
• One USB host port
• One USB device port
When both Ethernet ports are enabled, they function as an onboard Ethernet
switch. Disabling the second Ethernet port disables the switching function. The
switching function enables flexible network topologies. For more information, see
the Advantages to Using External Bindings topic on WebHelp. The second port
also provides a connection point for a laptop running the Commission mobile
application.
The two USB ports are reserved for future use.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

508
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.7 IP-IO Module Screw Terminals

15.7 IP-IO Module Screw Terminals

The IP-IO module is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device. The
IP-IO module uses pluggable terminal blocks, which are easy to install and
remove from the device.
The only exception is the high power relay output on the IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4
model, which uses a two-position fixed terminal block due to current
requirements.
The wiring recommendations are provided separately. For more information, see
section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.

15.7.1 IP-IO-DI10 Screw Terminals

IP-IO-DI10 has 10 I/O points and the IP-IO module is equipped with four
pluggable terminal blocks.
For more information, see section 15.8 “IP-IO-DI10 Screw Terminals” on page
510.

15.7.2 IP-IO-UIO10 Screw Terminals

IP-IO-UIO10 has 10 I/O points and the IP-IO module is equipped with four
pluggable terminal blocks.
For more information, see section 15.9 “IP-IO-UIO10 Screw Terminals” on page
512.

15.7.3 IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 Screw Terminals

IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 has 9 I/O points and the IP-IO module is equipped with four
pluggable terminal blocks and one fixed terminal block.
For more information, see section 15.10 “IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 Screw Terminals”
on page 515.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

509
15 IP-IO Modules
15.8 IP-IO-DI10 Screw Terminals

15.8 IP-IO-DI10 Screw Terminals

IP-IO-DI10 has 10 I/O points and the IP-IO module is equipped with four
pluggable terminal blocks.
Recommended screw tightening torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in)

Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, IP-IO-DI10

The terminal blocks are used as follows:

• One 3-position pluggable terminal block for the power input
• Two 6-position plus one 3-position pluggable terminal blocks for the 10
digital inputs

Table: Screw Terminals, IP-IO-DI10

Terminal number Designation Usage

Power input

1 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 17 VA

Positive lead (+) when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 9 W

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

510
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.8 IP-IO-DI10 Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

2 /– Earth ground lead of 24

VAC transformer connects
to terminals 2 or 3.
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.
Negative (–) lead when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 9 W

3 Terminal 3 is provided for

convenience to connect to
protective earth ground
(optional).
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.

Digital inputs

18 DI1 Digital input

19 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

20 DI2 Digital input

21 DI3 Digital input

22 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

23 DI4 Digital input

24 DI5 Digital input

25 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

26 DI6 Digital input

27 DI7 Digital input

28 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

29 DI8 Digital input

30 DI9 Digital input

31 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

32 DI10 Digital input

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

511
15 IP-IO Modules
15.9 IP-IO-UIO10 Screw Terminals

15.9 IP-IO-UIO10 Screw Terminals

IP-IO-UIO10 has 10 I/O points and the IP-IO module is equipped with four
pluggable terminal blocks.
Recommended screw tightening torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in)

Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, IP-IO-UIO10

The terminal blocks are used as follows:

• One 3-position pluggable terminal block for the power input
• Two 6-position plus one 3-position pluggable terminal blocks for the 10
universal inputs/outputs of type Ub

Table: Screw Terminals, IP-IO-UIO10

Terminal number Designation Usage

Power input

1 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 17 VA

Positive lead (+) when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 9 W

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

512
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.9 IP-IO-UIO10 Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

2 /– Earth ground lead of 24

VAC transformer connects
to terminals 2 or 3.
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.
Negative (–) lead when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 9 W

3 Terminal 3 is provided for

convenience to connect to
protective earth ground
(optional).
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.

Universal inputs/outputs

18 Ub1 Universal input/output, type

Ub

19 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

20 Ub2 Universal input/output, type

Ub

21 Ub3 Universal input/output, type

Ub

22 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

23 Ub4 Universal input/output, type

Ub

24 Ub5 Universal input/output, type

Ub

25 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

26 Ub6 Universal input/output, type

Ub

27 Ub7 Universal input/output, type

Ub

28 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

29 Ub8 Universal input/output, type

Ub

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

513
15 IP-IO Modules
15.9 IP-IO-UIO10 Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

30 Ub9 Universal input/output, type

Ub

31 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

32 Ub10 Universal input/output, type

Ub

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

514
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.10 IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 Screw Terminals

15.10 IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 Screw Terminals

IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 has 9 I/O points and the IP-IO module is equipped with four
pluggable terminal blocks and one fixed terminal block.
Recommended screw tightening torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in)

Figure: Screw terminals and other connectors, IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4

The terminal blocks are used as follows:

• One 3-position pluggable terminal block for the power input
• One 6-position pluggable terminal block for the three relay outputs
• One 2-position fixed terminal block for the high power relay output
• One 6-position plus one 2-position pluggable terminal blocks for the five
universal inputs/outputs of type Ub

Table: Screw Terminals, IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4

Terminal number Designation Usage

Power input

1 24 VAC/DC 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 17 VA

Positive lead (+) when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 9 W

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

515
15 IP-IO Modules
15.10 IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

2 /– Earth ground lead of 24

VAC transformer connects
to terminals 2 or 3.
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.
Negative (–) lead when
operating the device from
24-30 VDC, 9 W

3 Terminal 3 is provided for

convenience to connect to
protective earth ground
(optional).
Terminals 2 and 3 are
internally connected.

Relay outputs

10 DO1 Relay output, type Form A

11 DO1 Relay output, type Form A

12 DO2 Relay output, type Form A

13 DO2 Relay output, type Form A

14 DO3 Relay output, type Form A

15 DO3 Relay output, type Form A

High power relay outputs

16 DO4 High power relay output,

type Form A

17 DO4 High power relay output,

type Form A

Universal inputs/outputs

18 Ub1 Universal input/output, type

Ub

19 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

20 Ub2 Universal input/output, type

Ub

21 Ub3 Universal input/output, type

Ub

22 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

516
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.10 IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 Screw Terminals

Continued
Terminal number Designation Usage

23 Ub4 Universal input/output, type

Ub

24 Ub5 Universal input/output, type

Ub

25 RET Internally connected to all

earth ground and RET
terminals

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

517
15 IP-IO Modules
15.11 IP-IO Module LEDs

15.11 IP-IO Module LEDs

There are three LEDs on the front panel of the IP-IO module.

Figure: IP-IO module LEDs

Table: IP-IO Module LEDs

Function Color

Status (IP-IO module) Green/Red

Ethernet 1 Green/Yellow

Ethernet 2 Green/Yellow

NOTE: The IP-IO module Ethernet and Status indicators comprise two
LEDs (green/yellow and green/red respectively) in one structure.
The LEDs indicate status of the IP-IO module and the ongoing communication.

15.11.1 Status LED

The IP-IO module Status LED indicates the condition of the device.

Table: IP-IO Module Status LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, constant Normal operation, status OK

IP-IO module firmware application running

Green, flashing (~1 Hz) Device restarting, wait

IP-IO module firmware application running

Red, constant Detected error, attention required

Red, flashing (~1 Hz) Device operates, but a problem needs

attention

Red/green, flashing (~1 Hz) IP-IO module I/O board receiving software
upgrade, wait

Amber, constant IP-IO module firmware boot applet running

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

518
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.11 IP-IO Module LEDs

Continued
LED Patterns Condition

Amber, flash Device restarting, wait

IP-IO module firmware boot applet started

15.11.2 Ethernet LEDs

The Ethernet (1 and 2) LEDs indicate the condition of the Ethernet
communication.

Table: Ethernet LED Patterns

LED Patterns Condition

Green, flashing 10 Mbit communication

Yellow, flashing 100 Mbit communication

Green/yellow, constant 10/100 Mbit link connected, no activity

No light No link, no activity

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

519
15 IP-IO Modules
15.12 IP-IO Module Reset Modes

15.12 IP-IO Module Reset Modes

You can reset and restart the IP-IO modules in different ways depending on how
long you press the reset button. The resets and restarts can affect the retention
of values after restart based on the retain levels configured for the variables.

Figure: Location of the reset button on the IP-IO module

You can use a straightened segment of a paper clip or a similar tool to press the
reset button.

Table: Reset Modes

Mode Description

Warm start Press and release the reset button in less

than 5 seconds.
Performing a power cycle in a BACnet/IP
controller is analogous to a hardware warm
start.

Cold start Press and hold the reset button for more
than 5 seconds but less than 9 seconds.

Network reset Press and hold the reset button for 10 to 19

seconds.
Perform a network reset in WorkStation in
order to reset the IP address settings to
DHCP with a failover to Auto-IP.

Factory reset Press and hold the reset button for 20 to 29

seconds.
Consult the following Factory Reset
subsection for more details.

Erase database Press and hold the reset button for 30 to 39

seconds.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

520
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.12 IP-IO Module Reset Modes

Continued
Mode Description

Cancel reset action Press and hold the reset button for more
than 40 seconds and then release the
button.
Performing this action cancels the reset
request that would be initiated by any of the
shorter button press durations.

TIP: If the IP-IO module is equipped with the MP-C Display add-on module,
a count-up timer and progress bar are displayed to assist in reset selection.
There is also a reset mode indicator that lets you know which reset occurs if
you release at that time.

15.12.1 Factory Reset

In WorkStation, if your BACnet/IP device seems completely unresponsive,
perform a factory reset to restore the device to a state where it can be
successfully commissioned. After you release the reset button, a factory reset
may take up to 30 seconds to process. All diagnostic logs and the database are
erased during a factory reset. By contrast, controller firmware does not revert and
remains at the same active level.
TIP: After a physical factory reset in a BACnet/IP controller, any controller
proxy object in the EcoStruxure BMS database that carries the serial number
of that controller may trigger an automatic association. This association
occurs between the reset physical controller and the controller proxy object
in the EcoStruxure BMS database.
For more information, see the Automatic Association after a Factory Reset in
a SmartX IP Controller topic on WebHelp.

15.12.2 Retain Levels for Variables

Variables have a configurable retain level, which controls if the value of the
variable is retained after a restart of the IP-IO module. There are three retain
levels:
• No
• Warm start
• Cold start
The following table lists what is retained after a warm start or cold start based on
the configured retain level.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

521
15 IP-IO Modules
15.12 IP-IO Module Reset Modes

Table: Retained Variable Values Depending on Restart Mode and Retain Level
Restart mode Retain level: Retain level: Retain level:
No Warm start Cold start

Warm start Default valuea Variable retains last Variable retains last
value configured by value configured by
Values configured
a user. a user.
by a user or
application are lost. Values configured Values configured
by an application are by an application are
retained. retained.

Cold start Default valuea Variable loses last Variable retains last
value configured by value configured by
Values configured
a user. a user.
by a user or
application are lost. Values configured Values configured
by an application are by an application are
lost. retained.

a
Default value is the value the variable gets when it is created.
For more information, see the Retain Level topic on WebHelp.
TIP: Although variable values in IP-IO modules are retained in accordance
with this matrix, automation server retention behaves differently. As a result,
variable values retained in the server that are not retained in the IP-IO
module may be restored to the module during a download command. For
more information, see the Retain Level topic on WebHelp.

15.12.3 Value Retention on Restarts Using

Command Priority Levels
When you configure the restart retain level for an object with command priority
levels, it is recommended that you base retention exclusively on either of the
following:

• The value property configured by using the Configure button for that
property in the Basic tab of the object.

• The command priorities configured by the Configure button for the

appropriate command priority levels in the Command tab of the object.
Do not configure retention for both the value property on the Basic tab and the
command priorities of the object because doing so may result in unexpected
behavior following a controller restart. For example, if the value property is
configured to retain during a restart, then that value is written to priority 16
following the restart, regardless of the retain level of priority 16.
For more information, see the Binding Value and Priority Properties in a SmartX
IP Controller topic on WebHelp.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

522
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.13 IP-IO Module Device Installation

15.13 IP-IO Module Device Installation

The IP-IO module device can be installed on a DIN rail or other flat surface inside
a cabinet.
A DIN rail is a common and convenient technique for installing the IP-IO module
along with other associated control and monitoring devices. The most efficient
ventilation is achieved with the wall-mounted DIN rail oriented horizontally and
with adequate space provided between the IP-IO module rail and adjacent rails
or other panel-mounted devices.
The IP-IO module is typically installed horizontally (on a DIN rail going from left to
right), with the device label text in the upright position reading left to right.

Figure: IP-IO module installed on a horizontal DIN rail

The restrictions on installing the device in other orientations differ depending on

the operating conditions.

NOTICE
CONTROLLER DEVICE DAMAGE
Follow the installation orientation restrictions that apply to the specific
BACnet/IP device.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Under normal operating conditions of 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F), the IP-IO module
can be installed in the following orientations:
• Horizontally (on a DIN rail going from left to right), with the device label text
in the upright position reading left to right. See “a” in the following figure.
• Vertically (on a DIN rail going from top to bottom), which means that the
device is rotated +90 degrees or -90 degrees from the horizontal position.
See “b” and “c” in the following figure.
Installing the IP-IO module rotated 180 degrees from the horizontal position with
device label text up and down (“e” in the figure), face down from a ceiling (“d” in
the figure), or face up on a horizontal surface (“f” in the figure) is not supported.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

523
15 IP-IO Modules
15.13 IP-IO Module Device Installation

Figure: Installation orientation restrictions for the IP-IO module operated in normal
conditions, 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)

When the IP-IO module is used for rooftop applications, -40 to +60 °C (-40 to
+140 °F), the device should be installed horizontally, with the device label text in
the upright position reading left to right. See “a” in the following figure. Any other
installation orientation (“b”, “c”, “d”, “e”, and “f” in the figure) may exceed the IP-IO
module's thermal specifications, which can damage the module.

Figure: Installation orientation restrictions for the IP-IO module operated at -40 to +60 °C (-
40 to +140 °F)

The IP-IO module can be installed in a standard DIN enclosure.

When installing IP-IO modules in a cabinet, it is recommended to provide ample
space between the DIN rails and modules for sufficient ventilation.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

524
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.13 IP-IO Module Device Installation

Figure: IP-IO modules installed on horizontal DIN rails in a cabinet

To help prevent the device from sliding down or sideways on the DIN rail, install
an end clip for DIN 35 (part number SXWDINEND10001) tightly against the
bottom or rightmost device on the rail. The end clip is easily removed if you bend
the snap lock open with a screwdriver.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Use an end clip (part number SXWDINEND10001) when you install the device
on a vertical DIN rail.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Figure: End clip for DIN 35 fixed across the DIN rail

The IP-IO module is delivered with terminal blocks installed on the device.
The terminal blocks are removable. You can replace an IP-IO module in seconds
because no terminal wiring is affected. The only exception is the high power relay
output on the IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 model, which uses a two-position fixed terminal
block due to current requirements.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

525
15 IP-IO Modules
15.13 IP-IO Module Device Installation

All IP-IO module models can be equipped with MP-C Display (part number
SXWMPCDSP10001), which is an add-on module that enables manual override
control of analog and digital outputs. The module consists of an LCD display and
keys. The module is designed for permanent installation.

Figure: MP-C Display installed on an IP-IO module

Do not try to remove the MP-C Display module as it may damage the enclosure
and the module. Once installed, the MP-C Display module cannot be removed.

NOTICE
CONTROLLER DEVICE DAMAGE
Do not try to remove the MP-C Display module.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

526
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.14 Installing an IP-IO Module on a DIN Rail

15.14 Installing an IP-IO Module on a DIN Rail

You install an IP-IO module on a DIN rail inside a cabinet to ensure that the
device is securely fastened and to allow for sufficient ventilation.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Use an end clip (part number SXWDINEND10001) when you install the device
on a vertical DIN rail.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

For more information, see section 15.13 “IP-IO Module Device Installation” on
page 523.

To install an IP-IO module on a DIN rail

1. Push the DIN rail clip.

2. Hook the device onto the top of the DIN rail.

3. Push the device fully onto the DIN rail.
4. Release the DIN rail clip.
5. For a vertical DIN rail, install an end clip (stop) below the device.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

527
15 IP-IO Modules
15.15 Installing an IP-IO Module on a Flat Surface

15.15 Installing an IP-IO Module on a Flat

Surface
You install an IP-IO module on a flat surface inside a cabinet to ensure that the
device is securely fastened and to allow for sufficient ventilation.
For more information, see section 15.13 “IP-IO Module Device Installation” on
page 523.

To install an IP-IO module on a flat surface

1. Refer to the dimensional drawing before installing the IP-IO module.

2. Ensure that you have the proper mounting hardware and anchoring system.
3. Check the weight-bearing load before choosing your mounting hardware.
4. Find a suitable location and surface on which to mount the IP-IO module.
Continued on next page

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

528
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.15 Installing an IP-IO Module on a Flat Surface

5. Drill three mounting holes that fit number 8 or M4 screws (or anchors):
• Two holes for the top two screws on which you hang the IP-IO module
• One hole for the screw at the bottom that prevents the device from
being lifted off the top two screws
Use the following drawing to measure out the location of the three holes for
the IP-IO module.

NOTE: You can also use the 1:1 drill template in the installation sheet
that comes with each IP-IO module.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

529
15 IP-IO Modules
15.15 Installing an IP-IO Module on a Flat Surface

6. Install number 8 or M4 (4 mm) pan head self-tapping screws (or anchors) in

the two top holes, leaving approximately 5 mm (0.2 inch) space between the
head of the screw (or anchor) and the flat surface to accommodate the IP-IO
module material thickness.

7. Fit the two keyhole slots on the back of the IP-IO module enclosure to the
heads of the mounted screws (or anchors) and then slide the IP-IO module
down in place on the screws (or anchors).

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

530
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.15 Installing an IP-IO Module on a Flat Surface

8. Fit the bottom screw (or anchor) to the hole at the bottom of the IP-IO
module and tighten the screw (or anchor).

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

531
15 IP-IO Modules
15.16 Installing MP-C Display

15.16 Installing MP-C Display

You install an MP-C Display module on the MP-C or IP-IO module to enable
manual override control of the analog and digital outputs. The MP-C Display
module cannot be removed.

NOTICE
Take proper precautions before handling the display module to prevent
damage from electrostatic discharge.

NOTICE
Disconnect power to the MP-C or IP-IO module before installing the MP-C
Display module. Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment
damage.

For more information, see section 10.11 “MP-C Device Installation” on page 315.
For more information, see section 15.13 “IP-IO Module Device Installation” on
page 523.

To install MP-C Display

1. Disconnect power to the MP-C or IP-IO module.
2. Locate the blank face plate on the MP-C or IP-IO module.

Continued on next page

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

532
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.16 Installing MP-C Display

3. Push and hold the two tabs on the blank face plate.

4. Remove the blank face plate by pulling it straight out.

Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

533
15 IP-IO Modules
15.16 Installing MP-C Display

5. Install the MP-C Display module in place of the blank face plate.

NOTICE
CONTROLLER DEVICE DAMAGE
Do not try to remove the MP-C Display module.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

534
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.17 Installing a Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module

15.17 Installing a Terminal Block on an IP-IO

Module
You install the terminal blocks on an IP-IO module to add or enable wiring for the
device.
For more information, see section 15.13 “IP-IO Module Device Installation” on
page 523.

To install a terminal block on an IP-IO module

1. Ensure that you have the correct terminal blocks.

NOTICE
Use only terminal blocks delivered with the IP-IO module. Failure to follow
these instructions can result in equipment damage.

2. If the terminal block is wired, ensure that the labels on the wires match the
labeling of the terminals on the device.

NOTICE
The terminal blocks must be plugged into the correct connector headers
on the device. Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment
damage.

3. Insert the terminal block at an angle against the back wall of the connector
header.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not push the terminal block straight down into the connector header as
this may crack the header.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

4. Press and roll the terminal block into the connector header.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

535
15 IP-IO Modules
15.17 Installing a Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module

5. Continue until you hear a click sound, which indicates that the terminal block
is fully engaged with the connector header.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

536
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.18 Removing a Terminal Block from an IP-IO Module

15.18 Removing a Terminal Block from an IP-

IO Module
You remove a terminal block from an IP-IO module in order to replace the
module.
For more information, see section 15.13 “IP-IO Module Device Installation” on
page 523.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
De-energize the high-voltage equipment connected to the relay outputs before
removing the terminal block. More than one disconnect switch may be required
to de-energize the equipment before servicing.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Disconnect the 24 VAC/DC power supply and other electrically powered
equipment before removing the terminal block.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

To remove a terminal block from an IP-IO module

1. De-energize the high-voltage equipment connected to the relay outputs of
the IP-IO module.
This only applies to the IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 model, which has relay outputs.
2. Disconnect the 24 VAC/DC power supply and other electrically powered
equipment that is connected to the IP-IO module.
3. Insert a small screwdriver in the slot between the terminal block and the
connector header.

4. Gently pry the terminal block at an angle away from the connector header.

Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

537
15 IP-IO Modules
15.18 Removing a Terminal Block from an IP-IO Module

5. Remove the terminal block from the connector header.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

538
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.19 Wiring a Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module

15.19 Wiring a Terminal Block on an IP-IO

Module
You wire the terminal blocks installed on the IP-IO module to connect I/O devices
and power.
For more information, see section 15.13 “IP-IO Module Device Installation” on
page 523.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
De-energize the high-voltage equipment connected to the relay outputs before
wiring. More than one disconnect switch may be required to de-energize the
equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
Disconnect the 24 VAC/DC power supply and other electrically powered
equipment before wiring.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury or equipment damage.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Always use the recommended cables (or wires with larger cross-sectional
area). For more information, see section 31.1 “Wiring” on page 1129.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

To wire a terminal block on an IP-IO module

1. De-energize the high-voltage equipment connected to the relay outputs of
the IP-IO module.
This only applies to the IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 model, which has relay outputs.
2. Disconnect the 24 VAC/DC power supply and other electrically powered
equipment that is connected to the IP-IO module.
3. Ensure that the correct terminal block is used and that it is properly installed
on the IP-IO module. For more information, see section 15.17 “Installing a
Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module” on page 535.
4. Loosen the screws of the terminal block.
5. Strip approximately 7 mm (0.3 inch) of the insulation from the end of each
wire.
6. Insert the stripped end of each wire fully into its intended terminal. Ensure
that no bare wire strands extend from the terminal.
Continued on next page

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

539
15 IP-IO Modules
15.19 Wiring a Terminal Block on an IP-IO Module

7. Tighten the screws using a small flat-blade screwdriver. Ensure that the
screws are fully tightened. Use the following recommended screw tightening
torque: 0.56 Nm (5 lbf.in).

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

540
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.20 Powering Up an IP-IO Module

15.20 Powering Up an IP-IO Module

You perform the following steps to power up an IP-IO module.
For more information, see section 15.13 “IP-IO Module Device Installation” on
page 523.
For more information, see section 15.3 “IP-IO Module Built-in Power Supply” on
page 505.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Use a separate, local 24 VAC step-down transformer to power each BACnet/IP
device.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

To power up an IP-IO module

1. Check that all wiring is correct.
2. Ensure that the 24 VAC at 50/60 Hz or 24-30 VDC power is supplied to
terminals 1 and 2.

NOTICE
The IP-IO module input power polarity and voltage level must be strictly
observed. Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment
damage.

NOTICE
EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
Do not connect 230 VAC or 110 VAC to any terminal.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

541
15 IP-IO Modules
15.20 Powering Up an IP-IO Module

3. Ensure that the ground cable is connected to terminal number 3.

NOTICE
Earth ground must be properly connected to avoid damage to the device
and to ensure proper operation of the device.

4. After powering up, check that the Status LED changes to a constant green
light after about a minute.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

542
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.21 Digital Inputs

15.21 Digital Inputs

The digital inputs can be used for sensing of multiple dry contact digital inputs in
applications, such as equipment status monitoring or alarm point monitoring.
As counter inputs, digital inputs are commonly used in energy metering
applications.

15.21.1 Inputs
The DI digital inputs are designed to read two different types of inputs:
• Digital
• Counter

Digital inputs
The external connection of a digital input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Digital input external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm

Counter inputs
A counter input uses the same hardware configuration as the digital input that is
shown in the figure above.

15.21.2 Specifications
Channels, IP-IO-DI10 10, DI1 to DI10

Channels, IP-IO-UIO10 0

Channels, IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 0

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

543
15 IP-IO Modules
15.21 Digital Inputs

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, typical wetting current 2.4
mA

Absolute maximum ratings -0.5 to +24 VDC

Digital inputs

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, typical wetting current 2.4
mA

Minimum pulse width 150 ms

Counter inputs

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, typical wetting current 2.4
mA

Minimum pulse width 20 ms

Maximum frequency 25 Hz

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

544
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.22 Universal Inputs/Outputs

15.22 Universal Inputs/Outputs

The universal inputs/outputs are ideal for any mix of temperature, pressure, flow,
status points, and similar point types in a building control system.
As counter inputs, the universal inputs/outputs are commonly used in energy
metering applications. As RTD inputs, they are ideal for temperature points in a
building control system. As supervised inputs, they are used for security
applications where it is critical to know whether or not a wire has been cut or
shorted. These events provide a separate indication of alarms and events in the
system.
The universal inputs/outputs are capable of supporting analog outputs of type
voltage outputs. Therefore, the universal inputs/outputs support a wide range of
devices, such as actuators.
The IP-IO-UIO10 and IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 models have universal inputs/outputs
of type Ub.

15.22.1 Inputs
The universal inputs/outputs can be configured to read several different types of
inputs:
• Digital
• Counter
• Supervised
• Voltage
• Current
• Temperature
• Resistive
• 2-Wire RTD temperature

Digital inputs
The external connection of a digital input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Digital input external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

545
15 IP-IO Modules
15.22 Universal Inputs/Outputs

VS = 24 V
RPU = 10 kohm

Counter inputs
A counter input uses the same hardware configuration as the digital input that is
shown in the figure above.

Supervised inputs
Supervised inputs are contact closing inputs supplemented with the supervision
of the field wiring integrity. This supervision is a required feature in many security
system applications. The supervised inputs provide the ability to detect specific
forms of tampering or trouble with the wire connections to the field contacts. The
supervision is achieved with a combination of 1 or 2 resistors attached to the
contact in the field. The resistor combination creates continuous current flow
through the field contact loop and presents a defined set of expected resistance
values for each of the defined conditions. If someone is attempting to defeat the
monitoring of the field contact by short circuiting the wire with a jumper or cutting
the wire, the objective is to detect and indicate such a condition. The resistors
need to be located at the end of the cable close to the field contact, so that the
point where there is a risk that the circuit is defeated is between the resistors and
the I/O.
Three different types of supervised input connections are supported:
• Series only
• Parallel only
• Series and parallel
Each type of supervised input connection provides a different capability in
regards to what form of tamper/trouble can be detected regardless of switch
contact open or closed condition.
Series only: A single resistor, which is connected in series with the switch, can
only detect tamper/trouble in the form of a short circuit across the wire pair. A
single series resistor supervision is frequently configured with a normally closed
field contact. This provides for the short circuit to be detected and a cut wire will
show as an alarm condition. The external connection of a series only supervised
input connection is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Series only external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RS = 1 to 10 kohm

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

546
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.22 Universal Inputs/Outputs

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Parallel only: A single resistor, which is connected in parallel with the switch,
can only detect tamper/trouble in the form of an open circuit in the field wiring
loop. With single parallel resistor supervision and use of a normally open switch
in the field, the opened wiring shows as a detected fault and the shorted wiring
shows as an alarm condition. The external connection of a parallel only
supervised input connection is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Parallel only external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RP = 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm
Series and parallel: Two resistors, where one is connected in series with the
switch and one is connected in parallel with the switch, can detect tamper/trouble
conditions in the form of both an open and a shorted circuit. The external
connection of a series and parallel supervised input connection is shown in the
following figure.

Figure: Series and parallel external connection

K is the monitored external switch.

RP = RS ± 5 %, 1 to 10 kohm
VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

547
15 IP-IO Modules
15.22 Universal Inputs/Outputs

Voltage inputs
The external connection of a voltage input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Voltage input external connection

VG is the monitored external voltage (0 to 10 VDC).

RIN = 100 kohm

Current inputs
The external connection of a current input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Current input external connection

IG is the monitored external current (0 to 20 mA).

RSH = 47 ohm
In the internal configuration of the current input, there is a current limit circuit in
order to help protect the shunt resistor from over load. The input current is limited
to 40 mA with a serial connected FET transistor. If this limit is reached for 0.5
seconds, the transistor is turned off. When 5 seconds have elapsed, the
transistor is turned on again to make a new start attempt.

Temperature inputs
The external connection of a temperature input is shown in the following figure.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

548
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.22 Universal Inputs/Outputs

Figure: Temperature input external connection

RT is the monitored external thermistor.

When a universal input is used as a temperature input, VS and RPU in the internal
configuration of the universal input are used according to the following table.
Thermistor type VS RPU

20 kohm 5V 10 kohm

10 kohm 5V 10 kohm

2.2 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

1.8 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

1 kohm 1V 1.5 kohm

The resulting voltage across the thermistor is measured and a temperature is

calculated dependent on the selected thermistor type.

Resistive inputs
The external connection of a resistive input is shown in the following figure.

Figure: Resistive input external connection

RM is the monitored external resistance.

VS = 5 V
RPU = 10 kohm

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

549
15 IP-IO Modules
15.22 Universal Inputs/Outputs

2-wire RTD temperature inputs

The external connection of a 2-wire RTD temperature input is shown in the
following figure.

Figure: 2-wire temperature input external connection

RT is the monitored external RTD.

RW is the wiring resistance.
VS = 1 V
RPU = 1.5 kohm
When an input is used as a 2-wire RTD temperature input, you need to specify
the wiring resistance in the software.
The input is measuring the total resulting voltage and the voltage across the RTD
is calculated. The voltage across the RTD is then converted to a raw resistance
value.

15.22.2 Outputs
Voltage outputs
The universal inputs/outputs can be configured as voltage outputs.

Figure: Voltage output internal configuration and connection of external resistive load

ROUT is approximately equal to 10 ohm.

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

550
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.22 Universal Inputs/Outputs

VOUT range is 0 to 10 VDC.

RLOAD minimum is 5 kohm.

15.22.3 Specifications
Channels, IP-IO-DI10 0

Channels, IP-IO-UIO10 10 Ub, Ub1 to Ub10

Channels, IP-IO-UIO5DOFA4 5 Ub, Ub1 to Ub5

Absolute maximum ratings -0.5 to +24 VDC

A/D converter resolution 16 bits

Universal input/output protection Transient voltage suppressor on each universal input/output

Digital inputs

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, typical wetting current 2.4
mA

Minimum pulse width 150 ms

Counter inputs

Range Dry contact switch closure or open collector/open drain, 24 VDC, typical wetting current 2.4
mA

Minimum pulse width 20 ms

Maximum frequency 25 Hz

Supervised inputs

5 V circuit, 1 or 2 resistors
Monitored switch combinations Series only, parallel only, and series and parallel

Resistor range 1 to 10 kohm

For a 2-resistor configuration, each resistor must have the same value +/- 5 %

Voltage inputs

Range 0 to 10 VDC

Accuracy +/-(7 mV + 0.2 % of reading)

Resolution 1.0 mV

Impedance 100 kohm

Current inputs

Range 0 to 20 mA

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

551
15 IP-IO Modules
15.22 Universal Inputs/Outputs

Accuracy +/-(0.01 mA + 0.4 % of reading)

Resolution 1 μA

Impedance 47 ohm

Resistive inputs

10 ohm to 10 kohm accuracy +/-(7 + 4 x 10-3 x R) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm

10 kohm to 60 kohm accuracy +/-(4 x 10-3 x R + 7 x 10-8 x R2) ohm

R = Resistance in ohm

Temperature inputs (thermistors)

Range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

Supported thermistors

Honeywell 20 kohm

Type I (Continuum) 10 kohm

Type II (I/NET) 10 kohm

Type III (Satchwell) 10 kohm

Type IV (FD) 10 kohm

Type V (FD w/ 11k shunt) Linearized 10 kohm

Satchwell D?T Linearized 10 kohm

Johnson Controls 2.2 kohm

Xenta 1.8 kohm

Balco 1 kohm

Measurement accuracy

20 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-1.5 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-2.7 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.5 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-0.9 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)

10 kohm, 2.2 kohm, and 1.8 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-0.75 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-1.35 °F)
-30 to +100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (-22 to +212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)

Linearized 10 kohm -50 to -30 °C: +/-2.0 °C (-58 to -22 °F: +/-3.6 °F)
-30 to 0 °C: +/-0.75 °C (-22 to +32 °F: +/-1.35 °F)
0 to 100 °C: +/-0.2 °C (32 to 212 °F: +/-0.4 °F)
100 to 150 °C: +/-0.5 °C (212 to 302 °F: +/-0.9 °F)

1 kohm -50 to +150 °C: +/-1.0 °C (-58 to +302° F: +/-1.8 °F)

Hardware 04-40001-01-en, December 2021

552
 15 IP-IO Modules
15.22 Universal Inputs/Outputs

RTD temperature inputs

Supported RTDs Pt1000, Ni1000, and LG-Ni1000

Pt1000

Sensor range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

BACnet/IP device environment Sensor range Measurement accuracy

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +70 °C (-58 to +158 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) 70 to 150 °C (158 to 302 °F) +/-0.7 °C (+/-1.3 °F)

-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-1.0 °C (+/-1.8 °F)

Ni1000

Sensor range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

BACnet/IP device environment Sensor range Measurement accuracy

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

LG-Ni1000

Sensor range -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F)

BACnet/IP device environment Sensor range Measurement accuracy

0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

-40 to +60 °C (-40 to +140 °F) -50 to +150 °C (-58 to +302 °F) +/-0.5 °C (+/-0.9 °F)

RTD temperature wiring

Maximum wire resistance 20 ohm/wire (40 ohm total)

Maximum wire capacitance 60 nF

The wire resistance and capacitance typically corresponds to a 200 m wire.

Voltage outputs

Range 0 to 10 VDC

Accuracy +/-60 mV

Resolution 10 mV

Minimum load resistance 5 kohm

Load range -1 to +2 mA

04-40001-01-en, December 2021 Hardware

553
15 IP-IO Modules
15.23 Relay Outputs

15.23 Relay Outputs

The relay outputs support digital Form A point types. The Form A relays are
designed for direct load applications.
The outputs can be configured as one of the following types:
• Digital output
• Digital pulsed output
• Pulse width modulated output
• Tristate output
• Trista